DVRCMS.Com

Latest Dahua firmware 2024

admin — Sat, 30 Mar 2024 10:44:32 +0000

Latest Dahua firmware 2024, Dahua Technology is a world-leading video-centric AIoT solution and service provider. The company firmly strengthens its technological strategies that include AloT and IoT digital intelligence platforms, comprehensively promoting the digital intelligence upgrading of cities and enterprises based on customer needs, and creating more value for the digital-intelligent transformation of various industries.

How to Download and Prepare Firmware

Description

This guide will show how to download and prepare the firmware file for a Dahua device.

Firmware files for Dahua devices can be found at Firmware by Device or the specific product page for the device

Firmware is typical provided in a ZIP file, a compressed file format

This file will contain the actual firmware file, which needs to be extracted from the ZIP file in preparation for the upgrade

Prerequisites

• Computer with internet access (to download firmware file)

• Dahua device

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

Confirm the Model and current firmware of Dahua device

1. Enter the IP of the device into a browser

At the Web Login

Enter the Username and Password

Click Login

2. Click Info

3. Click Version

The Device Type will be displayed

The current System Version will be displayed

Download the firmware file for device from DahuaWiki

4. In a browser go to DahuaWiki.com

Under Specifications, Firmware, & Manuals

Click the device type (in this example Recorder)

5. Enter the device model into the field

6. The results will be filtered

7. Click the firmware icon to download the firmware file

8. The file will download

Extract the firmware file to local computer

9. Right click the Start Menu / Windows icon in the bottom left of the screen

Select File Explorer

10. Select Desktop

11. Click Home

Then click New folder to create a new folder to extract the contents of the firmware zip file

12. Find the created folder in the list, double click to open

13. Under the Downloads window of the browser, click ‘Show in folder’

A new File Explorer window should open containing the directory the firmware zip was downloaded to

Locate the file in the list

14. Right click

Select Cut

15. Select the window with the new directory

Right click in the window

Select Paste

The folder will appear in the directory

16. Right click the file

17. The contents of the zip file will appear in a new window

18. Click to select all files in the folder

Drag and drop the files to the created folder

The files will appear in the directory

The firmware file will appear in the directory ready to use

How to Reset Device to Factory Default

Latest Dahua firmware 2024

Step by Step Instructions

1. From Live View

Right click select Main Menu

2. Under Setting

Click System

3. Click Default

4. Click Factory Reset

5. A prompt will appear to confirm the factory default

Click Yes

6. The unit will default and reboot

7. When the device has booted back up it will be factory reset and is now ready for device initialization

SystemUI New

Step by Step Instructions

1. From Live View

Right click, select Main Menu

2. Click Operation

3. Click System Maintain

4. Click Default

5. Click Factory Default

6. A prompt will appear to confirm the factory default

Click OK

7. The NVR will default and reboot itself

8. The unit will boot back up

9. The device has been factory reset and is now ready for device initialization

WebUI Old

Step by Step Instructions

1. Enter the IP of the device into a browser

At the Web Login

Enter the Username and Password

Click Login

2. Click Setup

3. Click System

4. Click Default

5. Click Factory Reset

6. A prompt will appear to confirm the Factory Reset

The unit will reboot and is now ready for device initialization

WebUI New

Step by Step Instructions

1. Enter the IP of the device into a browser

At the Web Login

Enter the Username and Password

Click Login

2. Click Setup

3. Click System

4. Click Default

5. Click Factory Reset

6. A prompt will appear to confirm the factory default

Click Yes

The unit will reboot and is now ready for device initialization

Firmware Update via USB Drive

Description

This page will show you how to update the firmware of your Dahua device via a USB drive at the recorder

Note: All devices should be “Factory Reset” once the firmware update is complete.

Prerequisites

• Dahua device

• USB drive with the firmware file for the device – Firmware by Device

SystemUI Old

Prerequisites

• USB Drive 1GB or more

• The proper firmware file for the device

• Physical access to the recording device

• A computer to load the firmware files onto the USB

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

1. Download Firmware and copy to USB such as a flash drive ➞ Insert USB into recorders USB port.

2. It will prompt for option to upgrade, Click System upgrade ➞ Click Start.

3. Browse for firmware ➞ Open firmware folder is in ➞ Select Bin File ➞ Click Start. Device will reboot once finished.

SystemUI New

Prerequisites

• USB Drive 1GB or more

• The proper firmware file for the device

• Physical access to the recording device

• A computer to load the firmware files onto the USB

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

USB drive with Firmware file should be plugged into USB slot on recorder

1. From the Main Menu, click Operation

2. Click System Maintain > Upgrade

3. Click the System Upgrade in the middle of the page.

4. Select the Firmware file from the list

Click OK

5. The firmware update will begin.

Make sure to not unplug the power during this process.

6. The NVR will reboot as the final step of the process

Firmware Update via WebUI

Description

This page will show you how to update the firmware of your Dahua device via the WebUI

Note: All devices should be “Factory Reset” once the firmware update is complete.

Prerequisites

• Dahua device with network connection

• Local Windows computer

• Firmware file for device downloaded to computer – Firmware by Device

Instructions

WebUI Old

Prerequisites

• Computer

• Internet

• Compatible Browser (Internet Explorer)

• NVR/HCVR/IPC

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

Step 1: From IE(Internet Explorer) type in the devices IP address on the IE address bar → login with credentials.

Step2: Setup → System → Upgrade

Step 3: Click on “Browse” → Select correct firmware

• Click on “Upgrade”

• Device will reboot after upgrade is finished.

USB firmware Upgrade via web.

If firmware is on USB Device → Click on browse → Navigate to USB location → Select firmware → Open → Upgrade.

WebUI New

Prerequisites

• Dahua device with network connection

• Local windows computer

• Firmware file for device downloaded to computer

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

1. Enter the IP of the device into a browser

At the Web Login

Enter the Username and Password

Click Login

2. Click Operation

3. Click System Maintain

4. Click Upgrade

5. Click Browser

6. Locate the firmware file

Click Open

7. Click Upgrade to begin the update process

8. A message will appear to confirm the upgrade process

9. When the upgrade is complete the device will reboot

Firmware Update via SmartPSS

Description

This page will show you how to update the firmware of your Dahua device via SmartPSS

Note: All devices should be “Factory Reset” once the firmware update is complete.

Prerequisites

• SmartPSS installed

• Device added to SmartPSS

• Firmware file downloaded to computer – Firmware by Device

Instructions

SmartPSS 2.002

Prerequisites

• SmartPSS installed

• Dahua device added to SmartPSS

• Firmware file for device downloaded to computer – Firmware by Device

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

1. From the Main Page of SmartPSS

Click Device CFG

2. Click to select the device from the device tree on the left side of the screen

3. Click Upgrade

4. Click the folder icon

5. Locate the firmware file

Click Open

6. Click Firmware Upgrade to begin the firmware update process

7. A prompt will appear to confirm the upgrade process

8. A prompt will appear to confirm a successful upgrade

Firmware Upgrade via ConfigTool

Description

This page will show you how to upgrade the firmware of your Dahua device via ConfigTool

Note: All devices should be “Factory Reset” once the firmware update is complete.

Prerequisites

• Dahua device(s) with network connection(s)

• ConfigTool installed on a local computer

• Firmware file for device(s) downloaded to computer – Firmware by Device

Step by Step Instructions

Single Device Upgrade

1. Open ConfigTool and click on Search Setting at the top

2. Check the boxes for both Current Segment Search and Other Segment Search.
Enter the IP range for the device you are looking for in Start IP and End IP.
Enter the login information for that device in Username and Password.
Then click OK at the bottom

3. Click on Device Upgrade on the left.
Find the device you want to upgrade in the list and click on the Folder icon next to it under the Upgrade File Path column

4. Use the file explorer to find the firmware file on your computer and select it.
Then click on Open

5. Verify the file path is listed next to the device in the list.
Then click on the Upgrade icon to the right of the device in the Operate column

6. Click on OK

7. The progress bar will fill up as the device is upgraded

8. Once the device has been successfully upgraded you will see a Green Check Mark next to it in the list

Batch Device Upgrade

1. Open ConfigTool and click on Search Setting at the top

2. Check the boxes for both Current Segment Search and Other Segment Search.
Enter the IP range for the devices you are looking for in Start IP and End IP.
Enter the login information for those devices in Username and Password.
Then click OK at the bottom

3. Click on Device Upgrade on the left.
Find the devices you want to upgrade in the list and check the boxes next to them. (Make sure all devices you check require the same firmware.)
Then click on Batch Upgrade at the top

4. Click on OK

5. Click on Browse

6. Use the file explorer to find the firmware file on your computer and select it.
Then click on Open

7. Click OK at the bottom

8. The progress bars will fill up as the devices are upgraded

9. Once the devices have been successfully upgraded you will see Green Check Marks next to them in the list

Recorder Firmware Update via Online

Description

This page will show you how to update your Dahua Recorder online.

Note: All devices should be “Factory Reset” once the firmware update is complete.

When the NVR detects there is a newer firmware in the server, a ‘1′ icon will appear at the System icon.

The entire process takes about 5 minutes depending on network connection.

Prerequisites

• Dahua device that supports online update

• Internet connection to Dahua device

Instructions

SystemUI

Prerequisites

• Dahua device with internet connection

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

1. From Live View

Right click, select Main Menu

2. Click Operation

3. Click System Maintain

4. The upgrade menu will show if a new firmware version is available

5. Click Upgrade Now to begin the update process

6. A prompt will appear to confirm that Surveillance will be paused during the upgrade process

Click OK

7. The firmware file will begin to download

8. After the download is complete the unit will automatically begin the firmware upgrade

9. The unit will reboot as the final step of the upgrade

10. Once the firmware update is complete the unit will reboot. A factory default is recommended after a firmware update

From Live View, right click Select Main Menu

11. Click Operation

12. Click System Maintain

13. Click Default

14. Click Factory Default

15. A prompt will appear to confirm the factory default

Click OK

16. The unit will reboot

17. When the unit boots back up it will be factory defaulted and ready for the Device Initialization process

WebUI

Prerequisites

• Dahua device with internet connection

• Local Windows computer

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

1. Enter the IP of the device into a browser

At the Web Login

Enter the Username and Password

Click Login

2. Click Operation

3. Click System Maintain

4. Click Upgrade

5. The upgrade menu will show if a new firmware version is available

6. Click Upgrade Now

7. A prompt will appear to confirm that Surveillance will be paused during the upgrade process

Click OK

8. The firmware file will begin to download

9. After the download is complete the unit will automatically begin the firmware upgrade

10. Once the firmware update is complete the unit will reboot. A factory default is recommended after a firmware update

Enter the IP of the device into a browser

At the Web Login

Enter the Username and Password

Click Login

12. Click Operation

13. Click System Maintain

14. Click Default

Click Factory Default

15. A prompt will appear to confirm the factory default

Click OK

The unit will factory default and reboot

When the unit boots back up it will be factory defaulted and ready for the Device Initialization process

Index of /Firmware

Name	Last modified	Size	Description
.
Parent Directory	.	–	.
Access Control/	2021-07-13 11:30	–	.
Dekodery/	2022-11-29 14:22	–	.
Digital Signage/	2020-10-07 15:08	–	.
Domofony/	2020-04-10 16:26	–	.
Kamery -IP- ANPR/	2021-10-12 13:26	–	.
Kamery -IP- obrotowe- PTZ/	2021-07-05 12:01	–	.
Kamery -IP- stałopozycyjne/	2022-10-12 13:42	–	.
Kamery -IP- termowizyjne/	2023-11-20 11:10	–	.
Kamery-IP- panoramiczne/	2024-03-07 15:08	–	.
Klawiatury/	2019-11-05 13:59	–	.
Macierze/	2020-11-17 15:26	–	.
Monokulary/	2022-11-15 09:43	–	.
Radary/	2020-06-30 14:42	–	.
Rejestratory/	2023-03-21 12:24	–	.
Switche/	2021-07-07 08:27	–	.
TabliceInteraktywne/	2023-03-24 10:49	–	.
WiFi/	2020-04-16 11:22	–	.
_RTMP/	2021-07-08 12:41	–	.

LTS Connect Android User Manual

admin — Tue, 05 Dec 2023 11:33:40 +0000

The LTS Connect mobile client (Android), is designed for the phone or tablet based on Android 4.1 or later. With the Mobile Client, you can remotely control devices (NVRs, DVRs, network cameras, indoor stations, doorbells, security control panels, the Pyronix devices, the access control devices, etc) via Wi-Fi or cellular network. You can also share your devices to other accounts and use devices shared from other users. The Mobile Client provides access to the PT service, which is a cloud service, to manage your devices.

Note

Network traffic charges may be produced during the use of the Mobile Client. For details, refer to the local ISP.

1.1System Requirements and Conventions

System Requirement

Android 4.4 or later versions.

Conventions

In the following chapters, we simplify LTS Connect mobile client (Android) as “Mobile Client”, devices such as DVR, NVR, encoder, and network camera as “device”, and devices which support being added to PT Cloud service as “PT Cloud Device”.

Chapter 2 Visitor Mode

Visitor mode allows you to manage devices on the Mobile Client without registration. When you log in as a visitor, a visitor account will be created for you automatically, and the account will not change on the same phone or tablet.

Caution

For information security, please use visitor mode cautiously, which is NOT password-protected.

Note

In visitor mode, you can only manage your devices on a same phone or tablet. To avoid this inconvenience, you can register an account. For details about registering account in visitor mode, see Register an Account in Visitor Mode.

LTS Connect Android User Manual

1.1Functions in Visitor Mode

Most of the functions supported in a registered account are supported in visitor mode. Tap Visitor Mode on the Home page or the Login page to enter visitor mode.

The followings are the functions supported in visitor mode.

Device Management

Add devices to the Mobile Client and configure device settings. See Add Device for Management

and Configure Your Device for details.

Sharing Device

Tap → Scan QR Code to scan the QR code of another visitor account to share device(s) to the account. For details about sharing device, see Device Sharing.

Note

To get the QR code of a visitor account, go to More → Account Management.

Live View and Playback

View live video of the added devices and play back the videos. See Live View and Playback for details.

Access Control

Control door status and check access control events. See Manage Access Control Devices for details.

Note

Make sure you have added access control devices to the Mobile Client.

Alarm Configuration

Configure the alarm notifications on Alarm Notification page. See Notification for details.

1.2Register an Account in Visitor Mode

Though the visitor mode allows you to manage devices without registration, you can only manage your devices on one phone or tablet. With a registered account, you can manage devices on different phones or tablets.

Steps

1.Tap Visitor Mode on the Login page or Home page to enter the visitor mode.

2.Tap More → Register an Account to open the Join Us window.

3.Tap Terms of Service and Privacy Policy to read the relevant information.

4.Tap Agree if you accept our terms of service and privacy policy.

5.Register an account by mobile phone number or email address.

Note

See Register by Email Address and Register by Mobile Phone Number for details.

Chapter 3 Registration

You can register an account by your mobile phone number or your email address. With a registered account, you can log in to the Mobile Clients running on different mobile phones or tablets, which provides convenience for managing your devices.

Note

You can use visitor mode to manage your devices without registration. See Visitor Mode for details.

1.1Register by Email Address

You can register an account by your email address.

Steps

1.Tap Login/Register on the Home page.

2.Tap Register to enter the Join Us page.

3.Tap Terms of Service and Privacy Policy to read the relevant content and then tap Agree to continue.

4.Select the region where your devices locate.

5.In the Register page, enter your email address and then create a password.

Note

We highly recommend you to create a strong password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.

6.Tap Get Security Code to get the security code for verification.

7.Enter the security code you received, and then tap Finish.

1.2Register by Mobile Phone Number

You can register an account by your mobile phone number.

Steps

1.Tap Login/Register on the Home page.

2.Tap Register to enter the Join Us page.

3.Tap Terms of Service and Privacy Policy to read the relevant content and then tap Agree to continue.

4.Select the region where your devices locate.

5.In the Register page, tap Register by Mobile Phone Number.

6.Enter your mobile phone number and then create a password.

Note

7.Tap Get Security Code to get the security code for verification.

8.Enter the security code you received, and then tap Finish.

Chapter 4 Device Management

You need to add devices to the Mobile Client before you can do further remote operations such as live view and playback.

The devices added to the Mobile Client will be displayed in the device list.

In the device list, the video resources are displayed as the thumbnails of their video channel images; the security control resources, doorbells, and access control resources are displayed as device pictures.

1.1Add Device for Management

You need to add devices to the Mobile Client first so that subsequent operations such as live view and playback can be available. If you want to receive alarm event information from a device, you should add it by scanning QR code or LTS connect domain.

Note

For details about managing alarm event information, see Notification.

1.1.1Add an Online Device

The Mobile Client can detect the online devices in the same local area network with your phone or tablet, and you can add the detected online devices to the Mobile Client.

Before You Start

Make sure the devices are connected to the same local area network with the phone or tablet.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap → Online Device to enter the Online Device page. All detected online devices will be in the list.

2.Select a device for adding.

Figure 4-1 Online Device

Note

●For network cameras, make sure the device Multicast Discovery function is enabled so that the online network camera can be automatically detected via private multicast protocol in the LAN. For details, see User Manual of the network camera.

●For the inactive device (excluding the access control device), tap Active to create a password for it before you can add the device properly. For more information about the device activation, see Set a Password to Activate a Device.

3.Optional: Edit the network information.

1)Tap .

2)Change the device IP address to the same LAN as your phone’s by either editing the IP address manually or enabling the device DHCP function.

3)Tap and input the admin password of the device to save the settings.

4.Tap Add.

5.Enter the required information, including device alias, user name and the password.

6.Tap .

7.Optional: Tap the device name or tap , and then tap Delete Device.

1.1.2Add Device(s) by Scanning Device QR Code

You can add the device by scanning the device’s QR code. You can also add device(s) by scanning the QR code obtained via the web page of the device.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap → Scan QR Code to enter the Scan QR Code page.

2.Scan the QR code.

–Scan the QR code by aligning the QR Code with the scanning frame.

Note

●Usually, the device QR code is printed on the label, which is on the back cover of the device.

●Tap

to enable the flashlight if the scanning environment is too dark.

–If there are QR codes in photo album of the phone or tablet, tap to extract QR code from local album.

3.Optional: Perform the following operations if the following situations occur.

–If the system fails to recognize the QR code, tap to add the device manually.

–If the device has been added to another account, you should unbind the device from the account first. See Unbind Device from Its Original Account for details.

–If the device is offline, you should connect a network for the device. For details, see Connect Offline Device to Network for details.

–If the device is not activated, the Activate Device page will pop up (excluding the access control device). You should activate the device. For details, see Set a Password to Activate a Device for details.

–If the PT cloud service is disabled for the device, you should enable the function (excluding the access control device). For details, see Enable PT Cloud Service When Adding Device on Mobile Client for details.

4.Tap Add on the Result page.

5.Enter the device verification code. The device will be added successfully.

Note

●The default device verification code is usually on the device label. If no verification code found, enter the device verification code you created when enabling PT Cloud service.

●For details about enabling PT Cloud service, see Enable PT Cloud Service for Device.

6.Optional: Tap Configure DDNS to configure DDNS.

Note

●See Set DDNS for details.

●After DDNS being enabled, the device will be accessed via IP address in priority, so that remote configuration of the device will be supported and the streaming speed will be faster than streaming via PT Cloud service.

●If you skip this step, the device will be accessed via PT Cloud service.

7.Tap Finish.

8.Optional: Tap the device name or tap , and then tap Delete Device.

1.1.3Add a Device by IP/Domain

You can add the device by fixed IP address or domain name. The streaming speed of devices added by IP/domain is faster than those added by LTS Connect domain.

Before You Start

If you want to add the access control device, activate it before adding. See the user manual of the access control device for details.

Steps

1.Tap and select Manual Adding.

2.Select IP/Domain as the adding type.

3.Enter the required information, such as alias, address, user name, camera No. and device password.

Address

Device IP address or domain name.

Camera No.

The number of the camera(s) under the device can be obtained after the device is successfully added.

4.Tap to add the device.

Note

●If the device is offline, you should connect the device to a network. For details, see Connect Offline Device to Network.

●If the device is not activated, the Activate Device page will be popped up (exclude the access control device). You should activate the device. For details, see Set a Password to Activate a Device.

5.Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the device.

Edit Device Information

On the Device Information page, tap to edit the basic information of the device.

Star Live View Tap Start Live View to view the live view of the device.

Delete a Device Tap and then tap Delete to delete the device.

Configure Device Parameters

Tap and then tap Remote Configuration to remotely configure device parameters such as basic information, time settings, recording schedule, etc.

Remote Controller Tap and then tap Remote Controller to remotely control the device.

1.1.4Add a Device by LTS Connect Domain

For devices which support PT Cloud service (a cloud service), you can add them manually by LTS Connect domain.

Before You Start

Make sure the device is powered on.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap → Manual Adding to enter the Add Device page.

2.Select LTS Connect Domain as the adding type.

3.Enter the device serial No. manually.

Note

●By default, the device serial No. is on the device label.

●For the video intercom devices, when entering the serial No. of the indoor station, the corresponding door station will also be added to the Mobile Client automatically.

●An indoor station can be linked to multiple door stations.

4.Tap to search the device.

Note

●If the device has been added to another account, you should unbind the device from the account first. See Unbind Device from Its Original Account for details.

●If the device is offline, you should connect a network for the device. For details, see Connect Offline Device to Network for details.

●If the device is not activated, the Activate Device page will pop up (excluding the access control device). You should activate the device. For details, see Set a Password to Activate a Device for details.

●If PT Cloud service is disabled for the device, you should enable the function (excluding the access control device). For details, see Enable PT Cloud service When Adding Device on Mobile Client for details.

5.Tap Add on the Result page.

6.Enter the device verification code. The device will be added successfully.

Note

●The default device verification code is usually on the device label. If no verification code found, enter the device verification code you created when enabling PT Cloud service.

●For details about enabling PT Cloud service, see Enable PT Cloud service for Device.

7.Optional: Tap Configure DDNS to configure DDNS.

Note

●See Set DDNS for details.

●After DDNS being enabled, the device will be accessed via IP address in priority, so that remote configuration of the device will be supported, and the streaming speed will be faster than streaming via PT Cloud service.

●If you skip this step, the device will be accessed via PT Cloud service.

8.Tap Finish.

9.Optional: Tap the device name or tap , and then tap Delete Device.

1.2Set a Password to Activate a Device

When adding a device, if the device is not activated, a window will pop up to ask you to activate the device.

Before You Start

The device to be activated and the phone running the Mobile Client should be on the same LAN.

Steps

1.Add a device.

2.On the Activate Device page, tap Set Device Password.

3.Create a password.

Note

If you forget the password in the future, you might need to reset the device.

4.Tap Activate to activate the device.

5.Enable DHCP or manually configure network if you enter the Network Configuration page.

1.3Connect Offline Device to Network

When adding a device to the Mobile Client, if the device is offline, you should connect the device to a network first. The Mobile Client provides the following four methods for connecting offline devices to networks.

Connect to Wired Network

Use this method if a router is available for the device to connect to.

Note

Make sure the device is powered on.

Connect to Wireless Network

Use this method if a wireless network is available for the device to connect to. “Device” here excludes wireless doorbell, wireless security control panel, and Mini Trooper (a kind of battery camera).

Note

●Make sure your phone has connected to a Wi-Fi network before using the method.

●The device should support connecting to wireless network.

Connect to Network by Wi-Fi Configuration

You can use this method to connect wireless doorbell to the network by using the doorbell to scan the QR code generated by the Mobile Client.

Tap Connect to a Network on the Result page and then follow the instructions on the subsequent pages to connect the device to the network.

Connect to Network by Access Point

In the Mobile Client, Access Point (AP) refers to a networking hardware device (e.g., wireless doorbell or wireless security control panel), which can provide a Wi-Fi network for the phone to connect to.

Note

Make sure you have turned on WLAN in the phone’s operation system.

Tap Connect to a Network on the Result page, select Wireless Connection as the connection type, and then follow the instructions on the subsequent pages to complete the connection process.

1.4Enable PT Cloud service for Device

PT Cloud service is a cloud service. When adding a device via LTS Connect Domain or scanning QR code, the service should be enabled. You can enable the service via the Mobile Client, the device web page, or LTS Connect Pro client software. This section introduces how to enable the service via the former two methods.

1.4.1Enable PT Cloud service When Adding Device on Mobile Client

When adding a device via LTS Connect domain or scanning QR code, if the PT Cloud service is not enabled for the device, the Enable PT Cloud service window will pop up to remind you to enable the service first.

Perform the following task to enable the PT Cloud service in this case.

Steps

1.Add a device via LTS Connect domain or scanning QR code.

Note

See Add a Device by LTS Connect Domain or Add Device(s) by Scanning Device QR Code for details.

If the device’s PT Cloud service is not enabled, the following window pops up.

2.On the Enable PT Cloud service window, tap PT Cloud Terms of Service to read the terms of service.

3.Check Read and Agree PT Cloud Terms of Service.

4.Tap Next.

5.Create a device verification code.

Note

You can change the device verification code. See Change Device’s Verification Code for details.

6.Tap Enable PT Cloud service. What to do next

Continue the process for adding the device. See Add a Device by LTS Connect Domain or Add

Device(s) by Scanning Device QR Code for details.

1.4.2Enable PT Cloud service on Device Web Page

You can enable PT Cloud service for a device on the device web page.

Steps

1.Visit the device IP address on the web browser.

2.Enter the device user name and device password to log in to the device web page.

3.Tap Configuration → Network → Advanced Settings → Platform Access to enter the Platform Access page.

Figure 4-2 The Platform Access Page

4.Check Enable.

The system will set LTS Connect as the platform access mode by default.

5.Optional: If it is the first time to enable the PT Cloud service, create a device verification code.

6.Tap Save.

1.5Enable DHCP Function on Device Web Page

You can enable DHCP by following the steps below to allow allocating DNS address automatically.

Steps

1.Visit the IP address of the device.

2.Enter the device user name and device password and log in to the device’s web page.

3.Click Configuration → Network → Basic Settings to enter the Basic Settings page.

4.Enable DHCP.

DNS address will be allocated automatically.

5.Click Save.

1.6Unbind Device from Its Original Account

When adding a device by scanning QR code or LTS Connect domain, if the result shows that the device has been added to another account, you should unbind it from the account before you can add it to your account.

Before You Start

Make sure the device and the phone running the Mobile Client are in the same local area network.

Steps

1.Add the device by scanning QR code or LTS Connect domain.

See Add Device(s) by Scanning Device QR Code or Add a Device by LTS Connect Domain for details.

2.On the Result page, tap Unbind Device to start unbind the device from its account.

3.Optional: If the network exception occurs, perform the following operations.

–Tap Connect to Wi-Fi to connect the phone to the Wi-Fi network and make sure the device is in the same local area network with the phone.

–Tap Or you can unbind the device from its account in local GUI to unbind the device via local GUI.

Note

Unbinding the device via local GUI should be supported by the device.

4.On the Unbind Device page, enter the device password and the verification code displayed on the image.

5.Tap Finish.

1.7Device Sharing

You can share devices to other users. The recipient can access the devices according to the

permissions you grant them. You can also receive and use the devices shared by other users.

1.7.1Share a Specific Device via Its QR Code

You can share a specific device to another LTS Connect user via the device’s QR code. You can also select the device permissions granted to the recipient to determine which operations the recipient can do on the device.

Steps

1.Enter the Recipient page.

Option 1 Tap → Share Device → Share Device.

Option 2 On device list page, tap . You will enter the Recipient page.

2.Tap Share via QR Code and then select a device (if required) to enter the Share via QR Code

page.

3.Swipe up to show the complete QR code.

4.Let the recipient use the LTS Connect Mobile Client to scan the QR code.

The recipient needs to send a device sharing application to you. After that, you’ll receive a notification about the application on your Mobile Client.

5.Tap View on the notification to view the details of the application.

6.Set device permissions for the recipient.

–Check All Permissions to grant all available permissions to the recipient.

–Tap , and then select permission(s) to grant the selected one(s) to the recipient, and finally tap .

7.Tap Agree.

The device will be shared to the recipient. The recipient will be able to view the device on the device list.

8.Optional: Edit the device permissions.

1)Go to More → Manage Sharing Settings.

2)Tap the device and then edit the device permissions granted to the recipient.

9.Optional: Delete the recipient account and all the sharing information.

1)Go to More → Manage Sharing Settings.

2)Tap the device to enter the Sharing Details page and then tap Delete.

1.7.2Share Multiple Devices by Scanning Recipient’s Account QR Code

You can share multiple devices to another LTS Connect user. You can also set the device permissions granted to the recipient to determine which operations the recipient can do on the device.

Steps

1.Enter the Recipient page.

Option 1 Tap → Share Device → Share Device.

Option 2 1. Enter the Live View page.

Note

For details about how to enter the Live View page, see Start and Stop Live View.

2.Select a live view window and than tap .

3.Tap Share.

Option 3 For security control panel, tap the device on device list page to enter the device details page and then tap .

2.Tap Scan QR Code.

3.Scan the QR code of the recipient’s account.

The recipient’s account will be listed in the account list, and be automatically selected.

Note

The recipient can go to More → Account Management → My QR Code on his/her Mobile Client to get the QR code of his/her account.

4.Select device(s), and then tap Next.

Note

For devices linked with multiple cameras, you can select camera(s) for sharing.

5.Configure permissions for the to-be-shared device(s).

–Check All Permissions on the Sharing Details page to select all the permissions.

–Tap the device displayed on the Sharing Details page, and then select permission(s) and tap

Example

For example, if you select Live View and Remote Playback, the recipient will have the permissions to view live video and play back the video footage of the device.

6.Tap Finish to finish sharing.

A notification about the sharing will appear on the recipient’s Mobile Client. The recipient can tap the message, and then accept or reject the shared device.

7.Optional: Tap the account on the history account list and then tap Delete to delete the recipient’s account and all the sharing information.

1.8Favorites Management

You can add the frequently-used camera(s) to the favorites so that you can access them conveniently.

1.8.1Add Cameras to Favorites on Home Page

On the device list page, you can add the frequently-used camera(s) to the favorites so that you can access them conveniently.

Steps

1.On the home page, tap .

2.Tap Add to Favorites.

3.Select devices and cameras on the Select Camera page.

4.Tap OK.

5.Create a name for the Favorites and then tap OK.

Note

●Up to 32 favorites can be added.

●The favorites name should be no more than 32 characters.

The added Favorites will be displayed on the device list page.

6.Optional: Tap the Favorites name on the home page to view the cameras’ live videos.

1.8.2Add Cameras to Favorites During Live View

On the live view page, you can add frequently-used cameras to Favorites so that you can access them conveniently

Steps

1.Enter the Live View page.

Note

For details about how to enter the Live View page, see Start and Stop Live View

2.Tap and tap Add to Favorites.

3.Add cameras to favorites.

–Create a new favorites in the pop-up window and tap OK.

1.Add to existing favorites.Tap Add to Existing Favorites in the pop-up window.

2.Select a Favorites folder in the list.

–

Note

●Up to 32 Favorites can be added.

The favorites name should be no more than 32 characters.

4.Optional: Tap the Favorites on the device list page to view the cameras’ live videos.

1.8.3Remove Cameras from Favorites

You can delete cameras in the favorites.

Steps

1.Tap of the Favorites.

2.Tap a camera that need to be deleted.

3.Tap Confirm in the pop-up window to delete the camera.

1.9Configure Your Device

On the Settings page of a device, you can view and edit the device’s basic information, delete the device, upgrade device firmware, and configure other functions such as video and image encryption and changing device verification code.

Note

The available functions on the Settings page vary with different device types and device models.

1.9.1Change Device’s Verification Code

The device verification code is used for verifying user identity, as well as encrypting a device’s videos (including live videos and recorded video files) and captured pictures. You can change the device verification code for the network camera and Mini Trooper (a kind of camera powered by battery).

Steps

Note

For details about how to encrypt a device’s videos and captured pictures, see Set Video and Image Encryption.

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Tap Change Verification Code, and then tap Edit on the pop-up Window to enter the Change Verification Code page.

3.Enter the old verification code, and then tap Next.

4.Create a new verification code, and then confirm it.

Note

If you have enabled the Video and Image Encryption function, new pictures and videos will be encrypted by the new verification code. However, the earlier encrypted pictures and videos still use the old verification code.

1.9.2Set Video and Image Encryption

For security reasons, you can set the video and image encryption function to encrypt the videos or the pictures.

Steps

Note

●If you set the video and image encryption function, the device’s live video, recorded video, and pictures in event information will be encrypted. You should enter the device verification code the first time you entering these pages.

●If you log in to the Mobile Client with the same account on another phone, you should enter the device verification code again to view the live video, the recorded video, and pictures in event information.

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Set the Video and Image Encryption switch to ON to enable the function.

3.Optional: Change the encryption password (device verification code).

1)Tap Change Password.

2)Tap Edit in the pop-up window to enter the Change Password page.

3)Follow the instructions on the page to change the device verification code.

Note

The default device verification code is usually on the device label. If no verification code found, enter the device verification code you created when enabling PT Cloud service. For details about enabling PT Cloud service, see Enable PT Cloud service for Device.

1.9.3Set DDNS

For a device added via LTS Connect Domain or Scaning QR code, if DDNS is enabled, the device’s streams will be accessed via IP address in priority. In this case, you can remotely configure device and the speed of streaming will be faster than that of streaming via PT Cloud service.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.On the Settings page, tap Configure DDNS to enter the Configure DDNS page.

3.Set the required information.

Device Domain Name

The default device domain name is the serial number of the device. If you want to edit it, the edited domain name should contain 1 to 64 characters, including numbers, lowercase letters, and dashes. And it should start with a lowercase letter and cannot end with a dash.

Port Mapping Mode

For details about setting port mapping, tap How to Set Port Mapping.

Note

The entered port number should be from 1 to 65535.

User Name

Enter the device user name.

Password

Enter the device password.

4.Tap .

1.9.4Upgrade Device Firmware

You can upgrade the firmware of a device to its latest version. If the latest version is detected, a red dot will appear on the Device Version field of the Settings page of the device.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Tap Device Version to enter the Device Version page.

3.Tap Upgrade.

The Mobile Client will download the upgrade file first and then start upgrading the device.

Note

You can also enable the Mobile Client to automatically download the upgrade file in Wi-Fi networks once a new device version is detected.

1.9.5Set Custom Audio

You can select a recorded audio file and set it as the custom audio prompt for the alarms sent

from the channels linked to specific models of DVR.

Steps

Note

The device should support this function.

1.On the device list, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Tap Custom Audio to enter the Select Channel page.

3.Select channel(s), and then tap Next Step. The available audio file(s) will appear.

4.Optional: Tap the Play icon to play the audio file.

5.Select an audio file, and then tap OK.

1.9.6Use Mobile Client as Device’s Remote Controller

For a device added via IP/Domain, you can use the Mobile Client as the device’s remote controller.

Steps

Note

●The function should be supported by the device.

●The remote controller function is supported when your phone or tablet is connected to a Wi- Fi network, and the network latency should be less than 200ms.

1.On the device list page, tap → Settings to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Tap and tap Remote Controller to enter the following page.

Figure 4-3 Remote Controller Page

3.Swipe the screen to perform remote-control operations such as moving up, down, left, and right.

4.Tap the screen to confirm.

5.Optional: Tap to cancel and return to the previous menu of the device.

6.Optional: Tap to open the main menu of the device.

1.9.7Remote Configuration

After adding a device, you can set the parameters of the device, including basic information, time settings, recording schedule, etc.

View and Edit Basic Information

You can view and edit the basic information of a device.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Enter the Remote Configuration page.

–For a device added via IP/Domain, tap → Remote Configuration.

Note

For details about adding device via IP/Domain, see Add a Device by IP/Domain.

–For a device added via other methods, tap Remote Configuration on the Settings page.

Note

You should have configured DDNS for the device first. See Set DDNS.

3.Tap Basic Information to enter the Basic Information page.

4.Tap to enter the Edit Device page.

5.Edit the basic information of the device.

6.Tap to save the settings.

Set Recording Schedule

You can set a recording schedule for a channel of a specific device.

Steps

1.Enter the Settings page.

–On the device list page, if the page is in list mode, swipe the device name to the left and tap

–On the device list page, if the page is in thumbnail mode, tap the device name or tap .

–On the Live View page, tap and then tap Settings.

Note

For details about how to enter the Live View page, see Start and Stop Live View.

2.Enter the Remote Configuration page.

–For a device added via IP/Domain, tap → Remote Configuration.

Note

For details about adding device via IP/Domain, see Add a Device by IP/Domain.

–For a device added via other methods, tap Remote Configuration on the Settings page.

Note

You should have configured DDNS for the device first. See Set DDNS.

3.Tap Recording Schedule to enter the Recording Schedule page.

4.Select a channel if the device has multiple channels.

5.Set the switch to ON to enable recording schedule.

6.Set a recording schedule for a day in the week.

1)Tap a day in the week to enter the schedule settings page.

2)Tap a time period to set the recording type, start time, and end time.

Continuous

The video will be recorded automatically according to the time of the schedule.

Motion Detection

The video will be recorded when the motion is detected.

Alarm

The video will be recorded when the alarm is triggered via the external alarm input channels.

Motion Detection or Alarm

The video will be recorded when the external alarm is triggered or the motion is detected.

Motion Detection and Alarm

The video will be recorded when the motion and alarm are triggered at the same time.

Event

The video will be recorded when any event is detected.

Note

You can also set the recording type to detailed event type, which should be supported by the device. For details, refer to the user manual of the device.

3)Tap OK to save the settings of the time period.

4)Set other time periods in the day.

Note

Up to 8 time periods can be configured for each day. And the time periods cannot be overlapped with each other.

Figure 4-4 Setting Multiple Time Periods in a Day

7.Optional: Perform the following operations after saving the time periods in one day.

Copy to Other Days Tap Copy to to copy all the time periods settings to the other days in the week.

Delete All Tap Delete All to clear all the configured time periods.

8.Tap to save the settings.

Configure Time Settings

You can select the time zone and set the time synchronization mode to Manual or NTP mode for the added device.

Steps

1.Enter the Settings page of the device.

–On the device list page, if the page is in list mode, swipe the device name to the left and tap

–On the device list page, if the page is in thumbnail mode, tap the device name or tap .

–On the Live View page, tap and then tap Settings.

Note

For details about how to enter the Live View page, see Start and Stop Live View.

2.Enter the Remote Configuration page.

–For a device added via IP/Domain, tap → Remote Configuration.

Note

For details about adding devices via IP/Domain, see Add a Device by IP/Domain.

–For a device added via other methods, tap Remote Configuration on the Settings page.

Note

You should have configured DDNS for the device first. See Set DDNS.

3.Tap Time Configuration to enter the Time Configuration page.

4.Select the time zone in which the device locates. The device time will be adjusted automatically.

5.Select the time synchronization mode.

–Select NTP Synchronization. And then set the interval for synchronizing the device time with the NTP server.

NTP Synchronization

Synchronize time at a specific interval with the NTP server.

Note

For details about setting the NTP server details, refer to the user manual of the device.

–

–Select Manual Synchronization. And then tap Synchronize with Phone to synchronize the device time with the OS (Operation System) time of your phone or tablet.

6.Tap to save the settings.

Change Device Password

You can change the password of a device via the Mobile Client.

Steps

1.Enter the Settings page of the device.

–On the device list page, if the page is in list mode, swipe the device’s name to the left and tap

–On the device list page, if the page is in thumbnail mode, tap the device’s name or tap .

–On the Live View page, tap and then tap Settings.

Note

For details about how to enter the Live View page, see Start and Stop Live View.

2.Enter the Remote Configuration page.

–For a device added via IP/Domain, tap → Remote Configuration.

Note

For details about adding device via IP/Domain, see Add a Device by IP/Domain.

–For a device added via other methods, tap Remote Configuration on the Settings page.

Note

You should have configured DDNS for the device first. See Set DDNS.

3.Tap Change Password to enter the Change Password page.

4.Enter the old password of the device

5.Create a new password.

Caution

The password strength of the device can be automatically checked. We highly recommend you change the password of your own choosing (using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three kinds of following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you change your password regularly, especially in the high security system, changing the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.

Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the installer and/or end-user.

6.Confirm the password.

7.Tap to save the changes.

Configure Normal Event

You can enable a device’s normal event such as motion detection, video tampering alarm, video loss alarm, for the channels of the device.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Enter the Remote Configuration page.

–For a device added via IP/Domain, tap → Remote Configuration.

Note

For details about adding device via IP/Domain, see Add a Device by IP/Domain

–For a device added via other methods, tap Remote Configuration on the Settings page.

Note

You should have configured DDNS for the device first. See Set DDNS.

3.Tap Normal Event to enter the Normal Event page.

4.Optional: Select a channel if the device has multiple channels.

5.Set the switch(es) to ON to enable the event(s).

Configure Smart Event

You can enable the smart event for the channels of a device, including audio exception detection,

face detection, and intrusion detection, etc.

Steps

Note

The supported event types of smart event vary according to different devices.

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Enter the Remote Configuration page.

–For a device added via IP/Domain, tap → Remote Configuration.

Note

For details about adding device via IP/Domain, see Add a Device by IP/Domain.

–For a device added via other methods, tap Remote Configuration on the Settings page.

Note

You should have configured DDNS for the device first. See Set DDNS for details.

3.Tap Smart Event to enter the Smart Event page.

4.Optional: Select a channel if the device has multiple channels.

5.Set the switch(es) to ON to enable event(s).

Enable Temperature Measurement

You can enable the temperature measurement function for the thermal camera on the Mobile Client.

Steps

Note

This function is only available to the thermal camera.

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Enter the Remote Configuration page.

–For a device added via IP/Domain, tap → Remote Configuration.

Note

For details about adding device via IP/Domain, see Add a Device by IP/Domain.

–For a device added via other methods, tap Remote Configuration on the Settings page.

Note

You should have configured DDNS for the device first. See Set DDNS.

3.Tap Temperature Measurement to enter the Temperature Measurement page.

4.Optional: Select a camera if camera(s) are linked to the device.

5.Set the switch to ON to enable temperature measurement.

Chapter 5 Video & Cloud Storage

With the Mobile Client, you can remotely view live videos of the added encoding devices (e.g., cameras, NVRs, and DVRs) and play back their video footage. If cloud storage is activated on the video devices, you can browse, search, play back, and download the video footage on cloud.

5.1Live View

You can view live video of the devices’ connected cameras. And some basic operations are supported during live view, including picture capturing, manual recording, PTZ control, etc.

5.1.1Start and Stop Live View

Live view shows you the live video getting from cameras. Perform the following task to start and stop live view.

Steps

1.Tap a camera to enter the Live View page.

●If the Video and Image Encryption function is disabled, the live video will start playing automatically.

●If the Video and Image Encryption function is enabled, you should enter the device verification code before the live video starting playing.

Note

○For details about Video and Image Encryption function, see Set Video and Image Encryption.

○The default device verification code is usually on the device label. If no verification code found, enter the device verification code you created when enabling PT Cloud service.

○The live video from the video intercom device lasts 5 minutes.

○Up to 6 users can view the live video of a same door station simultaneously. If the upper- limit is reached, other users can only use the audio function of the door station.

2.Optional: Perform the following operations.

View Full Screen Live Video

Rotate the phone to view live video in full screen mode.

Switch Camera Swipe the live view page to the left or right to switch camera and view its live video.

Reselect Device for Live View

1.Tap to go back to the device list.

2.Reselect cameras and then tap OK.

Note

You can select up to 256 cameras.

Switch to Playback Tap → Playback to switch to playback.

Note

For details about playback, see Playback.

3.Stop live view of a camera.

1)Press and hold a window under live view.

2)Drag the window upwards to the appearing at the top of the page.

5.1.2Set Window Division

You can adjust window division in different scenarios.

Tap , , , or to set the window division mode to 1-window, 4-window, 9- window, 12-window, or 16-window respectively.

If the added camera number is more than the window division number, you can swipe left or right to see the rest.

5.1.3Digital Zoom

Digital zoom adopts encoding technology to enlarge the image which will result in image quality damage. You can zoom in or zoom out the live video image as desired.

Tap to zoom in or zoom out the image.

Or spread two fingers apart to zoom in, and pinch them together to zoom out.

5.1.4PTZ Control

PTZ is an abbreviation for “Pan, Tilt, and Zoom”. With the PTZ Control functionality provided by the Mobile Client, you can make the cameras pan and tilt to the required positions, and zoom in or out the live video images. For some network cameras, you can also enable auto-tracking to make the camera pan, tilt, and zoom to track the detected moving objects.

Note

PTZ control should be supported by the camera.

Pan and Tilt a Camera

The Mobile Client allows you to pan and tilt a camera’s view.

Steps

1.Start live view of a camera supports PTZ control.

Note

For details about how to start live view, see Start and Stop Live View.

2.Select a live view window on the Live View page.

3.Tap to open the PTZ Control panel.

Figure 5-1 PTZ Conrol Panel

4.Tap Pan and Tilt.

5.Drag the circle button at the center of the PTZ Control panel to pan and tilt the camera.

Set a Preset

A preset is a predefined image position which contains configuration parameters for pan, tilt, zoom, focus and other parameters. You can also set a virtual preset after enabling digital zoom. After you set a preset, you can call the preset and then the camera will move to the programmed position.

Steps

1.Pan and tilt a camera to move the camera direction to a desired position.

Note

See Pan and Tilt a Camera for details.

2.In the PTZ Control panel, tap Add Preset to open the following window.

Figure 5-2 Set a Preset

3.Swipe the number up or down to set the preset No.

Note

The preset No. should be between 1 and 256.

4.Tap Set to complete setting the preset.

5.Tap Call to call the preset.

6.Optional: Tap Delete to delete the preset.

Adjust PTZ Speed

You can adjust the PTZ speed.

Steps

1.Start live view of a camera which supports PTZ control.

2.Tap to open the PTZ control panel.

3.Tap More → to open the PTZ speed panel.

4.Drag the slider to adjust the PTZ speed.

Other Functions

The PTZ Control panels provide other functions such as PTZ speed adjustment, auto-scan, focus control, iris control, and auto-tracking.

Tap More on the PTZ Control panel to view the functions.

.Table 5-1 Other Functions

Icon

Description

Start/stop the auto-scan, which means to make the speed dome pan, tilt, and (or) zoom by a predefined route.

Note

●You can define the route on the device. For details, see the user manual of the device.

●The function should be supported by the

device.

Icon	Description
.	. .
.	Zoom control: Zoom+/ Zoom-
.	Focus control: Focus +/ Focus –
.	Iris control: Iris +/ Iris –
.	Adjust PTZ speed.
. . . . . .	Enable/Disable auto-tracking. After enabled, when the camera detects a moving object, the camera will pan, tilt, and zoom to track the object until the object moves out of the field of view of the camera. . Note The function should be supported by the device.

5.1.5Start Two-Way Audio

Two-way audio function enables the voice talk between the Mobile Client and devices. You can get and play not only the live video but also the real-time audio from the devices, and the devices can also get and play the real-time audio from the Mobile Client.

Steps

Note

●The function should be supported by the device.

●The devices added by LTS Connect domain or by scanning QR code do not support this function.

1.Start live view of the device.

Note

See Start and Stop Live View for details.

2.Tap in the toolbar to turn on the two-way audio.

3.If the device is a NVR, select the device or its linked network camera as the two-way audio channel.

Note

If not, skip this step.

●If the device is full duplex, two-way audio will be started automatically.

●If the device is half-duplex, you have to tap and hold to talk, and release to listen.

4.Tap to turn off two-way audio.

5.1.6Capturing and Recording

During live view, you can capture pictures of the live video and record video footage.

Steps

1.Start live view of a camera.

Note

See Start and Stop Live View for details.

2.Capture a picture or record video footage.

Capture Picture Tap to capture a picture.

Record Video Footage

Tap to start recording video footage, tap again to stop.

The captured pictures and recorded videos will be saved in More → Pictures and Videos.

5.1.7Set Image Quality for Device Added by IP/Domain

For devices added via IP/Domain, you can set its image quality to Fluent or Clear. You can also customize image quality for the devices.

Steps

Note

●If you change the image quality, the live view and recording of the device may be affected due to the new settings.

●In multi-window mode, you can only set the image quality to Fluent, or customize the image quality and the stream type can only be Sub Stream.

1.Start live view of a device added via IP/Domain.

Note

See Start and Stop Live View for details.

2.Tap on the live view page to enter the quality switching panel.

Note

The icon vary with the actual video quality.

3.Set the image quality as desired.

–Tap Clear to set the image quality as Clear.

–Tap Fluent to set the image quality as Fluent.

–Tap Custom to open the Custom Settings window, and then configure the parameters and tap

Confirm to confirm the custom settings.

Figure 5-3 Custom Settings

Note

●The live view effect is related to the performance of your network and hardware of your network and phone and tablet. If the live view is not fluent or the image appears blurred, reduce the resolution, frame rate and bitrate of the camera in custom mode, or set the image quality as fluent mode.

●The following table shows the recommended frame rate and bitrate configuration for different resolution at H.264, H.264+ and H.265 video compression by Moto X Pro (CPU: Snapdragon805, Android 5.0.2).

Table 5-2 Recommended Configuration

Resolution	1-ch	2-ch	4-ch	Recommended Configuration
H.264 (Software Decoding)
1080P	√	√	.	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
720P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 2Mbps
4CIF	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate:

Resolution	1-ch	2-ch	4-ch	Recommended Configuration
.	.	.	.	512Kbps
H.264 (Hardware Decoding)
1080P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
720P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 2Mbps
. 4CIF	. √	. √	. √	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 512Kbps
H.264+ (Software Decoding)
1080P	√	√	.	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
720P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 2Mbps
H.264+ (Hardware Decoding)
1080P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
720P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
H.265 (Software Decoding. Hardware decoding is not supported.)
1080P	√	√	.	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 2Mbps
720P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
4CIF	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 256Mbps

5.1.8Set Image Quality for LTS Connect Device

Usually three pre-defined image qualities are provided in the Mobile Client for LTS Connect device: Basic, Standard, and High Definition.

Steps

Note

The provided image quality types may vary with different devices.

1.Start live view of a e e device.

Note

See Start and Stop Live View for details.

2.Tap to enter the quality switching panel.

Note

The icon may vary with the actual image quality.

3.Set image quality.

Basic

Basic image quality.

Note

Basic is the default image quality.

Standard

Standard image quality (the image quality is higher than that of Basic and lower than that of HD).

HD

High definition image quality (the image quality is the highest of the three).

5.1.9Live View for Fisheye Camera

In the fisheye view mode, the whole wide-angle view of the fisheye camera is displayed. Fisheye expansion can expand images in five modes: 180° panorama, 360° panorama, 4-PTZ, semisphere, and cylindrical-surface.

Steps

Note

The function is only supported by fisheye camera.

1.Start live view of a fisheye camera.

Note

See Start and Stop Live View for details.

2.Tap to show the fisheye expansion panel.

3.Select mounting type.

Table 5-3 Mounting Type

Icon

Description

Wall Mounting

Icon

Description

Ceiling Mounting

4.Select fisheye expansion mode.

Table 5-4 Fisheye Expansion Mode

Icon

Description

Fisheye view for ceiling mounting and wall mounting. In the Fisheye view mode, the whole wide-angle view of the camera is displayed. The mode is the vision of a fish’s convex eye. The lens produces curvilinear images of a large area, while distorting the perspective and angles of objects in the image.

In this mode, you can pinch the fingers together to zoom out the image, and spread them apart to zoom in.

Dual-180° panorama view for ceiling mounting. The distorted fisheye image is transformed to normal perspective image.

In this mode, you can swipe to the left or to the right to adjust the field of view.

360° panorama view for ceiling mounting and wall mounting. The distorted fisheye image is transformed to normal perspective image.

In this mode, you can swipe to the left or to the right to adjust the field of view.

4 PTZ Views for ceiling mounting and wall mounting. The PTZ view is the close-up view of some defined area in the Fisheye view or Panorama view.

In this mode, you can pinch the fingers together to zoom out the image, and spread them apart to zoom in. You can also swipe the screen to perform pan and tilt movement.

Semisphere-shaped view for wall mounting. In this mode, the whole wide-angle view of the camera is displayed. The lens produces curvilinear images of a large area, while distorting the perspective and angles of objects in the image.

In this mode, you can drag the image to adjust the view angle, and pinch the fingers together to zoom out the image, and spread them apart to zoom in.

Cylindrical-surface-shaped view for wall mounting. In this mode, the

whole wide-angle view of the camera is displayed. The lens produces curvilinear images of a large area, while distorting the perspective

Icon

Description

and angles of objects in the image.

In this mode, you can drag the image to adjust the view angle, swipe to the left or to the right to adjust the field of view, as well as pinch the fingers together to zoom out the image and spread them apart to zoom in.

5.1.10Open Door During Live View

You can open or close the door when viewing the live video of a video intercom device, a face recognition terminal, or a related camera of an access control device. This function allows you to check the visitor or the situation nearby the door before you open it.

Note

●The device should support this function.

●For face recognition terminals, you can enabling opening door by fingerprint authentication or facial authentication. For details, see Manage Access Control Devices.

For the access control device’s related cameras, select a live view window and tap , and then enter the device verification code to open the door.

For the video intercom device, select a live view window and tap , and then enter the device verification code to open the door.

Note

The default device verification code is usually on the device label. If no verification code found, enter the device verification code you created when enabling PT Cloud service.

5.2Playback

You can search the recorded video files stored in the added device for remote playback.

5.2.1Normal Playback

Normal playback refers to the playback based on timeline. You can search the camera’s recorded video files in a selected time period and then start playback.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap in the upper-left corner to enter the Select Item(s) page.

2.Set the date and time for playback.

Playback Date

Select a date.

Note

The date during which video files were recorded is marked with a yellow dot.

Playback Time

Set the start time point for the playback in the selected date.

3.Select camera(s).

Note

You can select up to 4 cameras.

4.Tap Start Playback to enter the Playback page.

5.Optional: Perform the following operations.

Adjust Playback Time Slide the timeline to adjust the playback time.

Note

represents continuous recording and represents

event-triggered recording. You can determine the recording type (continuous or event-triggered) when setting recording schedule. For details, see Set Recording Schedule.

Scale up and down Timeline

Spread two fingers apart to scale up the timeline or pinch them together to scale down.

Figure 5-4 Timeline

5.2.2Event Playback

Event playback refers to the playback based on the detected events, such as motion detection. You can select an event and then play back the event-related video footage. Duration playback, you can also save the event-related picture if it has been captured by the camera.

Before You Start

Make sure you have configured events for the selected camera.

Steps

1.Start normal playback.

Note

For details, see Normal Playback.

2.Tap Event Playback to enter the Event Playback page.

The event-related video footage within the latest 7 days will be displayed.

Figure 5-5 Event Playback Page

3.Select a date and then tap an event to start playback.

4.Optional: Tap and then tap Save Image to save the event-related picture.

Note

Make sure you have configured the required event linkage action (capturing event-related picture) for the device. For details, see the user manual of the device.

5.2.3Capturing and Recording

During playback, you can capture pictures and record video footage.

Steps

1.Start playback.

Note

See Normal Playback for details.

2.Capture a picture or record video footage.

Capture a Picture Tap to capture a picture.

Reccord Video Footage

Tap to start recording video footage, tap again to stop.

The captured pictures and recorded videos will be saved in More → Pictures and Videos.

5.2.4Set Playback Quality for Device Added by IP/Domain

For devices added by IP/Domain, you can set the image quality of playback for them.

Steps

Note

For details about adding device by IP/Domain, see Add a Device by IP/Domain.

1.Select a device added by IP/Domain on the device list and then start playback.

Note

For details about starting playback, see Normal Playback.

2.Tap on the playback page to enter the quality switching panel.

Note

The icon may vary with the actual video quality.

3.Set the image quality as desired.

–Tap Clear to tap the image quality to Clear.

–Tap Custom to open the Custom Settings window, and then configure the parameters (Resolution, Frame Rate, and Bitrate) and tap Confirm to confirm the custom settings.

Note

●The image effect is related to the performance of your network and phone or tablet. If the image is not fluent or the screen appears blurred, reduce the resolution, frame rate and bitrate of the camera in custom mode.

Table 5-5 Recommended Configuration

Resolution	1-ch	2-ch	4-ch	Recommended Configuration
H.264 (Software Decoding)
1080P	√	√	.	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
720P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 2Mbps
. 4CIF	. √	. √	. √	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 512Kbps
H.264 (Hardware Decoding)
1080P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
720P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 2Mbps
. 4CIF	. √	. √	. √	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 512Kbps
H.264+ (Software Decoding)
1080P	√	√	.	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
720P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 2Mbps
H.264+ (Hardware Decoding)
1080P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
720P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
H.265 (Software Decoding. Hardware decoding is not supported.)
1080P	√	√	.	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 2Mbps
720P	√	√	√	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 4Mbps
. 4CIF	. √	. √	. √	Frame rate: 25fps; Bit rate: 256Mbps

5.2.5Adjust Playback Speed

For the cameras linked to a DVR or NVR, you can adjust the playback speed for them as required.

Note

The function should be supported by the device.

During playaback, you can swipe the toolbar at the bottom to view the hidden icons, and then tap

to set the playback speed to 1/8X, 1/4 X, 1/2 X, 1X, 2X, 4X, and 8X. X here refers to the original playback speed.

5.2.6Download Video Segment from Device

During playback of the cameras linked to a DVR or NVR, you can download a specific video segment as evidence if it contains important information about incidents such as violent crimes in case of the need for settling disputes or legal cases.

Steps

Note

The function should be supported by the device.

1.Start playback.

2.Tap if important information occurs on the image.

By default, the video segment which lasts 130 seconds (from 10 seconds before the tapping, to 120 seconds after that) will be automatically selected for download. For example, if you tap when the video footage is played to 00:00:30, the segment from 00:00:20 to 00:02:30 will be selected.

Note

In special occasions when 130-seconds duration is not available to be selected following the above-mentioned rule, the segment will extend afterwords or backwards until the segment duration reaches 130 seconds. For example, if you start downloading from the very beginning of the video footage, the selected segment will be from 00:00:00 to 00:02:10.

3.Optional: Drag the slider(s) to lessen the duration of the segment for download.

Note

The duration should not be shorter than 10 seconds.

4.Optional: Tap the Play icon to preview the selected segment.

Note

If the segment is encrypted, you should enter the device verification code before you can preview it. For details about video encryption, see Set Video and Image Encryption.

5.Tap Download to start downloading.

Note

Downloading at the background is supported. Download task(s) continues if you exit the Download page or the Mobile Client.

6.Optional: Go to More → Pictures and Videos to view the downloaded video segment.

5.3Cloud Storage

With cloud storage, your cameras, DVRs, and NVRs can upload recorded video clips to the cloud automatically. You can easily access, play, and download the video footage of your video devices on cloud.

Note

Cloud storage service is not available in all countries or regions.

5.3.1Enable/Disable Cloud Storage Service for a Channel

You can enable/disable cloud storage service for a specific channel of a device supporting storing video footage on cloud. You can also view details of the cloud storage service package, including service package type, effective period, and status (activated or expired).

Before You Start

Make sure your installer has activated the cloud storage service for your device. Otherwise, you cannot enable cloud storage.

Steps

1.Enter the settings page of the device.

2.Tap Cloud Storage to enter the Cloud Storage page.

Figure 5-6 Cloud Storage

3.Switch on/off to enable/disablecloud storage service of a specific channel.

5.3.2Play Back Video Footage on Cloud

You can play back video footage stored on cloud.

Note

Make sure your installer has activate cloud storage service for your devices and you have enabled it.

See details in Enable/Disable Cloud Storage Service for a Channel.

To play back the video footage on cloud:

1.Start playing back the recorded video footage of a video device.

Note

See instructions in Normal Playback.

2.Tap at the top of the playback page to switch to playing back video footage stored on cloud.

Figure 5-7 Playback – Cloud Storage

Note

●You can adjust the playback speed to up to 8 times faster.

●You can tap to browse through all recorded video footage of each day and download the footage you need.

See details in Download Video Footage from Cloud.

5.3.3Download Video Footage from Cloud

The Mobile Client allows you to browse through the video footage stored on cloud of each date to quickly locate the footage you need. And you can download the video footage to your phone.

Before You Start

Note

Make sure your installer has activate cloud storage service for your devices and you have enable it. See details in Enable/Disable Cloud Storage Service for a Channel.

Steps

1.Start playing back video footage stored on cloud.

Note

See details in Play Back Video Footage on Cloud.

2.Tap to enter the Video Stored on Cloud page.

Figure 5-8 Video Stored on Cloud

3.Select a date.

Note

The date marked with a blue dot is the date during which video footage is recorded.

4.Tap , and then select the video footage you want to download.

5.Tap to download the selected video footage to your phone.

Chapter 6 Manage Access Control Devices

Access control is the selective restriction of access to a place or other resources. After adding access control devices to the Mobile Client, you can remotely control the doors, and configure duration in which the doors remain open. You can also filter and view access control device’s logs, which provide the information of access events and related alarms, such as access controller tampering alarms.

Besides the above-mentioned functionality, you can change the supper password of the access control device. And for face recognition terminals, you can enable fingerprint authentication or facial authentication to open doors.

1..

Note

On the device list page, tap on the right of the access control device to enter the door control page.

The door icon varies with different door status.

2.Control the door status.

Remain Open

Keep the door open.

Open Door

Open the door for a configurable time period. When the time period expires, the door will close.

Note

On the device list page, tap → Door Open Duration to set door open duration.

Remain Closed

Keep the door closed. In this status, the door can only be opened by super card or super password.

Note

For details about super cards, see the user manual of the access control device.

3.Enter the super password.

Note

On the device list page, tap → Change Password to change the super password.

6.1Control Door Status

The Mobile Clientsupports controlling the status of the access control devices’ related doors by the super password of the device.

Steps

Note

You can change the super password. See Change Super Password for details.

1.On the device list page, tap on the right of the access control device to enter the door control page.

Note

The door icon varies with different door status.

2.Control the door status.

Remain Open

Keep the door open.

Open Door

Open the door for a configurable time period. When the time period expires, the door will close.

Note

For details about configuring the time period, see Set Door Open Duration.

Remain Closed

Keep the door closed. In this status, the door can only be opened by super card or super password.

Note

For details about super card, see the user manual of the access control device.

3.Enter the super password.

Note

●For face recognition terminal, this step is not required. You can control door status directly in step 2.

●By default, the super password is the device verification code. You can change the super password. See Change Super Password for details.

The door status will change.

6.2Set Door Open Duration

You can set the door open duration for the access control device. When the duration expires, the door will close automatically.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the access control device.

2.Tap Door Open Duration to open the Door Open Duration list.

3.Select a duration from the list.

4.Tap to confirm the selection.

If you tap Open Door in the door control page, the door will open for the configured time duration.

Note

For details about controlling door status, see Control Door Status.

6.3Change Super Password

The Mobile Client allows you to change the super password of the access control device, which can be used to open all the access control points (e.g., doors), even when the access control point is in remaining closed status.

Steps

Note

For details about super password of the access control device, see the user manual of the device.

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Tap Change Password to enter the Change Password page.

3.Enter the old password and tap Next.

Note

If it is the first time to set the super password, skip this step.

4.Create a new password and then tap Finish.

Note

The password should contain 6 numbers.

6.4View Access Control Logs

You can view the access control device’s logs including the access control events and alarm information. You can also filter the logs.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap the door icon on the right of the access control device to enter the door control page.

Figure 6-1 The Icon Representing Door

The log list will be displayed on the Log section of the page.

2.Perform the following operations.

Refresh Log List Swipe the log list downward to refresh it.

View All Logs Tap View All Logs to enter the Log page and view all access control device logs.

Filter Logs On the Log page, tap Filter and then set the filtering condition (time and event type) to filter.

6.5Enable Opening Door via Fingerprint (Face) Authentication

After adding face recognition terminals to the Mobile Client, you can enable opening door via fingerprint authentication or face recognition.

Note

Your phone or tablet should support fingerprint authentication or face authentication.

After adding a face recognition terminal, when you open the device’s related door for the first time, a prompt will pop up asking you whether to enable opening door via fingerprint authentication or face recognition or not. You can follow the prompt to enable this function.

If you have ignored the above-mentioned prompt, you can tap to enter the Settings page, and then switch on the function.

Chapter 7 Facial Data Management

For the DeepinMind server on the same LAN with the Mobile Client, you manage the facial data stored in it via the Mobile Client. The facial data can be used for facial comparison in related applications.

Before You Start

●Make sure you have added DeepinMind server to the Mobile Client.

●Make sure you have added face libraries to the server. For details, see the user manual of the device.

Perform the following task to upload facial data to the DeepinMind server.

Steps

1.Tap the device name or tap .

2.Tap Facial Data Management to enter the Facial Data Management page.

Note

For the first time usage, you should enter the user name and password of the device to verify you identity first. Once verified, the verification is not required afterwords.

3.Select a face library to enter the face library page.

4.Tap (if there’s no facial data) or and then tap Capture Picture or Select from Photo Album to use your phone or tablet to capture a face picture or select a face picture from the photo album respectively.

The face picture will be uploaded to the server and the server will start recognizing the facial data. Once recognized, the face picture will be displayed in the face library.

5.Optional: Delete face picture(s).

1)Tap on the face library page and then select face picture(s) .

2)Tap to delete the selected one(s).

Chapter 8 Video Intercom

The Mobile Client supports video intercom functions. Video intercom is an audiovisual communication and security technique used in a building or a small collection of buildings. With microphones and video cameras at both sides, it enables the intercommunication via video and audio signals.

1.1Answer Call from Indoor Station

If no one answers the call via the indoor station for a while, the call will be forwarded to the Mobile Client. You can answer the call, view the live video of the door station, as well as open the door.

Steps

Note

Up to 6 users can view the live video of the same door station at the same time. If there’s already been 6 users viewing the live video, you can only use the audio function of the video intercom device.

1.Tap the call message to enter the following page.

Figure 8-1 Call Page

2.Answer the call.

3.Optional: Perform the following operations.

Stop/Restart Live View

Tap to stop the live view. And tap to restart it.

Mute Tap to mute the live video.

Open Door Tap to open the door.

Digital Zoom Pinch two fingers together to zoom in the live video image, and spread them apart to zoom out.

1.2Operations on Device Details Page

On the device details page of the video intercom devices, you can perform the operations including viewing the live videos streamed from the cameras linked to the door stations or doorbells, starting two-way audio, playing back video footage, viewing call logs and history events, controlling doors linked to door stations, and controlling relays connected to the indoor station.

Tap the video intercom device on the device list to enter the device page.

Switch Scene

Figure 8-2 Video Intercom Device Page

You can tap to set Stay, Away, Sleep, or Custom as the scene for arming the detectors linked to the door station.

Stay

When the people stays inside the detection area, turn on the Stay mode to turn on all the perimeter burglary detection (such as perimeter detector, magnetic contacts, curtain detector in the balcony). At the meantime, the detectors inside the detection area are bypassed (such as PIR detectors). People can move inside the area and alarm will not be triggered.

Away

When all the people in the detection area leave, turn on the Away mode to arm all zones in the area after the defined dwell time. For example, assume that you have set your apartment as a zone, you can set the zone status to Away when you go to work.

Sleep

The detectors in the bedroom is bypassed while the detectors in other rooms are armed. In this scene, all the perimeter burglary detection in other rooms are turned on, while no alarms will be triggered within the bedroom.

Live View

The live video will start playing when you enter the device details page. You switch live videos if multiple door stations are linked to the video intercom device.

During live view, you can tap the image to show the hidden icons, and then perform operations such as starting two-way audio, capturing picture, recording, full-screen live view, and setting image quality.

Note

For details about the above-mentioned operations during live view, see Start Two-Way Audio, Capturing and Recording, Set Image Quality for Device Added by IP/Domain, and Set Image Quality for LTS Connect Device.

Playback

Tap → Playback to start playing back video footage.

View Call Logs and Events

You can view the call logs and device-related events in the latest 7 days (the events or call logs of the current day will be displayed by default).

Control Door

You can tap to control the door linked to the video intercom device.

Control Relay

You can tap to control the connected relays of an indoor station remotely.

To set up relay name and open duration, go to the Settings page of the video intercom device. Open duration for a relay:

●Remain Open: The relay will not be closed automatically after you open it.

●0-180s: The relay will be closed automatically after the open duration.

1.3Set Motion Detection Alarm for Wi-Fi Doorbell

Motion detection is a way of detecting motion in a surveillance scene by analyzing image data and differences in a series of images. After setting motion detection area for Wi-Fi doorbell, the device will be able to detect the object in motion and at the same time the Mobile Client will receive an event notification about the motion detection alarm.

Steps

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the Wi-Fi doorbell.

2.Tap Notification to enter the Notification page.

3.Draw motion detection area.

1)Tap Draw Motion Detection Area to enter the Motion Detection Area page.

Figure 8-3 Draw Motion Detection Area

2)Tap the grid(s) on the live video image to select the motion detection area.

3)Tap to save the settings.

4.Tap Motion Detection Sensitivity on the Alarm Notification page and then drag the slider to adjust the sensitivity.

Low

Moving persons, large moving pets, and any other large moving objects in the motion detection area will trigger the alarm, while smaller objects will not.

Medium

Moving small pets and any other medium-sized moving objects in the motion detection area will trigger the alarm, while smaller objects will not.

High

Moving insects, moving leaves, and any other larger objects will trigger the alarm.

What to do next

Go back to the Notification page and make sure Notification is enabled.

Note

For details about how to enabling notification, see Enable Event Notification

1.4Set Volume for Video Intercom

You can set video intercom volume as required.

Steps

Note

Only video intercom devices support this function.

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of a video intercom device.

2.Tap Loudspeaker Volume or Microphone Volume to adjust the loudspeaker and the microphone volume respectively.

1.5Link Smart Chime with Doorbell

You can add a smart chime to the Mobile Client and link it with a doorbell so that the doorbell will standby for longer and be more responsive.

Add a Smart Chime

●To add an EZVIZ smart chime, tap → Scan QR Code on LTS Connect. Select Doorbell as the Device Type, enter the serial number, tap Add.

●You can also tap → Manual Adding to add a smart chime.

After adding a smart chime, you can tap the smart chime in the device list to mute all devices with

one tap and enable/disable Ring Alert for linked doorbells.

Figure 8-4 View Smart Chime

Link Smart Chime with Doorbell

●After successfully adding a smart chime, tap Next and link the smart chime with up to two doorbells.

Figure 8-5 Link Doorbell

●You can also go to the doorbell Settings page and tap Chime Type → Smart Chime to link a smart chime with the doorbell.

Figure 8-6 Link Smart Chime

Note

When you link a smart chime with a doorbell, make sure they are near to each other and they are both online.

Chapter 9 Notification

On the Notification tab, you can view the event notifications and call logs of the video intercom devices.

Note

In the mobile client, each device can only send one alarm per minute. It’s a mechanism to not overload the servers. So for example, a camera will send a notification about a line crossing but if someone crosses the same line 20 seconds later on the same camera, it won’t send another alert/notification. It can only send 1 alert per device, per minute.

1.1Enable Event Notification

You can allow the Mobile Client to receive and push notifications of the events detected by a device. If you want to block notifications during specific time, you can set a notification schedule to define the time period(s) during which the Mobile Client is allowed to receive event information and push them to you. You can also set notification mode to avoid the disturbance of push notifications (and the audio and strobe light alarm) while still being able to receive event information on the Notification page.

Before You Start

Make sure you have configured event settings on device (except for the video intercom device). See the user manual of the device for details.

Steps

Note

●Make sure your phone supports Google Play service, or notifications may fail to be pushed to you.

●The Mobile Client will ignore alarm events triggered out of the time period defined by the notification schedule.

●The security control panel does not support setting notification schedule.

●For specific thermal device, you can also set custom voice prompt for the detected events, such as fire detection.

1.On the device list page, tap to enter the Settings page of the device.

2.Tap Notification to enter the Notification page.

3.Turn on Notification to allow the Mobile Client receive and push notifications of events detected by device all the time.

4.Optional: Enable notification schedule to set a time schedule for receiving event information from the device and push related notifications (if allowed in the previous step).

1)Tap Notification Schedule.

2)Tap Set a Time Scheduletoenter the Schedule Settings page.

Figure 9-1 Schedule Settings Page

3)Set the start time and the end time.

4)Select the date(s) to which the configured time period applies to.

Note

The date(s) marked in blue is selected.

5)Tap .

6)Optional: Tap the configured schedule to enter the Schedule Settings page, and then edit the start time, end time, and the date(s) to which the configured time period applies to. Or tap Delete to delete the schedule.

7)Go back to the Notification page.

5.Optional: Tap Notification Sound Mode and then select one of the following sound mode and tap to set a notification sound mode for the detected intrusion.

Note

The function should be supported by the device.

Intensive

Intense warning for the intrusion.

Soft

Soft warning for the intrusion.

Mute

No audible warning.

1.2Check Event Notification

You can check event notifications on the Notification page when events are detected by the devices. The unread notifications are marked with a red dot.

Before You Start

●Set event parameters for the device and arm the device. For details, see the user manual of the device.

●For indoor station, it should have been linked to the sensor. For details, see the user manual of the video intercom device.

Steps

1.Tap Notification to enter the Notification page.

2.Optional: Tap and then select a date and (or) select a device to filter the events.

3.Tap an event notification to show the detailed information such as time and source.

View and Download Event-related Picture

If there are multiple event-related pictures, you can swipe left/right to switch pictures. You can also tap a picture and then tap to download the picture.

Zoom In/Out Event- related Picture

Tap the picture, and then spread two fingers apart to zoom in the picture and pinch them together to zoom out, or double-tap the picture to zoom in or zoom out.

Note

●Make sure you have configured the event linkage action for capturing event-related picture for the device. See the user manual of the device for details.

●If you have enabled Video and Image Encryption for the device, you

need to enter the device verification code before you can view the picture.

View Event-related Video Footage

Tap Playback to view the video footage.

Note

Make sure you have configured the event linkage action for recording video for the device. See the user manual of the device for details.

View Live Video Tap Live View to view the live video of the device.

Note

The device should support this function.

4.Optional: Go back to the Notification page and then edit the event information.

Mark All Events as Read

Tap , and then tap Mark as All Read to mark all event information as “already read”.

Clear All Events Tap , and then tap Clear All.

Delete a Specific Event

Tap and hold an event notification until a prompt pops up, and then tap Delete to the prompt to delete the notification.

1.3Check Pyronix Notifications

You can check Pyronix notifications on the Notifications page when there are any Pyronix notifications. The unread notifications are marked with a red dot.

Steps

1.Tap Notifications → Pyronix to enter the Pyronix Notifications page.

2.Optional: Tap and then select a date, event type, and (or) select a device to filter the notifications.

3.Optional: Go back to the Notifications page and then edit the event information.

Mark All Events as Read

Tap → Mark as All Read, and then tap to mark all event information as “already read”.

Clear All Events Tap → Edit → Clear All to clear all event notifications.

Delete a Specific Event

Tap and hold an event notification until a prompt pops up, and then tap Delete to the prompt to delete the notification.

Or, swipe from the right end of the card that displays the event notification towards the left, and then delete this event notification.

1.4Check Call Notifications

You can check call notifications on the Notifications page when someone calls. The unread notifications are marked with a red dot.

Steps

1.Tap Notifications → Call to enter the call notifications page.

2.Optional: Tap and then select a date and (or) select a device to filter the notifications.

3.Optional: Go back to the Notifications page and then edit the event information.

Mark All Events as Read

Tap → Mark as All Read, and then tap to mark all event information as “already read”.

Clear All Events Tap → Edit → Clear All to clear all event notifications.

Delete a Specific Event

Tap and hold an event notification until a prompt pops up, and then tap Delete to the prompt to delete the notification.

Or, swipe from the right end of the card that displays the event notification towards the left, and then delete this event notification.

1.5Check Service Notifications

In Notifications → Service, you can view the notifications related to services offered by your Service Provider via the LTS Connect Pro platform, including applications for device handover, device authorization and permissions, and device password reset. You can also view notifications about cross-device linkages, device exceptions and corresponding handling results, and logs about Service Provider’s operations on your devices.

Note

LTS Connect Pro is a cloud service platform for the Service Providers (installation companies) that configure and maintain your devices and provide value-added services for you.

1.5.1Accept Invitation to Be Site Owner

You can accept the invitation from the Service Provider to be the owner of a specific site. Go to Notifications → Service.

You can tap on an invitation to view the details such as the site and the devices authorized to the Service Provider, and then tap Agree to accept the invitation and therefore become the owner of the site.

1.5.2Approve Device Handover and Authorization Application

If a Service Provider hands over devices to you or applies for device permissions on the LTS Connect Pro platform, you will receive an application notification. After you approve the application, the Service Provider will be able to provide device configuration and maintenance services based on the permissions you granted.

●If the Service Provider hands over devices to you, you will receive device handover and authorization applications.

●If the Service Provider applies for device permissions, you will receive device authorization applications.

Steps

1.Go to Notifications → Service.

2.Tap on a Device Handover and Authorization Application notification.

3.Accept device handover.

Note

After handover, your Service Provider does not have any permissions to operate or configure the devices. Service Provider usually applies for device permissions so as to configure and maintain the devices for you. If your Service Provider has applied for the permissions, you need to accept it in device authorization application.

4.Open the Device Authorization Application.

–If the Service Provider has applied for device permissions when handing over the devices, the device authorization application will show up right after you accept device handover.

–If the Service Provider has not applied for device permissions, open the application after the Service Provider sends one.

Note

●In device authorization application, you can view details such as Service Provider information, permissions that the Service Provider applies for, and the Alarm Receiving Center (ARC) information.

●For more details on Alarm Receiving Center, see .

5.Select the permissions you want to grant to the Service Provider.

Note

●If the Service Provider enabled ARC service for you, you can check ARC Service to activate it.

●If you activate ARC service, the ARC will provide 24/7 alarm responding service for you,

including receiving events from devices, responding to events, and sending out emergency dispatches (if needed).

6.Tap Agree to approve the application.

1.5.3Notification about Availability of a Rent Device

If a device that you rent from the Service Provider is blocked or unblocked by the Service Provider, you will receive a notification about that.

Note

If a rent device is blocked by the Service Provider, you are not allowed to operate the device via the Mobile Client. In this case, you can contact the Service Provider and ask her/him to unblock the device if required.

For such a notification, you can view the Service Provider who block/unblock the device and the site where the device is added.

1.6Check Device Exception Notifications

You can receive and view the exception notifications of your devices that are managed by the Service Provider.

After your Service Provider handles an exception, you will also be notified of the handling result. You can see all exception notifications in Notifications → Exception.

1.7Check System Notifications

Under system notifications, you can view linkage notifications. Linkage refers to the process in which an event detected by a resource triggers actions in other resources. The linkage can be used for notifying security personnel, upgrading security level, saving evidence, etc., when specific events happen. You can view notifications about linkages in Service Notifications.

Note

●This feature is not available in all countries or regions.

●The linkage can only be set by the Service Provider via the LTS Connect Pro platform.

Go to Notifications → System to view linkage notifications. You can tap on each notification to view the detected event, event time, devices in the linkage, and triggered actions.

Chapter 10 System Settings

This section introduces system settings of the Mobile Client, including hardware decoding, floating live view, resuming latest live view, etc.

1.1Enable Push Notification

If push notification is enabled, the Mobile Client will push alarm notifications related to the added devices to you.

Note

For details about alarm notifications, see Notification for details.

Tap More → Settings to enter the Settings page, and then enable the push notification.

1.2Save Device Parameters

If the function is enabled, the Mobile Client will remember the device parameters you set. Take video and image encryption for an example, you only need to enter the device verification code for once to view the encrypted live view, playback, or picture.

Note

●For details about video and image encryption, see Set Video and Image Encryption.

●For details about setting device parameters via the Mobile Client, see Configure Your Device. Tap More → Settings to enter the Settings page, and then enable the function.

1.3Auto-Receive Alarm after Power-on

If you enable this function, the Mobile Client will run automatically and receive alarm event information when the phone or tablet is powered on.

Tap More → Settings to enter the Settings page and then enable the function.

Note

The power consumption of the phone or tablet may increase.

1.4Generate a QR Code with Device Information

For devices added via IP/domain, the Mobile Client allows you to generate a QR code containing

the information of up to 32 devices. The QR code can be used to quickly add multiple devices. For example, if user A has generated a QR code containing the information of 10 devices, user B can scan the QR code to batch add the 10 devices to his or her account.

Steps

Note

Only devices added by IP/domain support this function.

1.Tap More → Settings to enter the Settings page.

2.Tap Generate QR Code.

3.Tap Generate QR Code in the IP/Domain field to enter the Select Device page.

4.Select device(s).

5.Tap Generate QR Code.

The QR code picture will be generated.

6.Tap Save to save the picture to the photo album of your phone or tablet.

1.5Hardware Decoding

Hardware decoding provides better decoding performance and lower CPU usage when you play high definition videos during live view or playback.

Tap More → Settings to enter the Settings page, and then enable the function.

Note

●The function is available only when the phone OS is Android 4.1 or later version.

●Hardware decoding is only supported when the resolution is 704*576, 704*480, 640*480, 1024*768, 1280*720, 1280*960, 1920*1080, 2048*1536, or 2560*1920. For other resolutions, only software decoding is supported.

●For H.265 video compression, hardware decoding is not supported.

●Hardware decoding should be supported by the device. If not, the device will adopt software decoding by default.

1.6View Traffic Statistics

The Mobile Client automatically calculates the network traffic consumed during live view and playback. You can check the mobile network traffic and Wi-Fi network traffic separately.

Tap More → Settings to enter the Settings page, and then tap Traffic Statistics.

1.7Generate a QR Code with Wi-Fi Information

You can generate a QR code with Wi-Fi information, and then use a network camera or wireless

doorbell to scan the QR code to connect the device to the Wi-Fi network.

Steps

Note

Connecting device to a Wi-Fi network by scanning QR code should be supported by the device.

1.Tap More → Settings to enter the Settings page.

2.Tap Wi-Fi Settings to enter the Wi-Fi Settings page.

3.Set the required information.

Wi-Fi Name

Enter the SSID of the Wi-Fi network.

Password

Enter the password of the Wi-Fi network.

Encryption

Select the encryption type as the one you set for the router.

Note

If you select NONE as the encryption type, the password of the Wi-Fi network is not required.

4.Tap Generate to generate a QR code for the Wi-Fi network.

What to do next

Use a network camera or wireless doorbell to scan the QR code to connect the device to the Wi-Fi network.

1.8Floating Live View

If you enable this function, floating live view window(s) will be displayed on the device list page when you select one or more device(s). You can preview the live video(s) in the floating window(s).

Note

●If you select more than 16 cameras, the number of the selected cameras will be displayed.

●Up to 256 cameras can be displayed as floating windows.

Tap More → Settings to enter the Settings page and then enable the function.

1.9Resume Latest Live View

If you enable the function, the latest live view will be resumed each time you enter the Mobile Client. The window division mode, and the live view windows’ sequence (if in multiple-window

mode) will also be restored.

Tap More → Settings to enter the Settings page, and then enable the function.

1.10Tablet Mode

If the Mobile Client is installed on an Android tablet, you can enable tablet mode so that the interfaces will be displayed in landscape mode by default.

Tap Me → Settings to enter the Settings page and then enable the function.

Note

After enabling tablet mode, you should restart the Mobile Client to make the settings effective.

1.11Display/Hide Channel-Zero

Channel-zero, known as virtual channel, can show the videos from all channels of the device, reducing the bandwidth while simultaneously previewing from multi-channel. It can acquire image information and save bandwidth for transmission through encoding and configuring output images.

Tap More → Settings and then enable the Mobile Client to display channel-zero.

1.12Auto-Download Upgrade File

If you enable Auto-Donwload Upgrade File, the Mobile Client will automatically download the upgrade file in Wi-Fi networks, which helps speed up the device upgrade process.

Note

For details about upgrading device, see Upgrade Device Firmware.

Tap More → Settings to enter the Settings page and then enable the function.

1.13Manage Custom Audio

You can record audio files for setting them as the custom audio prompts for the alarms sent from the channels linked to specific models of DVR.

Perform this task to record an audio file.

Steps

1.Tap More → Settings → Custom Audio Management.

2.Tap Start Recording to start recording, and then tap Stop Recording. The Complete Recording dialog pops up.

3.Optional: Create a name for the audio file.

Note

By default, the file name is the time (accurate to second) when recording stops.

4.Tap Confirm.

5.Optional: Perform further operations.

Rename Audio Long press and then tap Rename to rename the audio file.

Delete Audio Long press and then tap Delete to delete the audio file.

What to do next

Set custom audio prompt for the alarms sent from the channels linked to specific models of DVR. For details, see Set Custom Audio.

Chapter 11 Other Functions

The Mobile Client provides other functions, including fingerprint authentication and management of the recorded videos and captured pictures.

1.1Pictures and Videos

In Picture and Video Management module, you can view and mange the recorded (or clipped) video footage and the captured pictures.

Tap More → Pictures and Videos to enter the Pictures and Videos page and then you can perform the following operations.

●Play Video File

●: Tap a video file and then tap to play it.

You can rotate the phone to view the video in landscape mode.

●Delete a Video File or Picture

●: Tap a video file or a picture, and then tap to delete it.

●Share a Picture or Video File to Another Application

●: Tap a video file or a picture, and then tap to share it to another application.

●Batch Delete Video Files and (or) Pictures

●: Tap Edit and select video files and (or) pictures, and then tap to delete them.

●Batch Share Pictures and (or) Video Files to Another Application

●: Tap Edit and select pictures and (or) video files, and then tap to share it to another application.

1.2Share LTS Connect

You can show the QR Code for downloading the Mobile Client to others.

Tap More → Share LTS Connect to view the QR code. After that, you can let others scan the QR code to download the Mobile Client.

V380 FOR PC Setup User Guide

admin — Thu, 07 Sep 2023 12:11:28 +0000

V380 FOR PC Setup User Guide, Our company division WiFi camera products can be used to achieve remote configuration camera, remote viewing, remote playback; It’s your home security housekeeper! ,V380 is a new generation of intelligent household cloud camera free application, can easily realize the remote video monitoring and management.

Stay connected with your home and business anytime from anywhere

Windows

Equipment startup

The device is not on after power connection,the light indicator stays off

1) Replace the power cord and power plug
2) If the power is still not available after replacement, contact the seller to repair the equipment.

No response after the device is powered on

1) Replace the power cord and power plug
2) If you still cannot start after the manual upgrade, you need to repair the equipment

Device does not respond after “System startup”

1) Replace the power cord and power plug
2) Still not available, contact the seller to repair the equipment.
.

The device restarts repeatedly

1) Replace the power cord and power plug
2) Still not available, contact the seller to repair the equipment.

Must the camera be connected to the power supply

Cameras are distinguished between models with and without batteries. Cameras without batteries can only be used after being connected to the power supply. Please consult the seller for details

Can the camera volume be adjusted up/down

The volume of the camera is fixed and does not support to be adjusted the volume level

How does the camera establish a hotspot mode

1. Devices whose default connection mode is AP hotspot mode

Devices whose default connection mode is AP hotspot mode, no matter what state the device is in (except for the network cable), long press the camera reset button, and it will be in AP hotspot mode after restoring the factory default settings
Devices with speakers have voice prompt: “Restore factory default setting”-“Access-Point preparing”-“Access-Point ready”
If the mobile phone WiFi list can search for the hotspot signal at the beginning of the MV, it means that the hotspot has been established successfully

2. Devices whose default connection mode is station mode

Devices whose default connection mode is station mode, no matter what state the device is in (except for the network cable), long press the camera reset button, and it will be in the wifi smart link configuration state after restoring the factory default settings
Devices with speakers will have a voice prompt: “Restore factory default setting”-“Waiting for WiFi smartlink configuration”
Short press the reset button again to switch to AP hotspot mode, and the device voice prompts: “Access-Point preparing”-“Access-Point ready”
If the mobile phone WiFi list can search for the hotspot signal at the beginning of the MV, it means that the hotspot has been established successfully

Note: When the camera is connected to the network cable, the wireless connection mode will be blocked. At this time, restoring the factory default settings will not change the network connection status of the device

How to turn on/off the system voice prompts

After the APP connects to the camera, click the [Settings] icon in the device list-[Advanced setting]-[Device voice prompt], you can choose to turn on or off the camera system voice prompts. After the settings are completed, return to the previous layer to take effect

Note: Only devices that support this function will show this option in the setting list, and other devices will not show this option

How to set AP hotspot password

1) Connect the camera to the phone APP
2) In the device list, click the [Settings] icon-[Network], and select [AP hotspot mode]
3) Fill in the password under the hotspot name and click [Save]
4) After the setting is completed, the mobile phone connects to the camera hotspot again, and the set password is required to connect

Note:
1) The password must be a combination of 8 or more letters, symbols, or numbers
2) Restore the factory default settings of the camera can delete the hotspot password

How far is the AP hotspot mode connection range

1) The stable connection distance of the indoor camera is 5 to 10 meters
2) The stable connection distance of the outdoor camera is 10 to 20 meters

Note:
1) The above parameters are reference values, and the actual connection effect is affected by the use environment to a certain degree
2) The partition wall connection may greatly weaken the signal, and it can be connected to a longer distance in an open environment
3) Do not use the device in an environment with high electromagnetic interference

The phone cannot find or connect to the AP hotspot

1) Make sure that the device has started normally and is in AP hotspot mode
2) For devices with external antennas, please confirm that the antennas have been connected
3) Confirm that the device is not connected to the network cable, if the network cable is connected, please disconnect it first
4) If the security prompt pops up during the connection process of the Android phone, please confirm that the authorized system is connected to the hotspot
5) For Apple mobile phones IOS14 and above, please confirm that the APP is enabled [Local Network] and [Precise Location] Permissions
6) Please try to restart the device or change other phone connection
7) If you cannot solve the problem after trying the above methods, please contact the seller for after-sales service

Note: AP hotspot is a signal from the camera and cannot be connected to the Internet. Therefore, it is a normal phenomenon for the system prompts “Network unavailable” during the connection to the hotspot

How to check the device ID

· ID number is the unique identification number of the camera, each camera corresponds to only one ID
· The ID number is 8 digits, which can be viewed on the label on the device body
· If you have connected the device in the APP, you can view the ID in the upper left corner of the device list window

How to enable/disable the shake machine self-test function

Please contact the technician to provide the configuration file

When the equipment self-test

1) Upgrade the firmware version
2) If the firmware still cannot be turned after the upgrade, contact the seller for repair.

How to change the system tone language

method 1: After the camera is connected on the phone, on the lower right Corner of the App. Click [Settings] icon – [Device Language] select Mandarin / English

method 2: modify the device configuration by testing the file
please contact technical personnel for the file

Note: The default network mode of the device in English voice mode is hotspot mode

Long pressed reset button doesn’t activate anything

1) Make sure the button is well pressed down
2) Upgrade the firmware of the device.
3) The restore button may be damaged. Contact the seller to repair the device.

How to modify the default network mode

Please contact the technician to provide the configuration file

How to restore factory settings

How to restore factory settings
· Long press the reset button for 6-7 seconds [restore factory settings], device with loudspeaker will speak“restore factory settings” “restore factory settings” mode 1: Part of head shaking devices has a button next to the English mark“RESET” (as shown below)

Method 2: Part of head shaking and panoramic machines have a hole on its body with English mark”RESET”beside, press and hold the hole with a pin or something similar for seconds (as shown below)

method 3: Outdoor devices and large triangle panoramic devices have wires, one of the wires is cappped，remove the cover and long press the button inside (as shown below)

Note: Restoring the factory settings will clear the configuration information and the device password. After reset, you need to reconfigure the network and set the password.

· Restore factory default settings function
1) Clear WiFi information and IP configuration information
2) Clear user information (username and password)
3) Clear hotspot password
4) Turn on system voice prompt
5) Unbind cloud service
6) Alarm function
a. Set the arming state to off
b. Set the alarm area to All
c. The alarm time period is set to all-day alarm
d. Turn off the alarm tone
7) PTZ function
a. Clear the PTZ power-off memory position
b. Clear the PTZ patrol setting
c. Turn off the movement tracking function
8) Light control function
a. The light control is set to [Auto]
b. Clear the timing switch light setting
9) The image attribute is set to [Auto]

Note: After the device is restored to factory default settings, the network needs to be reconfigured.

V380 FOR PC Setup User Guide

Network setting

Network configuration

How to configure wireless camera network (Android users)

Preparation before configuration:

1. Power on the camera and set the device to hotspot mode. When the (MV+ID) hotspot signal is found in the WiFi list of the mobile phone, it means that the device is in the waiting configuration state

Configuration steps:

1. Click the “+” button in the upper right corner of the device list -> select [Add Camera]
2. Select [WiFi Smart Camera]
3. Select [AP hotspot connection] and follow the system prompts to continue operation
4. Select the WiFi that the device needs to configure, and enter the WiFi password -> click [Confirm]
5. Below Android 10: Select the device hotspot, and the mobile phone will automatically start network configuration after connecting to the hotspot
Android 10 and above: Click [Connect AP spot] or enter the mobile phone system [Settings], select [WLAN], connect to the device hotspot (MV+ID), and the device will automatically connect to WiFi after returning to the app
6. The camera’s voice prompts “WiFi connecting – WiFi connected” to indicate that the configuration is successful, and the APP prompts “Completed”

How to configure wireless camera network (IOS users)

Preparation before configuration:

Configuration steps:

1. Click the “+” button in the upper right corner of the device list -> select [Add Camera]
2. Select [WiFi Smart Camera]
3. Select [AP hotspot connection] and follow the system prompts to continue operation
4. The system automatically obtains the currently connected WiFi, enter the WiFi password -> click [Confirm]
5. Click [Connect AP spot] or enter the mobile phone system [Settings], select [Wi-Fi], connect to the device hotspot (MV+ID), and the device will automatically connect to WiFi after returning to the app
6. The camera’s voice prompts “WiFi connecting – WiFi connected” to indicate that the configuration is successful, and the APP prompts “Completed”

During the configuration process, the device voice prompts “wifi connected”, but the mobile phone doesn’t prompt “Completed”

· The device has been successfully connected to the Internet, just add the connected device to the APP
1. Click the “+” button in the upper right corner of the device list -> select [Add Camera]
2. Select [WiFi Smart Camera] -> [Add device ID]
3. Fill in device ID or scan the QR code on device as prompted by the system -> click [Confirm]
4. APP prompts “Completed”

What if the device fails to connect to WiFi during network configuration

1. The camera can only connect to 2.4G frequency WiFi, and does not support 5G frequency WiFi and mixed frequency WiFi, and does not support connecting to the guest network set by the router
2. Please do not exceed the device connection range, try to configure the network again after the device is closed to the router
3. The WiFi name cannot contain Chinese characters, and the WiFi name cannot be set to hide
4. Check whether the router restricts device access
5. If the device fails to receive configuration information or fails to be configured for multiple times, it is recommended to use AP hotspot mode configuration

How to connect a V380 camera with a network cable

1. Cameras with a network port can use a network cable connected to the network, please use a standard 8-core network cable to connect the device
2. There is no need to configure the network when the device is connected to the network cable. After the network cable is plugged in, the network port indicator will be on, and the device with a system sound will prompt “WiFi Connecting” -> “WiFi Connected” means the connection is successful
3. Click the “+” button in the upper right corner of the device list -> select [Add Camera] -> select [WiFi Smart Camera] -> [Add device ID], follow the system prompts to fill in or scan the device ID -> click [Confirm]

Note: The network cable connection has priority. When the network cable is connected, other connection methods will be blocked. If you need to switch to the wireless connection method, please disconnect the network cable first

How to connect 4G camera

1. Please connect the antenna of the device and insert 4G sim card correctly
2. Power on the device, and the device voice prompts “Cellular network connecting” -> “Successful connection” means that the connection is successful
3. Click the “+” button in the upper right corner of the device list -> select [Add Camera] -> select [4G Smart Camera], scan the code to add or click [Can’t find the QR code on the device?] -> [Please enter device ID] to fill in the device ID

What if 4G camera fails to connect

1. If the device prompts “Dialing timeout, please confirm SIM card status”, it means that the device connection has failed
2. Please make sure that the sim card is available and has remaining data
3. Make sure that the device is connected to the antenna and the 4G sim card is inserted correctly
4. Try to connect the device again where the signal is better

How to connect wifi kit

1. Power on the base station and plug it into the router LAN port
2. Power on the camera that needs to be connected to the WiFi kit, and the camera voice prompts that the connection is complete
3. Click the “+” button in the upper right corner of the device list -> select [Add Camera] -> select [kit] -> click [Next], scan the QR code of the base station body and add the camera connected under the base station to the device list

How to connect the device under the AP station(connecting without router)

Preparation before configuration:

Connection steps:

1. Open the WiFi list of the mobile phone, connect to the device hotspot (MV+ID), and the “Connected” status under the hotspot means the connection is successful
2. Open the APP, press and hold the drop-down in the blank of the device list to refresh the list
3. The device card appears in the device list, and the device is successfully added
4. Click the play button on the screen, follow the system prompts to set the password, after that, you can do further operations on the device

Note：
1. To connect the device in the AP hotspot mode, the mobile phone must remain connected to the device hotspot. Please ensure that the mobile phone is within the hotspot connection range to avoid disconnecting the device
2. Device hotspot means that the signal from the camera cannot connect to the Internet, and other networked applications cannot be used when the phone is connected to the hotspot. Please pay attention

Why can’t camera connect to 5G frequency WiFi

The difference between 2.4G WiFi and 5G WiFi

1) 2.4G is a wireless technology. Because its frequency band is between 2.400GHz and 2.4835GHz, it is referred to as 2.4G wireless technology
2) 5G WiFi refers to the wireless technology developed based on the IEEE 802.11ac standard. Because the IEEE 802.11ac technology itself works in the 5G Hz frequency band, it is also called 5G WiFi

The difference between 5G WiFi and 5G communication network

· The 5G in 5G WiFi refers to the frequency band of the wireless signal. In the mobile network, the “G” in 4G and 5G refers to the English word “Generation”, and 4G refers to the fourth-generation mobile phone mobile communication standard, 5G is the fifth-generation mobile phone mobile communication standard

Why can’t the device connect to 5G WiFi

· The WiFi module used by the V380 product only supports connection to 2.4G WiFi, and cannot recognize or connect to 5G WiFi. Therefore, 5G WiFi or mixed-band WiFi cannot be used to configure the device network

Networking settings

How to add the online device to your phone

1. Click the “+” button in the upper right corner of the device list -> select [Add Camera]
2. Select [WiFi Smart Camera] -> [Add device ID]
3. Fill in or scan the device ID as prompted by the system -> click [Confirm]
4. APP prompts “Completed”

How to set static IP

After connecting the device with the mobile phone V380App, click [Settings]-[Device IP] interface setting
requirements in the lower right corner of the device list screen :
1. IP: set according to the gateway itself
2. Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
3. Gateway : Normally router IP
4, DNS: Generally router IP

Note: After setting the static IP, the device needs to be powered off and restart once to reconnect to the network.

How to connect the device after changing the router connection or modifying WiFi password

· If you did the following operations
a. Replaced the router
b. Modified WiFi username and password
c. Changed the network configuration information
Please restore the wireless camera to the factory default settings and reconfigure the network

How many devices can be added to the device list

→ Theoretically, there is no upper limit for the number of device lists
→ Only one device screen can be previewed at the same time
→ Long-press the device list under local login to manage devices in batches

What if can not add device to the device list

· If the device can’t be added to the device list, or the system prompts “Device already exists” when adding, and the device can’t be found in the device list, please try to uninstall the software and reinstall it to add the device again

Network connection

How to check the network status of camera

· After the device is added to the device list, you can view the camera network status in the device window
1. Connecting: it means that the APP is acquiring the device status, and the current status of the device will be displayed after the acquisition is successful
2. Internet offline: indicates that the device is not connected to the Internet, and the APP cannot connect to the device in this state
3. Internet online: indicates that the device is connected to the Internet, and the APP can connect to the device remotely in this state
4. LAN online: it means that the device and the mobile phone are in the same local area network. In this state, the camera and the mobile phone are connected point-to-point

APP prompts “Device offline” when it connects to the device

LAN offline, Internet offline

1) Please try to restart the camera to confirm that the camera has been started correctly and connected to WiFi
2) Turn off the router AP isolation function
3) Check whether the mobile phone can be connected to the Internet normally, and the APP has obtained the network permission

LAN online, Internet offline

1) Please try to restart the camera and confirm that the camera is already in station mode
2) Check whether the router is connected to the Internet
3) Check whether the router restricts the device from connecting to the Internet
4) Turn off functions such as router firewall, blacklist, mac address binding, etc.
5) If the above methods fail to solve the problem, please contact the technician

What to do if the image always keeps loading

1. Please try to close the APP and open it again
2. Please try to power off and restart the camera once
3. Please do not exceed the router connection range, try to connect the device close to the router
4. Please log in to the router background to check if there is a restricted device connection

What to do if the image freezes when connecting

· Network fluctuation or insufficient mobile phone memory during connection may cause the screen to freeze
1. Please do not exceed the router connection range, try to connect the device close to the router
2. Please try to switch the screen to SD stream preview

Connect Tutorial

What if WiFi can not be connected to the router？

· Please try to configure the network near the router.
· The V380 wireless camera can only connect 2.4G frequency WiFi signal.
· Do not use Chinese characters for the router name.
· Check whether the router has device connection restrictions.
· Some routers may be difficult to configure, AP hot spot mode is recommended for the configuration

How to connect a V380 camera with a network cable

→ camera with network interface may use a network cable connected to the network
no configuration is needed–plug in the cable,the light indicator turns on, device with loudspeaker will speak “connecting” –”connected”, the camera is connected

Note : The network cable connection has priority. When the network cable is connected, other connection methods will be blocked.

How to connect the camera to the router with WiFi smart link?

[Click on “+” in the upper right corner] -> [Please use Wi-Fi Smart to connect] -> [Enter the WiFi password] -> [Scan to add the device ID (optional)] -> Click [Next] – > After the connection is successful, the camera voice prompts “WiFi connected”. The device appears in the device list. Click the device to view the image.

How to switch wireless camera connection mode?

A, switch AP hot spot mode to station mode

1, indoor wireless camera:

a) Method one: [Long press the reset reset button of the tail line for about 7s] to restore the device to the factory settings, that is, switch to the station mode.

b) Method 2: When the device is connected to the network, in the lower right corner of the V380App device list screen, set [Setting] – [replace device network] – [switch the device to routing mode and select the route to fill in the password] – [OK].

2, outdoor wireless camera:
(a) Method one: [Long press the reset reset button for about 10s] to restore the device to the factory settings. wait until the tail indicator light which flashed rapidly turns to constant on, Short press the button again,When the tail indicator flashes slowly, the device has been switched to station mode.

(b) Method 2: In the state that the device is connected to the network, in the lower right corner of the V380App device list screen [Settings]-[Change Device Network]-[Switch device to route mode and select route to fill in password]-[OK].

B, switch station mode to AP hot spot mode

1, indoor wireless camera:

a) Method one: [Long press the reset reset button on the tail line for about 7s] to restore the device to factory settings. When the device prompts “waiting for WiFi smart link configuration”, press RESET once to reset the button. The device prompts “access point established, That means the camera is in Hot spot mode already.

b) Method Two: In the state of the device connected to the network, in the lower right corner of the V380App device list screen [settings] – [replace device network] – [switch device to AP mode] – [OK].

2, outdoor wireless camera:

(a) Method one: [Long press the reset reset button for about 10s] . Press the RESET button for 10 seconds to reset the device to the factory settings. The tail light indicator which flashed quickly turned to constant on，it means the camera is in hot spot mode.

(b) Method 2: When the device is connected to the network, in the lower right corner of the V380App device list screen, set [Setting] – [Change Device Network] – [Switch Device to AP Mode] – [OK].

How to use the ap hotspot configuration to connect the camera into the route?

1. Android user: Click [+] in the upper right corner -> [Access-Point established] -> [Select device] -> [Select the route to be connected and enter the route password] -> [Click OK] After successful connection,

The camera will show a prompt “WIFI connection completed”, the device list appears on the device -> [Click on the device to view the image]

2. Ios user: enter the phone to set the connection [device hotspot (hot spot at the beginning of the MV)] -> [click the “+” in the upper right corner -> [hotspot is established] -> [select the route to connect and enter the route password] – > [Click OK] .

After the connection is successful, the camera will prompt “WIFI connection completed”.

Networking issues

Which protocols are supported by the wireless camera

→ The protocols supported by the V380 wireless camera include: TCP/IP, UDP, RTSP, HTTP, DDNS, DHCP, FTP, NTP, and ONVIF (other protocols are temporarily not supported)

Note:
1. Only Anyka and GM support the ONVIF protocol. Other solutions do not support ONVIF protocol can not connect to NVR
2. Anyka 2505 version, GM 3505 firmware does not open RTSP protocol, if you need to connect NVR please contact the technician to provide upgrade package to open RTSP

Device can not be added to the device list

·If the device can not be added to the device list, or the system prompts “The device already exists” when adding, the device cannot be found in the device list.

Method One: Close the software completely and restart it. Open

Method Two: Uninstall the software and reinstall it.

How far is the hotspot mode connection range?

→ The general connection distance is 10 to 15 meters, depending on the use of a certain deviation, can be further in a open empty space

Can’t see the image after modifying the routing password or changing the router

After changing the routing name, password, or changing the router, the network information has changed and the wireless camera needs to be reset to the factory and reconfigure the network.

How to check the device ID (device number)

→ ID is the 8-digit device number, which can be tagged on the device body, or viewed in the list of software devices.

During the configuration process, the device voice prompt “wifi connected”, but the mobile phone prompts “device connection timeout”

Method one: According to the voice prompt “wifi connected”
→ Click [Next] system automatically searches for devices connected to the same LAN and the new device will show up in the device list, click [Next] if the App can not find any new devices automatically, the page turns to device manual adding page automatically, input or scan device ID [Add], the system jumps to the device list, the newly added device is displayed in the device list first

Method 2: Add LAN (Only if the camera and the mobile phone are connected to the same network)
→ Return to the [Device List] interface
→ pull down the screen to refresh the device list
→ The system automatically searches for the LAN device and then adds the device to be displayed in the device list first

Can not find Hot spots on App or mobile phone

Make sure the camera has started without problems and is in hot spot mode.

1) the device will be in hot spot mode after the camera speaks”access point established”

2) Outdoor all in one devices will right be in hot spot mode after factory reset, the tail indicator light of outdoor all in one devices without Internet port will be on.

• Make sure antenna is well installed if the device has external antenna.

• Make sure the device is not connected with Internet wire,if it is connected with a wire, other ways of connection will be screened.

• Try change phone connection or Upgrade the firmware version of the device

· Contact the seller to have the device repaired if none of the above works

How to add a networked device to your phone

Method one: Manually add
1, open the [device list] interface, click [+] in the upper right corner
2, select [WiFi connection completed] or [other ways]
3, after entering the ID and password [OK add], the system jumps to the device List, the newly added device is displayed in the first place in the device list.

Method 2: Local Area Network Addition (Only if the camera and the mobile phone are connected to the same network)
1. Open the Device List screen, Pull down the screen to refresh the device list.
2. The system automatically searches for the LAN device and automatically adds the device display. In the first place of the device list , successful adding, the preview needs to enter the correct access password (as shown below)

3, the device’s first networked device password is empty, need to set a password

Password setting

When the software is logged in, the system prompts “Incorrect username or password”

→ Please try to enter the correct user name or password. If you forget the password, click the [Forgot Password] button in the lower left corner of the password box to retrieve the password.

“User name or password is wrong” shows up when the App searches the device after camera speaks “access point established”

1. “user name or password is wrong” shows up when the App searches the device. (Figure 1)

Cause 1: The device has been added to the device list (Figure 2) , you already set a password to it before, and a different password from the existing one is put in

Cause 2: The device list is not added to the device, But you already set a password to it before.

2. When the problem occurs Solution
1: Enter the correct device password in the system box in Figure 1.

Method 2: Remove the device from the device list. , Reconfigure the network after resetting the camera to factory settings

The system prompts “User name or password is wrong” when connecting the camera

1. When the user name or password is wrong when clicking on the device list preview, it is necessary to fill in the [user’s name] and [access password] of [correct] in this window to connect the wireless camera

2. If the password is empty, set the password, V380 PRO The software must set the password.

3. If you cannot confirm or forget the password, you can delete the device in the device list. Reset the camera to factory settings.Empty the password and reconfigure the network.

How to modify the login password of the V380 account?

1. After logging in to the V380 account, select [My] and click on the top avatar to enter the [Personal Information] interface and click [Change Password].

2. If you forget the password, you can click the [Forgot Password] button in the lower left corner of the password box on the login screen. Password

How to set or modify the wireless camera password

1. Click on the device list device settings screen lower-right corner [Settings] -> [Device Information] -> [Change Device Password]

2. Enter the device’s current device password at [Previous Password]

3. If you cannot confirm or forget the password, you can delete the list. Device, restore the factory settings, clear the password, and reconfigure the network

Do you have to set a password for the V380 Network Camera?

In order to protect customer privacy and improve system security, you must set a password to connect to the device.

When the device password is empty, opening the real-time preview will pop up a security prompt.

Click [Set Password] to set a password for the device (as shown below)

How to set a password to AP Hot spot

1) After the camera is connected to the camera, you can click the [Settings] button [Replace Device Network] interface to set the hotspot password in the lower right corner of the device list screen.

2) Switch the device to AP mode (hotspot mode). Fill in the hotspot password under the hotspot name. (8 or more letters, symbols, or combination of numbers), click Save when completed

Mobile phone does not receive verification code

1, please try again later to receive
2, please contact technical staff processing

Real-time preview

Image display problem

Huaping or serious color cast

If there are large abnormal color patches，flashing stripes，or blurred screen,generally it’s hardware problems, please contact the seller for repairment

Color mode inversion

You need to modify the device configuration with a test file.

Contact technical personnel to obtain the test file.

Image left and right mirror

On some devices,when the image is inverted ,it appears to be left and right mirror image.

This phenomenon is a hardware feature and cannot be adjusted.

Image is red during the day or dark at night

You need to modify the device configuration with a test file.

Contact technical personnel to obtain the test file.

Unusual or jittery playback screen

1) Attempt to replace the power plug to reconnect with the power cord

2) Upgrade the device firmware version

3) If it is not resolved Contact the seller to return the equipment

Can a wireless camera zoom?

V380 network camera does not have automatic zoom function at present, the mobile phone real-time preview can use digital zoom, that is, use two-finger zoom screen view

Device time does not match current time

· After the wireless camera is connected to the mobile phone, set the time in V380App [Device Configuration] – [Time Setting]

· If the device time changes automatically, please try to upgrade the firmware version of the device

Note:
1) if the device is in AP mode or station mode,but the router has no access to the Internet, it will cause the time to revert to 1970 or 1979.

2) Video time needs to comply with the Internet time, without Internet access, the recording time can not be correctly set, just tap to view real time video, time will be set to comply with Internet time.

3) Time need to be corrected after each reboot of the device

Live preview black screen

· Try restarting the device with power off
· Please upgrade the APP to the latest version
· For network reasons, please use the hotspot mode to connect the device

1) If the hotspot mode can output images, please try to reconfigure the network or change the network connection

2) If the hotspot mode Under the black screen, please try to upgrade the firmware version.

• If the system time in the upper right corner is normal or normal voice intercom is available, but the image is black, it is a hardware problem. Contact the seller to repair the equipment.

The picture has white jitter noise

· Noise is generally caused by overheating of the device or malfunction of the sensor chip.

The noise of the picture frame affects the picture quality and causes the device to alarm frequently.

1) Try to shut down the device for a while and then restart the device.

2) Try to upgrade the device firmware.

3) If the upgrade fails to be resolved, contact Seller repair equipment

Live preview black screen

· Try restarting the device with power off
· Please upgrade the APP to the latest version
· For network reasons, please use the hotspot mode to connect the device

1) If the hotspot mode can output images, please try to reconfigure the network or change the network connection

2) If the hotspot mode Under the black screen, please try to upgrade the firmware version.

• If the system time in the upper right corner is normal or normal voice intercom is available, but the image is black, it is a hardware problem. Contact the seller to repair the equipment.

The image flips upside down

Please click [Invert] button in the real-time preview interface to flip the image to normal direction

The preview is blurred and the image is not clear

1) The lens does not focus, you can use the hand to adjust the lens to clear the picture

2) Some equipment Fixed lens can not be screwed Contact the seller to repair equipment

Feature settings

How to use the “voice control platform”

☞ [Apple Phone] Click [Sound Control PTZ] to enable voice control and speak the following commands to the system:
[Left] PTZ Rotates Left
[Right] PTZ Rotates Right
[Up] Device PTZ Rotates Up
[Down] PTZ Rotates Down
[Enlarge] Enlarges the Current Display
• [Zoom Out] Reduces the Current Display
• [Continue] Repeats Last Control Command
• [ Screen Shot] Screenshot Saved to Album
·【Close】Close voice control function

Normal video view at LAN, but“ Internet offline”

1) Check the router is connected to the Internet

2) Check if the router has any restrictions on the device Internet access

3) Please contact technical staff for help

Unable to control PTZ rotation

1) Please try to upgrade the device firmware version

2) If you still cannot turn to hardware after upgrading, you need to contact the seller for repair.

The device has no sound in real-time talkback

· Check if the device can speak when restarting the device

· Upgrade the firmware version of the device · Try to use the hotspot mode to connect, if there is a voice in the hotspot mode, it is generally a network problem

· If it still doesn’t work after trying the above methods，the loudspeaker may be damaged

Real-time preview of mobile phone without sound

· Make sure the phone system sound is turned on
· Upgrade the device firmware version
· Upgrade the App version
· Try to use the hotspot mode to connect, if there is a sound in the preview mode of the hotspot mode, it is generally a network problem
· Still no sound after trying the above may damage the device pickup

Preset position cannot be used

You need to modify the device configuration with a test file.

Contact technical personnel to obtain the test file.

How to use “light control function”

· Single lamp (white light only) and dual light (white light and infrared light) are available for
light bulb products .[Single Light Bulb] screen only have a color mode, and the white light automatically lights up when the environment is dark.

[Dual Light Bulb] Automatic shift between color mode and black-and-white mode according to environment brightness, infrared light turns on in black-and-white mode, white light turns on when alarm is triggered or the light is switched on manually, screen turns to color mode and infrared light turns off automatically

. Bulb can be switched on/off manually or auto switch through“light control function”interface (as shown below)

· If the bulb product is turned on, the real-time preview interface does not find the light control switch. Please contact the technician for processing.

Note: The light control function can only be used on the mobile client, the computer client does not support

How to use “image attributes”

There is “Image Properties” function in real-time video in Starlight products

. Click “Image Properties” button to expand [Full Color] [Black and White] [Auto] Three Options
Full Color: Fixed full color view, star light effect under weak light

black and white: Fixed picture is black and white mode

Auto: Image attributes are automatically adjusted by the system

Where live screenshots are saved

Screenshots saved in the phone, can be viewed in the V380 software – [My] – [Album], or in the phone album search saved screenshots

Real-time video problems

Where is the live preview video saved?

The video is saved in the mobile phone, and can be viewed in the V380 software – [My] – [Album], or search saved video files in the local album of the mobile phone

Real-time preview of video without sound

1) Make sure the mobile phone multimedia volume is turned on

2) Confirm that the device is previewed in real time

The system prompts “Cannot play” when opening a video

The video file is corrupted and cannot be played. Try to re-record or reinstall the V380 PRO software version

Do all devices support live preview video?

· Ordinary shaking machine and bolt device support real-time preview video function

· Panorama (180°/360°) device does not support real-time preview video function

What format is the live preview video?

Video saved as mp4 format file

Video problem

Video setting problem

How to set the memory card recording

· Open the V380App and click the [Settings] button in the lower right corner of the device list screen. -> [Device Recording]
1) Only open the automatic recording. The recording time is continuous. The recording file is usually 10 minutes.
2) Only the alarm recording is enabled and the mobile alarm is triggered. Video recording, video recording time is not continuous, recording duration is uncertain, no more than 10 minutes.
3) Simultaneously open automatic recording and alarm recording. Recording time is continuous. Recording duration is indefinite and does not exceed 10 minutes.
4) After the setting is completed, no matter if the equipment is connected to the network, As long as the device is powered on, it will start recording.

Note: When the device is not connected to the Internet, it is necessary to open the real-time preview synchronization device time to ensure that the recording time is normal.

Where is the memory card slot

[Ordinary shaking machine] The slot is next to the power supply
【 Q6 shaking machine 】 The slot is on the side of the head
【 Ordinary panorama 】 The slot is on the side of the camera body
【 Outdoor bolt 】 The slot is in the camera body and needs to be disassembled and removed
【 Panoramic bolt machine] The card slot is at the bottom of the device. Remove the waterproof cover and take it out.

Which Memory Card Does the V380 Camera Use?

· Use TF card (macroSD card), maximum support 64G capacity), format is FAT, no special requirements for brand, read and write speed

The system prompts “The SD card read/write status is abnormal”

1) format the card on computer, then insert back into the camera , and try again
2) try a new card if still doesn’t work
3）if it still doesn’t work, please contact the seller to have it repaired

Notes : The camera supports maximum 64G memory cards (200W and above pixel products support 32G memory cards)

Memory card video file format

1) The video file in the memory card is in AVI format
2) The video file downloaded to the phone is in MP4 format

The system prompts “The device does not have an SD card inserted”

1) The memory card is formatted on a computer, plug it back in to restart the device after the device is still prompt

2) operate normally try to replace the memory card

3) abnormalities may still be prompted for the memory card slot required to contact the seller to repair damaged equipment after changing the card

Notes : The camera supports up to 64G memory cards (200W and above pixel products support 32G memory cards)

Recordings auto coverage when the SD card is full

· If the memory card is full, It will automatically write over previous recordings dated earliest
. If the video is full, it cannot be overwritten automatically. Please format the memory card on the computer and plug it back in to the device.

Device does not record to SD card

1) Check the status of the SD card in the App Settings -> Device Recorder is enabled; check the status of the SD card in the Device Information -> Card Capacity Test
2) please try restart the camera
3) take the SD card out and format it on the computer,then insert it back into the camera and reboot the device

One day’s video file memory size

· According to the scene of the screen
1) 130w_H264 device single-day video file capacity range is between 0.5G~2.5G
2) 200w_H265 device single-day video file capacity range is between 1.0G~3.0G
3) 300w_H265 device single-day video file capacity Range between 3.0G~5.0G
4) 500w_H265 device single-day video file capacity range from 5.0G to 7.0G

Video file is too big

· If the capacity of a single video file is large and 50M, the video file is too large
· There may be too much noise on the screen. (For example, thermal noise may occur when the device is not properly cooled.)
· If the screen shows a lot of noise, make sure the device is cooling properly or try Upgrade the firmware version of the device . If there are still some noises after the upgrade, it may be a hardware problem. Please contact the seller to repair the device.

How to clear memory card video files

Method 1: After the device is connected to the mobile phone, click the [Settings] button in the lower right corner of the device list screen -> [Device Information] -> [Card Capacity Detection] Click [Format Memory Card]
Method 2: Remove the memory card and use the card reader Put the SD card on the computer to view or modify the contents of the SD card

Note: After the SD card is formatted, the video recording cannot be restored. Please exercise caution.

Note: When the device is not connected to the Internet, it is necessary to open the real-time preview synchronization device time to ensure that the recording time is normal.

Where is the memory card slot

Which Memory Card Does the V380 Camera Use?

· Use TF card (macroSD card), maximum support 64G capacity), format is FAT, no special requirements for brand, read and write speed

The system prompts “The SD card read/write status is abnormal”

Notes : The camera supports maximum 64G memory cards (200W and above pixel products support 32G memory cards)

Memory card video file format

1) The video file in the memory card is in AVI format
2) The video file downloaded to the phone is in MP4 format

The system prompts “The device does not have an SD card inserted”

1) The memory card is formatted on a computer, plug it back in to restart the device after the device is still prompt

2) operate normally try to replace the memory card

3) abnormalities may still be prompted for the memory card slot required to contact the seller to repair damaged equipment after changing the card

Notes : The camera supports up to 64G memory cards (200W and above pixel products support 32G memory cards)

Recordings auto coverage when the SD card is full

Device does not record to SD card

One day’s video file memory size

Video file is too big

How to clear memory card video files

Note: After the SD card is formatted, the video recording cannot be restored. Please exercise caution.

Video playback problem

How to playback video

· Mobile phone video playback

Mobile App can’t find video files

1) Put the SD card on the computer Check If there are any recordings in the card
2) Upgrade the firmware version of the device
3) take the SD card out and format it on the computer,then insert it back into the camera and reboot the device.

Video playback black screen

1) Try connect in Hotspot mode,if video can be viewed normally, there may be network problems,Please check the network to which the device is connected.
2) If the hotspot mode playback also has a black screen phenomenon:
Method 1: Upgrade the device firmware version
Method 2 : take the SD card out and format it on the computer,then insert it back into the camera and reboot the device
3) If not resolved contact technical staff for help

Why is the recording time 1970 or 1979?

1) if the device is in AP mode or station mode,but the router has no access to the Internet, the time will be restored to 1970 or 1979.
2) video time needs to comply with the Internet time, without Internet access, the recording time can not be correctly set, just tap to view real time video, time will be set to comply with Internet time

Note: Time need to be corrected after each reboot of the device

There is no sound in memory card playback

1) Make sure the mobile phone multimedia volume is turned on
2) Confirm that the device’s real-time preview can receive normal audio
3) Click [Setting] button -> [Device Video] interface in the lower right corner of the device list screen to confirm that video audio has been turned on

Can recording replay be controlled

Memory card video playback only supports dragging progress, stop/play, and switch video functions; fast forward, rewind, zoom, and other operations are not supported temporarily

Video Download Issues

“Connecting” or “Connection failed” while downloading video

· Generally a network problem:
1) Try to download the video file again
2) Restart the device after a power failure
3) Try to replace the network connected to the device

Where are the downloaded recordings saved?

The downloaded video is saved in the phone and can be viewed in the V380 software – [My] – [Album] or search saved video files in the phone album

Downloaded video system prompt “Can’t play”

The video file is corrupted and cannot be played. Try to download the video file again

Cloud storage issues

Cloud Service Tutorial

How to buy cloud storage service?

Click [Cloud Storage Service] -> [Buy Service] -> Select a Package to Purchase -> Click [Binding] and the binding is completed.

Tips:
Before binding the device to the cloud storage service, pay attention to:
1. Does the current firmware version of the device support this feature?
2. Whether the current account has purchased the cloud storage service package

How to unlock device cloud storage services?

1. Mobile phone number login user: Click [cloud storage service] -> [unzip service] -> [Yes] -> [Get verification code and enter the verification code] -> [Click OK] to finish unbinding.
2. E-mail login user: Click [Cloud Storage Service] -> [Unbundling Service] -> [Yes] -> [Get Verification Code and enter Verification Code] -> [Click OK] to finish unbinding.

Cloud Storage Package Problem

Cloud Storage Package Fees

1)【$2.9/month】Videos are reserved for 7 days. Package service period is one month.
2)【$4.6/month】Videos are reserved for 30 days. Package service period is one month.
3)【$29/year】Video is reserved for 7 days. The package service period is 12 months.
4)【$46/year】The video is reserved for 30 days. The package service period is 12 months.

Note:
1) The use period of the package is calculated from the purchase time of the package. After the package expires, the equipment stops uploading videos,but users can still access the recorded videos during retention period
2) One cloud storage package can only be bound to one device

How to check the valid period of the cloud service

1) Select the device that needs to view the cloud storage package information in the [My Device] list.
2) Click the [.] cloud icon in the lower right corner of the device playback window to enter the cloud storage service interface. You can view the cloud service package details of the device.

Note : Package valid period starts from package purchase time

Buy cloud storage package payment

1) Chinese mobile phone system defaults to domestic cloud storage service, supports WeChat payment, and AliPay payment two payment methods
2) Non-Chinese system defaults to foreign cloud storage service, only supports PayPal payment

Cloud storage package replacement and renewal method

【Cloud Storage Package Replacement】
· After getting the new package, you need to untie the old package first, and then bind the device to the new package

【Cloud Storage Package Renewal】
· Click the cloud storage icon in the lower right corner of the device playback window to enter the [Cloud Storage Service] interface
· Select [Renew this service] to renew the package and follow the system prompts (below)

Note: Package renewal can only continue the type of package already bound, and can not be overlaid with other types of packages. If you need to change the package type, please refer to the cloud storage package replacement method.

Buy multiple packages at once, the list shows only one package

· Only one package comes into effect at one single purchase, if you want to buy several same packages,please pay at one time by changing the package quantity, and the valid time will accumulated，if pay you pay them separately,the valid time will still be the same with one package
.If you want to buy several different packages,please pay them separately.

What is “artificial intelligence” and “message notification service”

【Artificial Intelligence】
· After the artificial intelligence package is bound, the alarm mode is artificial intelligence detection. Artificial intelligence is recognized by the deep neural network system. The person in front of the camera will trigger the alarm and greatly reduce the false alarm rate

【message notification service】
· Once the package is bound to camera,when the alarm is triggered，system will send notification message to users，based on login way，SMS(phone account login user)，e-mail(e-mail login user) or “my message”on the App(third party login user)

Can overseas users use cloud storage services?

Overseas users already support international cloud storage services

Reminder still expires after the package renews

Try to untie the package and re-bind it

How many devices can be bound to cloud storage package

· One cloud storage package can only be bound to one camera
· Within the package valid period, the bound device to the package can be changed, before linking the package to a new device, you should unbind it with the current device

· One camera can only be bound to one Cloud storage package
· If you want to change for another package,you should untie the current one, then tie a new one.

Note: The cloud storage service can only query the recording files of the current bound device.

Cloud storage video issue

Cloud storage does not have video

1) Confirm that the device is connected to the Internet
2) Attempt to power off and restart the device
3) Unbind the device Cloud storage package Rebinding
4) Confirm [Settings] – [Device Alarm] – Normal setting of alarm area

Why cloud storage video is not continuous

· The working mode of cloud storage is alarm recording. Advanced motion detection is used to trigger recording when there is a movement of the object on the
screen. · The device does not trigger an alarm when the screen is stationary. The cloud storage does not record video.
· Each phase of cloud storage is recorded for more than 10 seconds. Up to 2 minutes, discontinuous in time

Cloud storage video how to download

· Download button on the video playback interface, the downloaded video is saved in [My] – [Album] – [Video]

Cloud storage video how to delete

Cloud storage videos cannot be manually deleted. After the reservation period expires, the system will automatically clear the recording files.

Cloud storage video can control playback

· Cloud storage video support drag progress, stop / play, switch video, zoom and other functions
· Panorama device supports playback using panoramic mode window

Can I still view videos after expired/unlocked cloud storage packages?

After the cloud storage package expires, the video file will no longer be uploaded.
You can still view the videos within retention period if you haven’t disconnect the storage package, once you disconnect it，the server will delete recordings in hours,will not be able to view anymore

Alarm problem

How to turn on/off the alarm function

• After the camera is connected to the camera, open the V380App
Method One: Click the [Device List] device playback screen [ Arbitration /Disarming] button, tick to open Arming _{(Figure 1)}
Method Two: Click [Settings]->[Device in the lower right corner of the screen Alarm】【open/close interface】【disarm switch, blue open _{(Figure 2)}

Mobile App Fails to Receive Alarm Screenshots

1) On the [Settings] – [Device Alarms] screen, confirm that the device is armed
2) Make sure the arming time and arming zones are set correctly
3) Make sure the device is connected to the phone and can be previewed in real time
4) Try to close the software completely and reopen it
5) Trying to upgrade the device firmware version or restart the device

Mobile phone does not receive alarm information push

1) Confirm that the mobile phone can receive the alarm picture
2) In [My] – [Settings] – [New message push] to confirm the push function has been opened
3) Confirm the mobile phone has opened the software’s push notification authority
4) Try to uninstall the software Loading

note: Due to system reasons, some mobile phones are not compatible with push service and therefore cannot receive alarm information. If you are inconvenienced, please understand.

Alarm picture cannot be opened

1) There is a network fluctuation, please try to refresh and reload
2) Please try again later to open the picture

How to delete the alarm screenshot

The alarm picture is stored in the cloud and cannot be manually deleted. The system will clear the alarm picture periodically (a week or so).

The old alarm picture will be deleted on its own

How to turn on or off the wireless camera alarm tone

After the mobile phone is connected to the device, click [Settings]-[Device Alarm] in the lower right corner of the V380App device list screen to turn on or off the [Alarm Alert] switch

Why do devices alarm frequently?

1) The device moves or the screen shift will cause an alarm
2) The screen mode switching or light changes will cause an alarm
3) Too much noise in the screen may also cause an alarm
4) Try to restart the device or upgrade the device firmware version

Does the wireless camera support external alarm equipment?

Some wireless cameras with 433 functions can be connected to external alarm devices supporting 433 protocol, please confirm with the seller before buying

433 alarm connection instructions

1) After the mobile phone is connected to the device, click [Settings] – [Alarm Settings] in the lower right corner of the device list screen, click [Zone Settings] to enter the linkage device add interface
2) Click the right plus sign to enter the configuration interface, and at the same time open the Configure the linkage device (such as: access control, smoke sensor, etc.) and trigger the alarm.
3) After the alarm is triggered, the device can automatically search for your linkage device. when the research ends and the device shows up, click the configuration button, set the name and alarm parameter to add the device.
4) Enter the PTZ page of the camera which has been connected to linkage device,set preset position on the top right corner and apply, then save

Note:
1) Only 433 protocol supported linkage device works
2) Set the rate to 1~~2K if you are using oscillating resistance adjustable linkage products before configuration.
3) Some products use 9V square batteries,so please prepare if necessary

AI false positives

Artificial intelligence alarm identifys human shape in the picture by deep neural network algorithm, there may be possible false alarm. Reporting false alarm pictures can help us to optimize the system and reduce false alarms
Tick the lower right Corner, and go back to previous page,false alarm image will be reported.

NVR problem

Does the V380 camera support network video recorders?

· GM and anyka V380 products support connection to network video recorders (NVR)
· Other solutions products do not support access to network video recorders (NVR)
· 200W and above resolution products do not support access to network video recorders (NVR) temporarily.
· If the device The firmware version is anyka 2505, GM 3505, etc. or above. RTSP is not enabled by default and cannot transmit images. Please contact technical personnel to obtain upgrade packages.

What video recorder can connect V380 camera?

The V380 camera can be connected to mainstream video recorders from HIKVISION ,dahua, Techwell, etc.

Note: The NVR must support the standard Onvif_2.0 protocol.

In what way can a V380 camera be connected to video recorder

· The V380 camera can be connected to the VCR via cable (with network port) or wirelessly.
· If to be connected to router, the camera and video recorder should be connected to the router of same gateway,if to be connected to switch, an IP address is needed to be assigned to camera.

Network video recorder (NVR) connection method

· Connect the camera and NVR to the LAN and add the device through automatic search.
· If the NVR does not find the device IP, please confirm that the network cable is connected and the camera is the same as the NVR gateway

Note: The onvif protocol is selected for the network protocol, and the port 8899 is selected for the network port.

NVR found device IP but failed to connect

· If the device firmware version is 2505,3505 or later, RTST is not enabled by default and cannot transfer images. Please contact technical personnel to obtain upgrade package upgrades
. Try to fill in the video stream path directly (0.0.0.0 is the device IP address, which needs to be manually filled in)
[Sub Stream]rtsp://0.0.0.0/live/ch00_0
[Master stream]rtsp://0.0.0.0/live/ch00_1

Network recorder (NVR) manual connection method

· If the recorder cannot automatically search for connections, please use the manual connection method
1) Set a static IP address for the device
2) Open the NVR Manually add a device interface
3) Fill in the connection parameters
. Device IP: Fill in the device’s static IP
. Connection Protocol: ONVIF
Port: 8899
Image format: H.264
Connection method: TCP
Video source path: /live/ch00_1
User name: admin
Password: Empty

Hik-Partner Pro Portal Setup Guide

admin — Thu, 29 Jun 2023 20:36:02 +0000

Hik-Partner Pro Portal Setup Guide, Hik-Partner Pro is a convergent, cloud-based security solution that helps manage services for your customers and expand your business by subscription offers. Read the following sections to learn more about Hik-Partner Pro.

Chapter 1 Introduction

Hik-Partner Pro is a convergent, cloud-based security solution that helps manage services for your customers and expand your business by subscription offers. You can monitor the system health status of your customers’ sites (even resolve problems) remotely, using a simple and reliable platform. Hik-Partner Pro solution enables you to customize security solutions for customers with fully-converged Hikvision devices, covering video, intrusion, access, intercom, and more.

Read the following sections to learn more about Hik-Partner Pro.

Clients
Relationship Among Hik-Partner Pro, Hik-Connect, HikCentral Connect, and HikCentral ReGuard

Clients

Hik-Partner Pro solution provides different ways/clients for service providers’ customers.

Table 1-1 Client Description

Client	Description
Hik-Partner Pro Portal	Portal for service providers logging in to Hik-Partner Pro to manage the security business, such as permission and employees management, site management, device management, project registration, product selection, Hikvision product order management, solution search, and devices health monitoring.
Hik-Partner Pro Mobile Client	Mobile Client for service providers logging into Hik-Partner Pro to manage site, apply for site information management permission from end users, manage and configure the devices, submit RMAs (Return Material Authorization) requests, create quotations, etc.
Hik-Connect Mobile Client	Mobile Client for customers to manage their devices, accept the site handover from the service provider as the site owner, approve the Installer’s application for site information management permission, etc.
Hik-Connect Portal	Portal for customers to manage their employees’ access level and attendance after you set an attendance system for them via the Hik-Partner Pro Portal.
HikCentral Connect Portal	Portal for customers to manage resources, configure and use video management, on-board monitoring, alarm detection systems, etc.

Client	Description
HikCentral Connect Mobile Client	Mobile Client for customers to use video management, on-board monitoring, and alarm detection systems, such as live view, playback, driving monitoring, and track playback.
HikCentral ReGuard Web Client	Web Client for service providers to configure parameters for video alarm receiving center and manage work orders or statistics reports.
HikCentral ReGuard Control Client	Control Client for service providers to perform alarm monitoring, virtual guard, investigation and search, and so on.

Relationship Among Hik-Partner Pro, Hik-Connect, HikCentral Connect, and HikCentral ReGuard

As the following diagram shows, Hik-Partner Pro provides certain value-added services related with Hik-Connect, HikCentral Connect, and HikCentral ReGuard. You can activate these value-added services to benefit yourselves or your customers (i.e., customers who use Hik-Connect, HikCentral Connect, and HikCentral ReGuard). For more information about the value-added services and how they relate to Hik-Connect,HikCentral Connect, and HikCentral ReGuard, see Value-Added Services and its sections.

Hik-Partner Pro Portal Setup Guide

CXlNote

The availability of the value-added services is determined by your country/region. Some value- added services are not supported in every country/region.

Figure 1-1 Relationship Diagram

1. Target Audience

This manual provides the service providers (i.e., Installer, System Integrator, Distributors, Resellers, OEM, and Alarm Receiving Centers(ARC)) with the essential information and instructions about how to use the Hik-Partner Pro Portal to manage the security business.

This manual describes how to manage the permission and employees of your company, add new or existing site for management, apply for site authorization and device permissions from your customers, manage and configure the devices belonging to the site, project registration, product selection, Hikvision product order management, solution search, and check the device health status for further maintenance, etc.

1. Entities in Hik-Partner Pro

Here we introduce the entities (any physical or conceptual object) involved in Hik-Partner Pro.

Identity Related Entities

Service Provider

Those who provide services such as the design of security solutions, system/device installation, after-sales, and (or) device maintenance. There are several service provider types and the detailed descriptions are as follows.

Installer

Provides device installation and maintenance services for customers.

System Integrator

Integrates multiple systems to provide solutions for customers.

Distributor

Trades with Hikvision and supplies Hikvision devices to other businesses that sell to customers.

Reseller

Bulk purchases Hikvision devices from distributors and then sells the devices to installers.

Alarm Receiving Center (ARC)

Provides the alarm receiving and handling service for customers.

C®Note

If you are to apply for joining Hik-Partner Pro as ARC, selecting Alarm Receiving Center as the type of service provider is recommended when registering. For details, refer to Add Your Company to the ARC List .

OEM

OEM partners source products, parts or services from Hikvision and relabeling, rebranding or embedding them as a part to another product or system.

Maintenance Service Partner (MSP)

The MSP is a special type of security service providers. They offer technical support to installers who lack technical capabilities and skills. Usually, they collaborate with these installers to provide device management/maintenance services for end users. On Hik-Partner Pro, installers can share sites with their maintenance service partners to collaborate with them. For details, see Site Sharing .

C®Note

The MSP can select any of the service provider types when they registering an account for logging in to Hik-Partner Pro.

Remote Monitoring Center (RMC)

Provides the alarm receiving and handling services remotely based on the video monitoring via HikCentral ReGuard.

C® Note

The RMC can select any of the service provider types when they registering an account for logging in to Hik-Partner Pro.

End User

Those who have purchased Hikvision devices (e.g., network cameras, DVRs, alarm devices, video intercom devices, and access control devices) and want to manage the devices via an easy-to-use mobile client. End users are customers of the service provider, and they use Hik-Connect to manage devices.

Site Related Entities

Site

A site represents a physical location where device(s) are installed and through which the Installer/ Installer Admin can manage and configure devices.

Site Manager

When a site is assigned to an Installer, the Installer becomes the site manager of the site, and can manage and configure the devices of the site.

C® Note

Assigning site to Installer is not supported in countries and regions only with support for free functions. For details about free functions and these countries and regions, see Regions Only with Support for Free Functions .

Site Owner

When an installer transfers ownership of a site to an end user, the end user becomes the site owner who is the holder of the site. The installer can also apply for site authorization from the site owner to manage the site.

1. Running Environment

The following is recommended system for running the Portal.

Operating System

Microsoft Windows® 7/8.1/10 (32-bit and 64-bit).

CPU

Intel® Core^TM i5-4460 CPU @3.20GHz 3.20GHz and above.

RAM

8 GB and above (4 GB at least).

Graphics Card

NVIDIA® GeForce GT 730

Web Browser

Versions of Firefox (32-bit and 64-bit), Chrome (32-bit and 64-bit), and Edge (32-bit and 64-bit) released in the latest half year.

1.4 Function Availability for Different Countries/Regions

Hik-Partner Pro offers both free functions and value-added functions that cost certain fees. You can purchase certain services in the Service Market of Hik-Partner Pro to get access to the value-added functions. Currently, certain value-added functions are only available in certain countries and regions. And users in some countries and regions can only access the free functions.

‘Note

This document contains introductions of all Hik-Partner Pro functions, therefore some functions illustrated in this document may Not be supported in your country or region. And contents in some figures in this document may be different from the actual interface, if so, the latter shall prevail.

- 1. Functions Only Available in Certain Regions

The following table shows the functions only available in certain countries and regions.

Note

For details about whether your country or region supports the functions contained in the services listed below, refer to the after sales or local distributor.

Service	Function(s) Only Available in Certain Countries and Regions
*Health Monitoring Service*	Only linkage rule. diNote Linkage rule is unavailable in the United States and Canada.
*Cloud Storage Service*	All functions contained in the service.
*Temperature Screening Service*	All functions contained in the service.
*Cloud Attendance Service*	All functions contained in the service.
*Alarm Receiving Center (ARC)* *Service*	All functions contained in the service.
*Purchase Employee Account* *Add-On*	All functions contained in the service.
*HCC Services*	All functions contained in the services.
*HikCentral ReGuard Service*	All functions contained in the services.

- 1. Regions Only with Support for Free Functions

The following two tables shows the free functions and the countries and regions only with support for the free functions.

Table 1-2 Free Functions

Module	Function(s)
Account Management	*Register an Installer Admin Account* *Manage Company Information* *Set Account Information*
Site Management	*Add New Site* *Add Existing Site* *Hand Over Site* *Apply for Site Authorization from Site Owner* *Site Sharing*
Device Management	• Add Device

Module	Function(s)
	o *Add Detected Online Device* ° *Add Device by Entering Serial No.* o *Add Devices by IP Address or Domain Name* o *Batch Add Devices* *Apply for Device Permission* *Release the Permission for Devices* *Synchronize Devices with Hik-Connect Account* *Enable Device to Send Notifications* *Upgrade Device* *Batch Upgrade Devices on LAN* *Configure DDNS for Devices* Manage AX PRO Security Control Panel o *Control AX PRO and AX HYBIRD PRO* o *Configure AX PRO and AX HYBIRD PRO* o *Batch Configure AX PRO* o *Batch Arm/Disarm AX PRO and AX HYBRID PRO* *Remote Configuration* *Reset Device Password* *Unbind a Device from Its Current Account*
Video	*View Live Video* *Play Back Video Footage*
Log	*Search Operation Log*
Tool	*Tools*
Solution	View and Search for Solutions, and Add to Favorites
Explore	View, Search, Like, Share, and Comment News Articles, and Add to Favorites View, Search, Like, Share, and Comment How-To Guides or Videos, and Add to Favorities Receive and View Notices View and Participate in Activities View and Participate in Events
Project	*Create a Project* *View Project History*
Order & Promotion	*View and Search for Products* *Compare Products* *Create an Order* *View My Orders*

Module

Function(s)

Support

Tutorial Center
Chatbot
Case

° Submit Case

° View and Handle Case Records

Feedback
Serial Number Inquiry

C® Note

This function is only available for accounts of authenticated channel partners.

Contact Us
RMA (Return Materials Authorization)

o Submit RMA Request

o View RMA Request

CH] Note

This function is only available for accounts of authenticated channel partners.

Rebate

The Process of Earning Rebates
The Way to Calculate Rebate Amount
View Rebate Details
View Bill of Sale

Table 1-3 Countries and Regions Only With Support for Free Functions

Continent	Country/Region
Africa	Angola, Benin, Botswana, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cameroon, Cape Verde, Central African Republic, Chad, Comoros, Congo(Brazzaville), Congo(Kinshasa), Cote D’Ivoire, Djibouti, Equatorial Guinea, Eritrea, Ethiopia, Gabon, Gambia, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau, Liberia, Madagascar, Malawi, Mali, Mayotte, Mozambique, Namibia, Niger, Nigeria, Rwanda, Senegal, Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Somalia, Tanzania, Togo, Uganda, Zambia, Zimbabwe
Asia	Japan, Taiwan (China)

Chapter 2 Account Management

There are two types of accounts: Installer Admin and Installer. Each company has only one Installer Admin but can have multiple Installers.

□S Note

For the countries and regions only with support for free functions, only the Installer Admin account is available and the Installer account is unavailable. For details about free functions and these countries and regions, see Regions Only with Support for Free Functions .

Installer Admin

The Installer Admin has full access to the functions in the system. Usually, the Installer Admin can be the manager of the installation company.

Installer

Installers are “sub-accounts” to the Installer Admin and are controlled by permissions for what they can do. For example, they can only manage the sites that are assigned to them. Usually, the Installers are the employees in the installation company.

The installation company should first register an Installer Admin account, and then invite the employees to register Installer accounts.

The flow chart of the whole process is shown as follows.

Figure 2-1 Flow Chart of Account Management

• Register an Installer Admin Account: You should first register an Installer Admin account before accessing any functions of Hik-Partner Pro. For details, refer to Register an Installer Admin Account .

□3 Note

After you register Installer Admin account, you need to complete your company information after logging in to the account. For details, see Manage Company Information .

Set Role and Permission: Before adding an employee to the system, you can create different roles with different permissions for accessing system resources. For details, refer to Manage Role and Permission .
Invite Employees: You can invite employees to register Installer accounts and assign different roles to employees to grant the permissions to her/him. For details, refer to Invite Employee .
Accept Invitation and Register Installer Accounts: The employees can accept the invitation and register Installer accounts to manage sites and devices. For details, refer to Accept Invitation and Register Installer Account .
1. Register an Installer Admin Account

The installation company should first register an Installer Admin account before accessing any functions of Hik-Partner Pro.

Steps

OS Note

You can click Try Free Demo on the login page to see what Hik-Partner Pro can do for you, without registering any account. The data displayed in the demo is for demonstration only, and you cannot perform any operations.

In the address bar of the web browser, enter https://www.hik-partner.com .

C® Note

For Russia, you can enter https://www.hik-partnerru.com in the address bar of the web browser.

The Login page of Hik-Partner Pro will show.

On the Login page, click Register to register an account.

nS Note

If your account has been registered, you can click Login to log in to Hik-Partner Pro. For details about login, refer to Login .
Whether you will enter the process of registering the OneHikID account or Hik-ProConnect account is determined by your country/region.

Select your identity and service provider type (installer, system integrator, distributor, reseller, alarm receiving center (ARC), or OEM).

Hl] Note

If you enter the process of registering the Hik-ProConnect account, you don’t need to select the service provider type. For details about the identities and service provider types, refer to Entities in Hik-Partner Pro .

– Register the OneHikID account:

Set your name (first name and last name), company name, email, verification code (for verifying the email address), and password.

CIS Note

Click Register.

– Register the Hik-ProConnect account:

Enter your email address and the CAPTCHA code.
Click Get Verification Code to verify the account.

OS Note

If you don’t enter the verification code within the required time, click Get Again to get the verification code again.
If you fail to get the verification code, click Didn’t receive the verification code? for failure reasons.

On the Complete Your Information page, enter or edit the required information such as your company name, address, phone number, and name. (For the process of registering the Hik- ProConnect account, you also need to set a password for your account on this page.)

OS Note

Optional: Enter the invitation code if you are invited by your friend, so that your friend can earn some reward points.
Optional: Check I would like to receive newsletters about new product introduction, service introduction, and questionnaires from Hikvision. I understand that at any time I can unsubscribe. to subscribe.

If subscription succeeded, you will receive a confirmation email in a few minutes. You can unsubscribe by clicking the URL in the email if needed.
After subscription, we will send emails about the latest product introduction, service introduction, questionnaires and special offers, to the email address which is used for your account registration.

Check I agree to the Terms of Service and Privacy Policy if you accept the details in these agreements.
Click Enter Hik-ProConnect to finish registration and log into Hik-Partner Pro.

What to do next

After registering an Installer Admin account and logging into Hik-Partner Pro with this account, you need to complete the information of your company. For details, refer to Manage Company Information .

1. Manage Company Information

After registering an Installer Admin account, you can manage and edit your company information.

Steps

OS Note

When your company is not authenticated, the Installer Admin can manage and edit all the company information, and when your company authentication application is approved, the Installer Admin can submit the information change request and the information will be edited successfully after approval.
You can link your Installer Admin account to a distributor via the Hik-Partner Pro Mobile Client to get support and help from the distributor. For details, see Hik-Partner Pro Mobile Client User Manual.
If you have completed company merging and your account still exists in more than one company, or if the companies in which your account exists are all kept on Hik-Partner Pro, you can click Switch Company on the top right of the page to switch to another company for using. For details, refer to Become a Hik-Partner Pro User After Product Upgrade .

Go to Company ^ Company Information or My Hik-Partner ^ Company Management ^ Company Information .

CS Note

If your company is an authenticated channel partner, the partner level will be displayed one the company logo.

Enter the name of your company.
Enter other information of your company, such as the address, GPS information, postal code, phone number, email, and user type.

C® Note

The country or region cannot be changed once you save the company information after registration.

Edit the VAT number of your company, which will be used for qualification verification.
Optional: If you want to upload the company logo, click + to upload the picture of your company logo, or click Edit to re-upload a picture to update the logo.

HO Note

The picture should be in JPG, JPEG, or PNG format.
Recommended picture size: Height = 200 px, 200 px < Width < 600 px.
You are not allowed to enable the Co-Branding function if you have not set the company logo. For details about Co-Branding, see Co-Branding .

Optional: Enter the website of your company.
Optional: Enter or edit the description information, which will be displayed on Hik-Connect Mobile Client.
Click Save to save the configurations.

OS Note

You can check the percentage of completed information after saving.

1. Authenticate Account

After you register an Installer Admin account, you can authenticate your account to purchase value-added services and use more features (besides the basic features) in Hik-Partner Pro.

One of the following ways for account authentication is supported, depending on the selected country or region when registering your account.

By Entering Authentication Code

For this way, you need to get the authentication code from the Hikvision or distributor first and then enter the authentication code to authenticate your account.

Go to Company ^ Company Information or My Hik-Partner ^ Company Management ^ Company Information , and click Authenticate Now to enter account authentication page.
(Optional) If you have no authentication code, click Get Authentication Code, and send the application email with the predefined content template, including your email address (the one which is used when registering your Installer Admin account) and company information, such as company ID, company name, and phone number, to Hikvision or distributor, and apply for one authentication code.

OS Note

You can click £ to edit the information in the template. The edited contents will be updated in the company information.
If the email server is not configured or the recipient’s address is not filled automatically, you can copy the content and send it to Hikvision or distributor by your own email box.

After you get the authentication code, enter the authentication code on account authentication page and click OK to authenticate your account.

•

By Submitting Online Application

For this way, you need to fill and submit the online application information to authenticate your account directly. After your application is approved, your account will be authenticated.

Note

If your company is not authenticated and you have the permission to submit the authentication application, you may be prompted and guided to authenticate your company by submitting the application after login.

Enter Company ^ Company Information or My Hik-Partner ^ Company Management ^

Company Information page, and click Authenticate Now to enter account authentication page.

(Optional) Edit the company information, such as company name, address, and city if needed.
Select your identity type from the drop-down list.
Enter the VAT Number of your company.
Click + to upload a picture (e.g., business card) as evidence.
Enter the distributor if you have bought Hikvision products.
Click Authenticate Now.

The application information will be sent.

CIS Note

After your application is approved, you will be notified via push notification and email.
If your country/region is in Australia (continent), you should also enter your security license number and contact name.
1. Manage Role and Permission

Before adding an employee to the system, you can create different roles with different permissions for accessing system resources and then assign roles to corresponding employees to grant the permissions to them. Or you can give a predefined role to an employee without creating one. An employee can have only one role.

Steps

OS Note

For the countries or regions only with support for free functions, or for authenticated channel partners, managing role and permission is not supported. For details about free functions and these countries and regions, see Regions Only with Support for Free Functions .
There are three predefined roles in the system: Administrator, Site Manager, and IT Manager.

The permissions of the three roles are as follows. The three roles cannot be deleted by anyone.

° Administrator: Setting company information, managing employees, checking operation logs of all the employees, and managing all the sites.

° Site Manager: Managing assigned sites, adding, configuring, and deleting devices, and enabling valued services for end users of assigned sites.

° IT Manager: Managing all the sites, assigning sites to other employees, enabling or editing valued service for all the end users, and viewing operation logs of all the employees.

Click Company ^ Role and Permission or My Hik-Partner ^ Company Management ^ Role and Permission to display all the roles.
Add a role.
Click Add Role to open the Add Role panel.
Enter the role name and select permission(s) for the role.

Manage All Sites

Managing all sites, including adding and editing site, assigning site to Site Manager, handing over sites, applying for site authorization, searching sites, managing devices in the site (adding, deleting, editing, upgrading), applying for device permission, and health monitoring. Up to 100 employees can be assigned with this permission.

Manage Assigned Site

Managing site(s) assigned to the employee, including editing site, handing over sites, applying for site information management permission, adding existing site, adding a new site, managing devices in the site (adding, deleting, editing, and upgrading), and deleting site.

US Note

You need to give an employee this permission before assigning the employee a site.

Manage Account and Role

Accessing Employee and Role and Permission page, adding and deleting accounts and roles. Employee and Role and Permission page will not show without this permission.

Manage Company Information

Accessing company information page and edit company information (e.g. name, logo, addresses, etc.). Company information page will not show without this permission.

Manage Service Package and Order

Viewing orders, purchasing service packages such as health monitoring packages and employee packages.

Optional: Enter remarks of the role in the Description field.
Click OK.
Optional: Check added roles and click Delete to delete the selected role(s).

C0 Note

You cannot delete a role which has been assigned to an employee.

5 Invite Employee

Installer Admin and Installer with the role permission for managing account and role can invite employees to manage resources in the system.

Steps

OS Note

For countries or regions only with support for free functions, or for authenticated channel partners, inviting employee is not supported. For details about these countries, see Regions Only with Support for Free Functions .

Open the Add Employee pane.

Click Company ^ Employee ^ Add Employee or My Hik-Partner ^ Company Management ^ Employee ^ Add Employee .
On the Home page, click Company ^ Role and Permission or My Hik-Partner ^ Company Management ^ Role and Permission , and then click Add Employee in the Operation column.

Enter the email of the to-be-invited employee.
Select a role for the employee.

CIS Note

You can also create a new role. For details, refer to Manage Role and Permission .

The permissions of the role will be displayed.

Click Add.

The invited employee will receive an email delivering a link in the entered email box. The employee needs to click the link to register an account, after which the employee’s information will be displayed in the employee list.

C® Note

If you invite the employee via your OneHikID account, and if the Hik-ProConnect account of the to-be-invited employee has not been upgraded to the OneHikID account, the to-be-invited employee needs to upgrade the account according to the instructions on the interface.

Optional: Perform the following operations after adding employees.

Enable/Disable Employee	Set the switch to on or off in the Enable column to enable or disable the employee account.
	Hl] Note Once disabled, the employee cannot log in to the platform via this account. You cannot disable your own account and the Installer Admin account.
Delete	Check one or more employees and click Delete to delete the selected
Employees	employee(s) if needed.

‘Note

You cannot delete your own account, the Installer Admin account, and the Site Manager account.
If the employee has not merged account data or become a Hik-Partner Pro user, you cannot delete their account. Refer to Become a Hik-Partner Pro User After Product Upgrade for details.

View

Employee

Details

Click an employee to open the Employee Details pane to view the employee’s contact number, email address, role permissions, and so on.

Edit Role Assigned to Employee

Click an employee to open the Employee Details pane and click £ in the Role field to enter the Edit Role pane. Then you can click Add to add a new role or select another role for the employee. %

‘Note

You cannot edit roles assigned to your own account and the Installer Admin account.

View Sites

Managed by

Employee

Click an employee to open the Employee Details pane or click the information in the Managed column to view the list of all sites managed by the employee. You can click a site to view the site details.

Hl® Note

The above operation is supported only when the employee has site(s) to be managed.

1. Accept Invitation and Register Installer Account

The Installer Admin, and Installer whose role contains permission of Manage Account and Role can invite other employees to register Installer accounts. The employees can accept the invitation and register Installer accounts to manage sites and devices.

Before You Start

Installer Admin and Installer whose role contains permission of Manage Account and Role should first invite the employee first. For details, refer to Invite Employee .

Steps

After inviting the employee, the employee will receive an email from Hik-Partner Pro.
Click the button or the link in the email.
Click Register to open the Create Account page.

‘Note

If you have already registered a OneHikID account using your email address, you can log in with the account to join the company directly.

Set the type, name, verification code (for verifying the email address), and password.

C® Note

Check By clicking Register, I agree to Hikvision OneHikID’s Privacy Policy.
Click Register.

Result

You can log into Hik-Partner Pro with this account and perform other operations such as site management and configuration.

1. Set Account Information

After login, you can edit the basic information of the current account and change password if necessary.

Click the name at the upper-right corner and select Account Settings or click My Hik-Partner ^ Account Information ^ My Profile .

Set Basic Information

Set the basic information of the current account, including the name of the Installer, email address,

phone number, etc.

Click

to set the profile of the current account.

Note

You can view your HIK ID on this page, but you cannot edit it.

Manage My QR Code

Hover over to show My QR Code, which your customers can scan to add you as the service provider and authorize you to manage devices.

If you have uploaded your company logo, your company logo will be displayed in the center of the QR code. Or you can click Add Your Company Logo to the QR Code to upload your company logo. Click to download the QR code.

Change Password

Change the password of the current account.

OS Note

If your account has been upgraded to OneHikID account, the page for changing the password of your OneHikID account will be displayed. You can follow the instructions to finish change the password.

‘Note

Change Account’s Bound Email

You can change the bound email address of the current account to another one if required.

In the Basic Information page of the account settings, click .

OS Note

If the current bound account has been upgraded to OneHikID account, the page for editing OneHikID account information will be displayed. You can follow the instructions to change the email.

Enter a new email address in the New Email field.
Click Get Verification Code.

In the new email address, you will receive an email with a verification code.

Enter the received verification code in the Verification Code field.
Enter the password of the current account.
Click Save.

Delete Installer Admin Account

For Installer Admin, if the account is no longer used, you can delete it in the Basic Information page of the account settings.

CIS Note

Deleting Installer Admin account is irreversible. The company information and accounts CANNOT be restored once deleted. Back up the required data before deleting the account.
If there are authorized site(s) or employee account(s) under the current account, you cannot delete it.
If the current bound account has been upgraded to OneHikID account, the login page for OneHikID account will be displayed. You can follow the instructions to delete the account.

In the Basic Information page of the account settings, click Delete Installer Admin Account.
Enter the password of your Installer Admin account, and click Next.
Click Delete Installer Admin Account to confirm deleting.
1. View Employee Efficiency Statistics

You can view the efficiency statistics of all employees, including the latest active time, added sites, added devices, handed-over sites, handed-over devices, and handled device exceptions. You can also perform operations such as exporting the efficiency statistics.

OS Note

This is supported only if you have permissions to manage the employees.

You can enter the Employee Efficiency Statistics page via the following methods:

Go to Company ^ Employee Efficiency Statistics or My Hik-Partner ^ Company Management ^ Employee Efficiency Statistics .
Click View All in the Employee Efficiency Overview section.

Figure 2-2 Employee Efficiency Statistics Page

You can perform the following operations if needed.

Table 2-1 Supported Operations

Operation

Description

View Operation Logs of an Employee

OS Note

This is not supported when your company is an authenticated channel partner.

Click Details in the Operation column to switch to the Operation Log page to view the operation logs of the corresponding employee.

Filter Statistics

Click v to filter the efficiency statistics by time period (i.e., today, yesterday, this week, last 7 days, last 30 days, or custom time period).

Operation	Description
Search for Statistics	Enter the employee’s name, email address, or phone number in the search box to search for statistics.
Export Statistics	Click Export to export statistics in XLSX or CSV format.

1. Manage My Shipping Address

You can add, edit, and delete your shipping addresses, and set the default shipping address.

Note

The function is only supported in certain countries and regions.

Go to My Hik-Partner ^ Company Management ^ My Address .

You can view and manage all your added shipping addresses if any, or you can add new shipping addresses if you haven’t added any shipping address. Perform the following operations if needed.

Table 2-2 Supported Operations

Operation	Description
Add New Shipping Address	Click New Address, fill in all required information (contact person, country/state, address, postal code, etc.), check Set this address as default if you are to set it as the default shipping address, and click Save.
Edit Shipping Address	Click z to edit the corresponding shipping address.
Delete Shipping Address	Click ® to delete the corresponding shipping address.
Set Default Shipping Address	Click Set as Default to set the corresponding shipping address as default.

1. View My Partner Network

You can view and export the basic information about your partners.

‘Note

This function is only available to some users in some countries/regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.

Go to My Hik-Partner ^ Company Management ^ My Partner Network to enter the My Partner Network page.

You will be able to view the partner No., partner name, partner type, partner level, VAT No., address, website, etc.

You can also click Export to export the information.

1. View Dashboard

You can have an overview of the status of all your projects and orders, and view the number of your DPPs/distributors.

C0 Note

This function is only available to some users in some countries/regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.

Go to My Hik-Partner ^ Dashboard to enter the Dashboard page.

You can view the number of your DPPs/distributors. Click to switch to My Partner Network to view details about your DPPs/distributors. Refer to View My Partner Network .

You can view the status of your projects, including draft, waiting for supporter, processing, approved, more information required, ineligible, closed won, closed lost, and closed canceled. Click View Details to switch to Project History for more details and operations. Refer to Project .

You can view the status of your orders, including in review, undelivered, fully delivered, and back order. Click View Details to switch to My Order for more details and operations. Refer to View My Orders .

After logging in by an Installer Admin account or Installer account, you can manage resources (including sites, devices, and roles, etc.) and perform health monitoring and so on.

Before You Start

Make sure you have registered an account. See Register an Installer Admin Account or Accept Invitation and Register Installer Account for details about registration.

Steps

In the address bar of the web browser, enter https://www.hik-partner.com .

OS Note

For Russia, you can enter https://www.hik-partnerru.com in the address bar of the web browser.

The login page of Hik-Partner Pro will show.

Select a country or region where the account locates and a language from the drop-down lists at the top of the page.
Click Log In by OneHikID (Hik-ePartner) Account / Log In by OneHikID Account or Hik- ProConnect on the login page.

C® Note

The display of “OneHikID” or “OneHikID (Hik-ePartner)” on the login page is determined by the country or region where you locate.
The login method available is determined by the country and the region of your account. If you select OneHikID as the login method, and your Hik-ProConnect account has not been upgraded to the OneHikID account, you need to upgrade your account according to the instructions on the interface.
If your Hik-ProConnect account has been upgraded to the OneHikID account, logging in to the platform by the Hik-ProConnect account is not supported.

Enter the registered email and password.

nS Note

If you have registered for Hik-ePartner with a phone No., you can also enter the registered phone No. and password.

Optional: Reset the password if you have forgotten the password.
Click Forgot Password to enter the resetting password page.
Click Get Verification Code.

You will receive a verification code sent by the Portal in your email box.

Enter the received verification code in the Verification Code field.
Enter the new password and confirm password.

Note

Click OK.

By default, you will be required to log in by the new password.

Click Sign In or Login.

C0 Note

If you have completed company merging and your account still exists in more than one company, or if the companies in which your account exists are all kept on Hik-Partner Pro, you need to select one company for login. You can also click Switch Company on the Company Information page to switch to another company. For details, refer to Become a Hik-Partner Pro User After Product Upgrade .

Become a Hik-Partner Pro User After
Product Upgrade

Hik-Partner Pro is upgraded from Hik-ProConnect, combining the features of Hik-ProConnect and another product named Hik-ePartner, so it provides services which are more diverse and more professional. If you have already registered for Hik-ProConnect and/or Hik-ePartner before the product upgrade, you can log in to Hik-Partner Pro using the existing account to become a Hik- Partner Pro user.

When you log in to Hik-Partner Pro for the first time using the existing account of Hik-ProConnect and/or Hik-ePartner, a window will pop up to notify you of the product upgrade.

Figure 4-1 Product Upgrade

After you check I would like to receive newsletters about new product introduction, service introduction, and questionnaires from Hikvision. I understand that I can unsubscribe at any time. (which is optional) and I have read and agree to Terms of Service and Privacy Policy., and click Enter, you become a Hik-Partner Pro user and can continue to use Hik-Partner Pro.

C® Note

In some countries/regions, the above-mentioned window will not pop up.
If your existing account is an Admin account of Hik-ePartner, after you become a Hik-Partner Pro user, the employee account add-on will be given as a gift to you which can cover the existing employee accounts in your company and is valid for one year.
In some countries/regions, the authenticated channel partners can complete the process of becoming a Hik-Partner Pro user offline.

Refer to the following sections for more details.

Situations Where You Enter the Home Page Directly After You Click Enter
Other Situations
After First-Time Login

Situations Where You Enter the Home Page Directly After You Click Enter

Your account only exists in Hik-ProConnect.
Your account exists in both Hik-ProConnect and Hik-ePartner, and is the Installer Admin / Admin account in both companies on Hik-ProConnect and Hik-ePartner, which means the two companies can be merged into one company, and the data (devices, employees, etc.) of both companies can also be merged and not lost. Moreover, the information about the two companies are the same so that you don’t need to select the company information to be kept, or only one of the two companies is authenticated so that the information of the authenticated company will automatically be kept.
Your account only exists in Hik-ePartner. And your account is the Admin account, or is an employee account but the Admin user has completed company merging.

Other Situations

Your account exists in both Hik-ProConnect and Hik-ePartner, and is the Installer Admin / Admin account in both companies on Hik-ProConnect and Hik-ePartner, which means the two companies can be merged into one company, and the data (devices, employees, etc.) of both companies can also be merged and not lost. Moreover, the information about the two companies are the different, and both companies are authenticated / not authenticated. You have to select the company information you would like to keep after you click Enter.
Your account exists in both Hik-ProConnect and Hik-ePartner. The Installer Admin / Admin accounts of the two companies are different, so company merging is not supported, which means both companies are kept for you on Hik-Partner Pro. You have to select one for login after you click Enter.
Your account exists in both Hik-ProConnect and Hik-ePartner, and your account is an employee account in Hik-ePartner. You can log in to the company created on Hik-ePartner only after the Admin user completes merging companies. Or you can continue to log in to your company created on Hik-ProConnect for using.
Your account only exists in Hik-ePartner and is an employee account. Moreover, the Admin user has not completed company merging. You can log in to use Hik-Partner Pro only after the Admin user completes merging companies.
Your account exists in both Hik-ProConnect and Hik-ePartner. And your account exists in more than one company on Hik-ePartner. You have to select one from the companies on Hik-ePartner for company merging. You should also select the company information you would like to keep if needed.

After First-Time Login

You can also click Switch Company on the Company Information page to switch to another company.

Chapter 5 Hik-Partner Pro Portal Overview

Hik-Partner Pro Portal is a B/S portal of Hik-Partner Pro platform. The service providers (e.g., installation company) can register an Installer Admin account on Hik-Partner Pro, then the Installer Admin can invite employees to register Installer accounts. Each company has only one Installer Admin but can have multiple Installers.

After registration, the Installer Admin and Installers can log into the Hik-Partner Pro via the web browser and the Home page of the Hik-Partner Pro Portal will show.

5.1 Main Modules

The Hik-Partner Pro Portal is divided into several main modules. You can access these modules via tabs at the top.

Note

If the country or region where you locate does not support the Solution, Explore, Project, and Order & Promotion module, the Portal layout of the current version is still the same as that of Hik- ProConnect in version 1.11.0. For details, refer to the corresponding user manual.

Table 5-1 Main Modules of Hik-Partner Pro Portal

Module	Description
Home	On the Home page, you can view the banners showing the key features, functions, and important information of Hik-Partner Pro, check the number of added sites and devices, have an overview and get the introductions of the projects, value-added services, order & promotion, or explore modules, and quickly access some pages such as the site adding page, device adding page, and products page. Refer to *Home* *Page* for details.
Hik-ProConnect	The module provides entries for main functions including dashboard overview, batch configuration of devices, customer site and HikCentral Connect system management, health monitoring, notification center, service market, tools, and tutorial center. Refer to *Hik-ProConnect* *Module* for details.
Solution	The module provides all-around solutions for varied needs from Hik- Partner Pro users. These solutions are designed to provide comprehensive and end-to-end capabilities for diverse service providers, which can empower them to explore new business opportunities, optimize operations, and get a winning edge in the competition.

Module

Description

You can perform the following operations in the Solution module.

View solutions listed for a variety of verticals.
Filter solutions of a vertical by tags of its sub verticals.
Display solutions in groups by different types, namely solutions by industry, by scenario, and by function.
Search for solutions keyword.
Sort the solutions in ascending/descending order by release date and/or number of views.
Add a solution to Favorites and view only those added to Favorites by checking My Favorites.
View the solution description and BOQ (Bill Of Quotation), and download the related documents.
Like solutions and share solutions you interested by sending the links to other persons.

DU Note

This function is only available to some users in some countries/regions.

For details, please contact Hikvision.

Explore

The module collects introductions, videos, pictures, and news about the latest Hikvision products and solutions. Service providers can easily keep up with the trend here, without having to find the latest news on other websites, and they can also forward the interested materials to their customers.

News

You can get the latest news and information about Hikvision products and solutions, including videos, pictures, and articles, which are categorized by product type for easy searching and quick sharing with your customers.

How To

If you have troubles with product installation or software setup, you can view both documentation and videos in How To for guiding you through solving all kinds of problems you encounter when using Hikvision products and services.

Notice

You can view notices announced by the Hik-Partner Pro team to know some important information about the product, such as updates in the current version.

Module	Description
	The Notice window will automatically pop up once you logged in to the Hik-Partner Pro Portal. If you check Do Not Show Again before closing the window, it will not pop up for your next time login. Activity You can get the information about activities, such as lucky draws and promotions, initiated by the Hik-Partner Pro team and participate in them. Events You can view the upcoming and past events, such as training, seminar, exhibition, and roadshow, initiated by the Hik-Partner Pro team and participate in the upcoming events. DU Note For News and How To, you can search for them by keyword and product type, like or comment them, and add them to the Favorites. And you can go to My Hik-Partner ^ Account Information ^ My Comment / My Favorites to view your historical comments or Favorites. This function is only available in certain countries/regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.
Project	This module provides the support (e.g., trainings, consultations, and learning materials) and pricing for the authenticated channel partners who have new projects to help them better complete their projects. For how to register a project, refer to *Project* . CE Note This function is only available to some users in some countries/regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.
Order & Promotion	This module supports viewing the information about hot products or a certain type of products. Authenticated channel partners can search for or filter the products, download the related documents, share the product information with others, compare parameters/specifications of products to learn about their similarities and differences, and submit orders to purchase products. For details, refer to *Order & Promotion* .

Module	Description
	C®Note This function is only available to authenticated channel partners. For details, please contact Hikvision.
Incentive	This module provides a reward point system to reward your trust and support. You can complete specific tasks to get the reward points redeemable for lots of gifts in the Rewards Store. For details, refer to *Rewards Store* .
Support	This module is available to you in many helpful formats. Wherever you are, whenever you need it, we have resources ready. Whether you are installing hardware or have questions about our services, our online support, documentation, and knowledgeable representatives are only a mouse-click away. Tutorial Center You can view video tutorials and documents in the Tutorial Center to learn more product information and the proper ways to use our products. Chatbot If you have any question about Hik-Partner Pro, you can try finding the answer here. Case If you have any issues when using Hik-Partner Pro, you can get professional services from our technical support via Case. For details, refer to *Case* . Feedback If you encounter any problems while using the product or if you have any functional needs or suggestions, please feel free to contact us via Feedback. After opening the feedback window, you can select a type for your feedback and then enter your suggestions in the pop-up window and attach a picture if necessary. Enter an email address. After we receive your feedback, we will send an email to this address if we get an conclusion. Click Submit to submit your feedback to us. Contact Us

Module

Description

You can get the contacts (i.e., address, phone, and email) of our headquarter and the local office, and the email address of your sales representative.

RMA (Return Material Application) / Serial Number Inquiry

The RMA is an arrangement in which you can ship an item back for an exchange or repair due to a product defect or malfunction. For the detailed process, refer to Return Materials Authorization .

After you submit RMA requests, you can search for requests by the device serial No. to view the request status.

CS Note

This function is only available to some users in some countries/ regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.

My Hik-Partner

This module deals with all the management and administration aspects of a single installation company. It contains the following five parts: Company Management

Company Information

View and manage the company information. See Manage Company Information for details.

Employee

Each company has only one Installer Admin but can have multiple Installers. The Installer Admin can invite the company’s employees to register Installer accounts and assign different permissions to employees according to actual needs. Installer whose role contains permission of Manage Account and Role can also invite other employees to be Installers by registering Installer accounts. See Invite Employee for details.

Employee Efficiency Statistics

Shows the efficiency statistics of all employees, including the latest active time, added sites, added devices, handed-over sites, handed-over devices, and handled device exceptions. See View Employee Efficiency Statistics for details.

Role and Permission

A role defines one employee’s rights to the functions in the system. After creating a role and specifying the role’s permission,

Module

Description

you can assign it to the employees according to actual needs. See Manage Role and Permission for details.

Operation Log

View the operation logs of your accounts and sites in the current company. See Search Operation Log for details.

Co-Branding

Enable to display the company logo on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client for brand promotion to the end users. For details about how to get the co-branding service for free and enable the service, refer to Co-Branding .

My Address

Manage your shipping addresses for receiving items (e.g., gifts, repaired devices). See Manage My Shipping Address for details.

DU Note

This function is only available in certain countries/regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.

Verify Gifts

Distributors verify the gifts redeemed offline and export the records.

My Partner Network

You can view and export basic information about your partner. For details, refer to View My Partner Network .

OXlNote

This function is only available to some users in some countries/ regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.

Account Information

My Profile

Edit your account information, including profile photo, name, email address, password, and phone number. Refer to Set Account Information for details.

My Favorites / My Comments

View your historical comments to news and how-to articles, and view the news, how-to articles, and solutions that are added to your Favorites.

Module

Description

My Order

View your order details, invoices, the balance of your e-wallet, financial reports, stock lists, price lists, and so on. For details, refer to View My Orders .

OX] Note

This function is only available to authenticated channel partners. For details, please contact Hikvision.

Rebate

For authenticated channel partners to view the rebates they earn from successfully promoting services of Hik-Partner Pro to their customers. See Rebate for details.

CE Note

This function is only available to some users in some countries/ regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.

My Dashboard

Have an overview of the status of all your projects and orders, and view the number of your DPPs/distributors. For details, refer to View Dashboard .

ÜİİNote

This function is only available to some users in some countries/ regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.

- 1. Home Page

Figure 5-1 Home Page

Table 5-2 Home Page Description

Name	Introduction
Banner	There are some banners, showing the key features, functions, and important information of Hik-Partner Pro.
Company, Site, Device, and HikCentral Connect Overview	You can view your company logo and name, the partner level (for authenticated channel partners), the total number of sites, devices, and HikCentral Connect systems managed by you. Click Add Site to add a new site. For details, refer to *Add New Site* . Click Add Device to add a device. For details, refer to *Add Device* . Click Add HikCentral Connect to add a HikCentral Connect system. For details, refer to *Create HCCSystems* . iNote The HikCentral Connect service is only available in certain countries or regions.
Project Overview	Click Project Registration to view the features about the Project module. You can click Register a New Projects to go to the Project page and create a project. For details, refer to *Create a Project*

Name	Introduction
	CSNote This function is only available to some users in some countries/ regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.
Value-Added Services Overview	Click Value-Added Services to view the value-added services you have purchased or obtained. You can click More to enter the Service Market page to purchase more services.
Rewards Store Overview	You can view the available gifts for redeeming, and redeem your reward points for gifts. Click View More to enter the Rewards Store page and perform more operations. For details, refer to *Rewards Store* .
Trending Products Overview	You can click / Q view the information about the hot products. Click View More to enter the Order & Promotion module and perform more operations, such as submitting an order, comparing products, and so on. For details, refer to *Order & Promotion* . OXlNote This function is only available to authenticated channel partners. For details, please contact Hikvision.
Explore Overview	You can view the hot news and how-to articles to keep up yourself with the trend. Click More to enter the news or how-to details page.
Solution Overview	You can switch to view some basic information about hot solutions. Click More to enter the Solution page to search for and view more solutions. C@Note This function is only available to some users in some countries/ regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.

- 1. Hik-ProConnect Module

The Hik-ProConnect module is divided into several sections. You can access these sections via the navigation pane on the left.

Uil Note

You can click =■ or ~ to pin or unpin the navigation pane on the left of the page.

Figure 5-2 Hik-ProConnect Module

Table 5-3 Hik-ProConnect Module Description

Name

Introduction

Dashboard

Global Search

Click the search box to show a search panel, select All, Site, or Device and enter a site name, device name, or device serial No. to search for sites or devices added to the Hik-ProConnect module.

| Site Name / Device Name / Device Serial No.

Search History [nJ

new site

Recently Visited Sites Nt ..

Figure 5-3 Global Search Panel

The search results will be listed in two columns named by Site and Device. You can view the site information (including the site owner, phone number and address of the site owner, site type, and site manager) and the device information (including device name, device type, device serial No., online status, and health monitoring status).

Name

Introduction

You can also click a result item to enter the corresponding site or device details page.

The search history will be displayed on the search panel, and you can click a historical keyword to search again or clear the search history.

The recently visited sites will also be displayed on the search panel and below the search box, and you can click a site name to enter the site details page.

Number of Sites / Devices / HCC Systems Overview

You can view the total number of sites / devices /HCC systems added to Hik-Partner Pro and the number of abnormal devices.

You can also click Add New Site / Add Device / Add to enter the corresponding page to add sites / devices / HCC systems. For details, refer to Add New Site / Add Device / Create HCC Systems .

CS Note

The HikCentral Connect service is only available in certain countries or regions.

Employee Efficiency Overview

You can view the efficiency statistics of all employees, including the numbers of added sites and handed-over sites, the numbers of added devices and handed-over devices, the number of device exceptions, the exception handing rate, and the numbers of handled and to be handled exceptions.

You can also filter statistics data by this month, this week, and today, or click Refresh to display the latest statistics data.

If you want to view more data, click View All to enter the Employee Efficiency Statistics page. For details, refer to View Employee Efficiency Statistics .

CS Note

This is only supported only if you have permissions to manage the employees.

Device Status Overview

You can view the number of abnormal devices and total devices, including devices overall and each device type respectively.

Name

Introduction

diNote

You can click View All to enter the Health Status page to check the device health status details. For detailed instructions about Health Status, refer to View Status of Devices in All Sites and View Status of Devices in a Specific Site .

Exception Notification Overview

You can view the number of not handled and to be checked exceptions and numbers of top 5 types of the not handled exceptions.

You can click a number on a chart to enter the Exception Center page and the exceptions will be filtered correspondingly. For example, if you click the number on the Not Handled chart, the exceptions will be filtered by the status of Not Handled on the Exception Center page.

CHI Note

To receive exception notifications, you need to configure the recipient when setting the exception rule. For details, refer to Add Exception Rule .
The number of exceptions you view here may not be the same as that in Exception Center. You can click View All to enter the Exception Center page to check the received exceptions. For detailed instructions about Exception Center, refer to Exception Center .

Cloud Storage Solution

You can view the short introduction of cloud storage solution and click Learn More to view more details about the cloud storage.

Click Add Cloud Storage Device to enter the Add Device page and you can add cloud storage device to the platform for further application. For how to add devices by different methods, refer to Add Device .

More Value-Added Services

You can set related service (such as cloud storage service and temperature screening) for devices after adding them to sites.

Click Set on the upper right side, and select a site in the list to enter the site details page.

My Service Overview

Name

Introduction

You can have an overview of your services and manage the services.

Free Package (Adding Devices + Remote Configuration)

Display number of managed devices and devices that can be added.
Display the entrances for adding devices and synchronizing devices from Hik-Connect.

Co-Branding

Display the company logo when co-branding is enabled and the entrance for enabling the co-branding.

Health Monitoring Service

Display the numbers of used and available service packages and the entrance for activating the service.
Display the number of devices with expiring or expired service and the entrance for details, if there are devices with the service expiring within 30 days.
Display the numbers of device exception notifications and scheduled reports if there are devices using the health monitoring service.
Displaying the entrance for renewing/expanding.
Display the entrance for getting the free health monitoring packages (if any).
Display the entrances for enabling the device exception notifications and configuring the scheduled reports.

Cloud Storage Service

Display numbers of used and available service packages.
Display the number of devices with expiring or expired service and the entrance for details, if there are devices with the service expiring within 30 days.
Display the entrances for renewing/expanding and activating the service.

Employee Account Add-On

Display used and available employee accounts.
Display the expiry time when the service is expiring within 30 days and displaying the entrance for renewing the service
Display the entrances for inviting employees and managing employees.

Cloud Attendance Service

Name

Introduction

Display numbers of used and available service packages.
Display numbers of expiring and expired cloud attendance systems and the entrance for details.
Display the entrance for adding cloud attendance systems.

Alarm Receiving Center (ARC) Service

Display the status of your application for joining as ARC if your company has applied, and displaying the entrance for applying if your company has not applied or the application failed.
Display the number of companies added to the local ARC list and the name of last joined company.
Display the numbers of managed devices.
Display the entrance for viewing the local ARC list and searching for ARCs.
Display the entrance for configuring the ARC service.

C@Note

This section will be displayed only if your country/region supports the ARC service, and your company type is ARC or there are companies added to the local ARC list.

‘jNote

This feature is supported only if you have the permission to manage service packages and orders.
Only the services for which you have available service packages will be displayed on My Service Overview.

Case

The Case is a center for you to report any issues generated when using Hik-Partner Pro. And our technical support will receive your issues and help you resolve them as soon as possible.

Tutorial Center

You can view video tutorials and documents to learn more about Hik-Partner Pro and the proper ways of using the platform.

Click a video to open a webpage and start playing the video. Click View All to view all the videos in Tutorial Center.

Tools

You can use some online tools to improve your work efficiency.

Click Tools to view all the provided tools.

Name	Introduction
	Help View online documents including the Device Compatibility List, User Manual, Datasheet, and What’s New. Frequently Used Functions You can view the functions which you have used frequently. Click these icons to perform these functions quickly if needed.
Install & Configure	Provides four features for batch configuring devices. Batch configure online encoding devices on the same LAN with the Portal via custom templates. See *Batch Configure Devices on LAN* for details. Remotely batch configure AX PRO devices via custom templates. See *Batch Configure AX PRO* . Batch arm/disarm AX PRO devices on different sites. See *Batch Arm/* *Disarm AX PRO and AX HYBRID PRO* . Batch upgrade devices including security control panels, encoding devices, etc., on the same LAN. See *Batch Upgrade Devices on LAN* .
Site & HCC	Customer Site A site represents a physical location where devices are installed and through which the Installer Admin/Installer can manage the devices. Site Map If sites are configured with the GPS information, they can be displayed on the map for viewing the site details, such as the site name, site owner, site location, and number of online/offline/ abnormal devices. HikCentral Connect A system created by installers via the Hik-Partner Pro Portal for providing a Video Security as a Service (VSaaS) solution for enterprise users. For details, refer to the user manuals of HikCentral Connect. ‘iNote HikCentral Connect is only available in the certain countries or regions.
Health Monitoring	There are three parts in the Health Monitoring module: Health Status

Name	Introduction
	The Installer can view the devices overall, normal, and abnormal status, locate the abnormal devices, and perform troubleshooting quickly. Exception Center After setting the exception rules, when an exception occurs on the device, the device will push a notification to the Portal and you can view all the received notifications of exception in the Exception Center. Scheduled Report The platform can send the health check reports of encoding devices and AX PRO devices to target recipients regularly. Maintenance Quotation You can create quotation for providing the device maintenance service for your customers. Thus, you can standardize the service process, improve customer satisfaction, and expand your business.
Service	Service Market: Hik-Partner Pro provides value-added services and you can purchase these service packages or renew them. You can also view details of the free package. My Service: View all services you purchased and the details, such as free package and cloud storage service package. Order: View the order list and order details.
Tools	Hik-Partner Pro provides some online tools to improve your work efficiency.
Tutorial Center	View video tutorials and documents to learn more about Hik-Partner Pro and the proper way to use the platform.

5.2 Other Modules

Get Co-Branding for Free

Click <•> on the top right of the Portal to get the co-branding for free. See Co-Branding for details.

dlNote

The display of the icon <*> on the top right is not supported in all countries/regions.

My Points

For the first time login in a day, you can click Check In to Earn Point on the top of the Portal to check in and the reward points will be credited to your account.

And then you can view your total points and click My Point on the top of the Portal to enter the Rewards Store page and perform more operations, such as completing tasks to earn points, viewing point history, and redeeming points for gifts. For details, refer to Rewards Store .

Notification Center

Shows all the history business notifications (including device management invitations, site sharing notifications, and notifications about device installation work orders), notifications of device/ channel exceptions, new features of the system messages, and the latest deals and offers. For more details about the notification center, refer to Notification Center .

Language

Click the language area in the top right corner of the Portal and select a language from the dropdown list as you required.

Help

Click □ in the top right corner of the Portal to show a drop-down list.

User Manual

Provides an entrance for viewing the user manual of the Hik-Partner Pro Portal online.

Wizard

View a wizard which guides you through the process of configurations and operations.

Click Next or Previous to go through the introductions in the wizard. You can click the image on the right to view the large image and check the details on the image if necessary.

Click Skip to close the wizard.

Questionnaire

Provides an entrance for joining the survey to help us provide a better experience and service for you.

C®Note

This icon is displayed only when a survey has been initiated.

Chatbot

Provides an entrance for asking questions and getting answers.

After-Sales Authorization Code

Provides an entrance for you to view the after-sales authorization code of your company. The after-sales authorization code is exclusive to the technical support staff for troubleshooting only. You can give your authorization code to the staff when it is necessary to log in to your account for troubleshooting. The staff can log in to your account via the authorization code to view or edit the information about the company (name, type, etc.), manage sites, remotely devices (AX PRO, etc.), perform health monitoring, etc.

You can click Extend to extend the validity period for the current authorization code or click Invalidate Authorization Code to invalidate the code right away.

US Note

One company can only have one valid after-sales authorization code. If the code is invalidated or your company has no authorization code, you can choose to generate one.

Profile Photo and Account Name

In the upper-right corner of the Portal, click the account name or profile photo to open the dropdown list.

Account Settings and Upgrade Account

Provides an entrance for editing the basic information of the account or deleting the Installer Admin account if it is no longer used. For details, refer to Set Account Information .

When you logged in by the Hik-ProConnect account, you can select Upgrade Account in the dropdown list and click Register or click Login to register an OneHikID account or log in by an existing OneHikID account.

Subscribe to Newsletters

Provides an entrance for subscribing to newsletters. You can also unsubscribe here at any time.

After the unsubscription you will not receive any newsletter emails (such as new product introduction, service introduction, and questionnaires) from us.

Link with Hik-Connect Account

Provides an entrance for linking your Hik-Partner Pro or OneHikID account with multiple Hik- Connect account, so the devices managed in the Hik-Connect account can be synchronized to Hik- Partner Pro account or OneHikID account automatically. For details, refer to Synchronize Devices with Hik-Connect Account .

My QR Code

Provides an entrance for downloading your QR code, so your customers can scan via the Hik- Connect Mobile Client to add you as the service provider and authorize you to manage devices.

You can also go to My Hik-Partner ^ Account Information ^ My Profile page to view your QR code.

C0 Note

This feature is only supported by accounts with the Manage Assigned Sites permission.

Verify Gifts

Provides an entrance for distributors to verify the gifts redeemed offline and export the records.

About

View the version of the current system, and read the agreements, including terms of service, privacy policy, and open source license. Or scan the QR code with your mobile phone to download the Hik-Partner Pro Mobile Client.

Switch Company

Provides an entrance for switching companies for login if you have completed company merging and your account still exists in more than one company, or if the companies in which your account exists are all kept on Hik-Partner Pro.

Log Out

Log out of the current account and return to the login page.

Floating Tool Bar

p Shopping Cart

Provides an entrance for entering your shopping cart to view the added products. For details, refer to Create an Order .

C®Note

This function is only available to authenticated channel partners. For details, please contact Hikvision.

, Order Upload

Provides an entrance for quickly submitting orders by uploading information (material code, quantity, etc.) of products with a predefined template. For details, refer to Create an Order .

C® Note

This function is only available to authenticated channel partners. For details, please contact Hikvision.

vs Product Compare

Provides an entrance for comparing multiple products with their same specifications hidden, so you can quickly choose products as needed. For details, refer to Compare Products .

C® Note

This function is only available to some users in some countries/regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.

Chatbot / Feedback / Customer Feedback

Provides entrances for asking questions and getting answers, submitting your own suggestions or suggestions from your customers.

I Questionnaire

Provides an entrance for joining the survey to help us provide a better experience and service for you.

Note

This icon is displayed only when a survey has been initiated.

Chapter 6 Site Management

A site can be regarded as an area or location with actual time zone and address, such as your customers’ home, office, etc. You can create a site on Hik-Partner Pro to manage devices on it. Moreover, after you complete installing and setting up devices on a site, you can hand over the site and devices to your customer.

Read the following two sections to learn more about the key features related to site management.

Real Sites and Sites on Hik-Partner Pro
Typical Scenario of Handing Over Site

Real Sites and Sites on Hik-Partner Pro

The following diagram shows the relationship between the “real sites” and the “sites on Hik- Partner Pro”.

Figure 6-1 Manage Devices via “Site”

Typical Scenario of Handing Over Site

The following diagram shows a typical scenario related to device handover and authorization, as well as the overall process. For more information, see Hand Over Site .

In the diagram, HPP represents Hik-Partner Pro and HC represents Hik-Connect.

Figure 6-2 Scenario and Process

1. Site Page Overview

On the Site page, you can view the sites that are assigned to you (the Installer Admin as well as Installers with Manage All Sites permission can view all the sites of the company), and perform some operations for the sites, such as searching site, adding site, handing over site and assigning site.

Enter the Customer Site page.

Click the Hik-Partner Pro tab. On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your country or region).
Click on the number of sites or click Add Site on the Home page to enter the Customer Site page. Click the search box on the top right of the Customer Site page and click Site with Offline Device to display sites with offline devices.

Figure 6-3 Site Page

There are different status for the sites in site list.

Not Handed Over

The site is newly added, and you have not handed over site to the customer.

Not Registered

The handover has been sent to customer who has not registered a Hik-Connect account.

Not Accepted

The handover has been sent but not be accepted by customer who has registered a Hik-Connect account.

Handed Over, Not Authorized

The site is handed over to the customer, but the site is not authorized to the Installer.

Authorized and Monitoring

The Installer gets the authorization of the site from the customer.

OS Note

According to site status, the Installer Admin and Installers with related permissions can perform the following operations in the table below.

Table 6-1 Supported Operations in Different Status

Supported Operations	Not Handed Over	Not Accepted Not Registered	Handed Over, Not Authorized	Authorized and Monitoring
Search Site	V	V	V	V
Assign Site	V	V	V	V
Hand Over Site	V	V	x	x

Supported Operations	Not Handed Over	Not Accepted Not Registered	Handed Over, Not Authorized	Authorized and Monitoring
Manage Device	V	V	x	V
Edit Site	V	V	x	V
Delete Site	V	V	V	V
Apply for Authorization	x	x	V	x
Share Site	x	x	x	V

Note

See Add Device for details about how to add devices to the site.
See Synchronize Devices with Hik-Connect Account for details about how to synchronize devices with Hik-Connect account.
1. Add New Site

When the end user wants the installation company to provide installing service or the installation company assigns the employee for device installation of specified end user, the Installer Admin or Installer with related permission needs to create a new site for managing these devices of end user.

Before You Start

Make sure you have the permission of adding a new site.

Steps

Enter the Customer Site page.

Click the Hik-Partner Pro tab. On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your country or region).
Click on the number of sites or click Add Site on the Home page to enter the Customer Site page.

Click Add New Site ^ New Site .

dlNote

If an existing site of end user is not authorized to any installation company, you can select Existing Site to add the existing site. For more details, refer to Add Existing Site .

Set the site name, time zone, scene, site address, city, and state/province/region.

‘Note

When setting the site address, you can click on the map to locate a place, or you can enter keywords in the search box to locate a place on the map.
You should select the correct time zone where the devices locate and the time zone cannot be changed after the site is added.
The Installer can select different configuration plans for the site and devices according to the selected scene.

Optional: Check Sync Time & Time Zone to Device to synchronize the time and time zone of the site to the devices added to the site.
Optional: Enter the end user information, such as contact number and maintenance records as the remark.

OS Note

The end user can view the remarks via Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

Click OK to add a new site to the list.
Optional: According to the site’s status and authorization, perform one of the following operations.

C® Note

For more details about supported operations in different site status, refer to Site Page Overview .

Search Site Enter keywords in search filed, and click Q to display the search results in the list.

View Site Details Edit Site	Click the site name to view the site details, including managed devices, site information, and so on. On the right side of the Site Details page, click to edit the site name, site address, city, state/province/region, remarks, and whether to check Sync Time & Time Zone to Device or not.
	CS Note When editing the site address, you can find and click the place on the map, or you can enter keywords in the search box to locate the place on the map.
Delete Site	Hover the cursor over on Operation column and click 0 to delete the site.
	□S Note If a site contains armed security control panel(s), it cannot be deleted.

Hand Over

Site

For the site in the status of Not Handed Over, click on Operation column on Site page or click Hand Over on Site Details page to hand over the site to an end user.

CUNote

For more details, refer to Hand Over Site .

Manage

Device

For the site in the status of Not Handed Over, Not Registered, Not Accepted, or Authorized and Monitoring, you can click the corresponding icon on Operation column or enter Site Details page to manage the devices, such as adding device to the site, upgrading device, deleting devices, applying for live view or configuration permission, adding linkage rule, adding exception rule, etc. For more details, refer to Device Management .

1. Add Existing Site

	If a security control panel is armed, it cannot be deleted unless being disarmed first.

Note

When a site is not assigned to a company or if a site was previously assigned to a company but was later released and is now not associated with a company, you can add it by applying for site authorization from the site owner.

Steps

Enter the Customer Site page.

Click the Hik-Partner Pro tab. On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your country or region).
Click on the number of sites or click Add Site on the Home page to enter the Customer Site page.

Click Add New Site and select Existing Site.

Figure 6-4 Add Existing Site

Enter the site ID provided.

[ULI Note

You can get the site ID form the site owner, who can view the site ID via Hik-Connect Mobile Client.
Please inform your end users to download or update the Hik-Connect Mobile Client (V 4.15.0 or later). You can send the QR code or download link shown in the banner on the Home page to them.

Optional: Enter the end user information, such as contact number and maintenance records as the remark.

Note

The end user can view the remarks via Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

Click OK.

The site will be added in the site list and the site owner will receive an application. After the site owner approves the application, the site will be authorized to the Installer.

1. Assign Site to Installer

The Installer Admin or the Installers with assigning site permission can assign a site to the specified Installer as site manager responsible for configurations of the devices in the site.

Before You Start

Make sure you have the permission of assigning site.

Steps

On the navigation pane, click Customer Site to enter Site page.
Select one or multiple sites for assignment.
Click Assign.
Select one or multiple Installers as the site manager(s) of the selected site(s).

OS Note

No more than 100 site managers can be assigned to each site.

Click OK.

The assigned site manager can enter site details and perform related operations, such as adding devices.

1. Hand Over Site

After the installation company completed the installation, the Installer needs to hand over the site to a customer. If required, the Installer can also apply for specified permissions for further device maintenance when handing over the site.

Before You Start

Make sure the site status is Not Handed Over and you have the permission of site management, such as managing all sites and assigned sites.

Steps

On the navigation pane, click Customer Site to enter the Site page.
Select a site to be handed over.

Select a site and click in the Operation column.
Click the site name to enter the Site Details page and click Hand Over Now.

You will enter the Hand Over Site page.

Optional: Check Allow Me to Disable Hik-Connect Service.

‘Note

If checked, after you hand over the site to your customer and your customer approves the request, you can disable the Hik-Connect service for devices that you rent to your customer without their authorization. If the Hik-Connect service is disabled, your customer will not be able to use these devices via the Hik-Connect Mobile Client for live view, playback, receiving alarms, etc. The tenant site scenario is a typical scenario to which this feature is applicable (see Typical Tenant Site Scenario for details).
You can go to the Device tab to disable the Hik-Connect service for one device or all devices in this site by clicking or setting the Hik-Connect Service switch to off. You can also delete the devices from the your customer’s Hik-Connect account without her/his authorization.

Optional: If you have checked Allow Me to Disable Hik-Connect Service in the previous step, check Grant Me Highest Configuration Permissions for Devices on Site to get the highest configuration permissions for devices on the current site which your customer cannot edit.
Select Email or Phone Number as handover mode.
Enter the site owner’s email address or phone number.
Optional: Select permissions to apply for.

S Note
You can set the validity period for the permissions of configuration, live view, and playback, and select the device(s).
If you have no permission for managing devices, or no devices are added to the site, you cannot select the permissions of configuration, live view, or playback when handing over the site.
If the following permissions are selected, when the customer accepts the handover, the permissions will be authorized to the installer. The installer does not need to apply for authorization from the site owner again.

Site Information Management

The permission to manage the site information.

Configuration

The permission to configure selected devices on the site.

Live View

The permission to stream the live video from the selected devices on the site.

Playback

The permission to play back videos of the selected devices on the site.

Optional: Check Apply for Activation of Cloud Attendance Service.

‘Note

If the check-box is checked, after you handed over the site to your customer, he/she will be able to use the cloud attendance system provided by Hikvision or third-party manufactures.
If the cloud attendance system provided by Hikvsion has been added to the site and activated, the check-box will appear on the Hand Over Site page.
If the attendance service is provided by a third-party manufacturer, the check-box will be Allow ### System to Access or Allow Third-Party Attendance System to Access. ### here refers to the name of the third-party manufacturer.

Optional: Check Apply for Site Authorization for Maintenance Service Partner to apply for site authorization for your maintenance service partner.

OU Note

For details, refer to Share a Site not Handed Over

Enter the remarks, such as the reason of the handover, which your customer can view when he/she receives the handover via the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.
Click OK to send the handover.

Your customer will receive the handover email or message in email box or via short message with a download link of the Hik-Connect Mobile Client. Your customer can download or open the Hik-Connect Mobile Client via the link.
If your customer has not registered a Hik-Connect account, he/she needs to register a Hik- Connect account first. After registering the account and accepting the handover via the Hik- Connect Mobile Client, the customer will become the site owner.

‘Note

Please inform your customers to download or update the Hik-Connect Mobile Client (V 4.15.0 or later). You can send the QR code or download link shown in the banner on the Home page to them.

If there are maintenance requirements for the devices added in the Hik-Connect Mobile Client, but not added and managed in the site, after the customer accepts the handover and becomes the site owner, he/she can authorize the permissions about these devices to the Installer.

Optional: Before your customer accepts the handover, click Hand Over Again to send handover again.

[2® Note

You can send the handover for at most five times in one day and the previous handover will be invalid if you send the new handover again.

1. Typical Tenant Site Scenario

In a typical tenant site scenario, you can help the property management company install and set up their security devices in their apartments, and help manage the devices so that the devices will be available for the tenants only during lease periods; as for the tenants, you can help them manage and configure the devices during lease periods.

To know more about the typical tenant site scenario, read the sections below:

Two Agreements Reached
Online Operations

Two Agreements Reached

Before you can hand over the devices in the apartment to the tenant via Hik-Partner Pro, the following two agreements have to be reached.

Figure 6-5 Agreement Reached Between the Property Management Company and Installer

Apartment A is available for rent. We have already installed some security devices in the apartment to guard the tenant and their property. During the lease period, you can use the HC App to use these devices for live view, playback, receiving alarms, etc.

Figure 6-6 Agreement Reached Between the Tenant and Property Management Company

Online Operations

After the two agreements are reached, you will operate on Hik-Partner Pro to hand over the devices to the tenant, of which the process is shown below:

Figure 6-7 Hand Over Devices to the Tenant

Create a site. Refer to Add New Site for more details.
Add the devices to the site.
Batch configure the devices. Refer to Batch Configure Devices on LAN or Batch Configure AX PRO for more details.
Hand over the site to the tenant. Refer to Hand Over Site for more details.

Hl] Note

You should request the tenant to allow you to disable the Hik-Connect service, and if the tenant does not approve the request, the devices will not be handed over.

The tenant accepts the handover on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client, which means the tenant also approves your request to allow you to disable the Hik-Connect service and approves your application for permissions (if any).
The devices are handed over to the tenant’s Hik-Connect account.
1. Apply for Site Authorization from Site Owner

When the Site (no permission selected when handing over site) has been handed over to Site Owner, and then there are maintenance requirements for the devices in the Site, the Installer needs to send an application to Site Owner for the authorization. After the authorization is approved, the Installer can get the permission to manage and configure the devices of the Site. Besides, the Site Owner can add a device on Hik-Connect Mobile Client and authorize it to the Installer for further management and configuration.

Steps

On the navigation pane, click Customer Site to enter the Site page.
Select a Site.
Enter Apply for Authorization page.

Select a Site and click on Operation column.
Click the Site name to enter Site Details page and click Apply for Authorization.

Enter the remarks and click OK to send the application.

The Site Owner will receive and handle the application via Hik-Connect Mobile Client. After the Site Owner approves the application, the Installer will have the authorization of the Site and perform some operations.

If there are maintenance requirements for the devices added in Hik-Connect Mobile Client, but not added and managed in the Site by the Installer yet, after consensus, the Site Owner can select the devices and authorize the permissions of the devices to the Installer.

CXlNote

Please inform your end users to download or update the Hik-Connect Mobile Client (V 4.15.0 or later). You can send the QR code to them.
For AX Pro, after adding an AX Pro to Hik-Partner Pro, the Installer and Installer Admin’s accounts will become the accounts of the AX Pro; these accounts will be deleted after the Installer deletes the AX Pro from Hik-Partner Pro. If you edit an Installer’s login password, the password for logging in to the AX Pro by this account will also change.
After authorizing a Site with AX Pro to an Installer, the Installer and Installer Admin’s accounts will become the accounts of the AX Pro; besides, the account with the permission of managing all Sites will also become the account of the AX Pro.
If an Installer hands over the Site with this AX Pro to an end user, the end user’s Hik-Connect account will also become an account of the AX Pro, while the Installer’s account will be deleted from the AX Pro. This is also applicable to an Installer Admin.
For more details about operations on Hik-Connect Mobile Client, refer to the User Manual of Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

Optional: Perform the following operations.

Apply for Device Click the Site name to enter Site Details page and apply for

Permission permissions.

Discard Authorization On the Site list page, click ^ & to discard authorization or the Site.

OU Note

For Sites with Allow Me to Disable Hik-Partner Pro Service function enabled when handing over to Installer, discarding authorization is not supported.

1. Accept a Device Management Invitation from a Hik-Connect User

You can accept a device management invitation from your customer (i.e., a Hik-Connect user) to manage a device already added to a Hik-Connect account. In this way, the device, along with its configuration and operation permissions, can be shared with you to allow you to manage the device on Hik-Partner Pro. Compared with synchronizing the device in Hik-Connect with the device in Hik-Partner Pro, which requires your customer to share their Hik-Connect account name and password with you, this way is more privacy-friendly and easier to be accepted.

To know more about the device management invitation, read the sections below:

Overall Process
Introduction About the Device Management Invitation on Hik-Partner Pro
The Email of Device Management Invitation
The Notification of Device Management Invitation
How Can Your Customer Invite You to Manage Their Device via Hik-Connect

Overall Process

If your customer (i.e., the Hik-Connect user) has already added one device to their Hik-Connect account, the customer can use the Hik-Connect Mobile Client to invite you to manage this device. Once the customer completes the invitation, an email containing the invitation information (e.g., the Hik-Connect user name and device name) and the button/link for accepting the invitation will be sent to you, and then you can accept the invitation.

Invitations for device management can also be accepted via Notification Center ^ Business Notification . Once you accept the invitation, the device will show on the specified site (namely, the site mentioned in the email or the notification) on Hik-Partner Pro.

Figure 6-8 Overall Process Diagram

Introduction About the Device Management Invitation on Hik-Partner Pro

You can go to the site list page, and then click Device Management Invitation from Customer to open the window shown below. This shows how your customer uses the Hik-Connect Mobile Client to invite you to manage their device. It should be noted that you need to provide your Hik- ProConnect account (email address) to your customer first to let them specify you as the Installer who manages their device.

Figure 6-9 The Pop-Up Window

The Email of Device Management Invitation

The email shows the invitation details including device name, device serial No., name of the site where the device(s) is added, Hik-Connect user account, and the time of invitation. If you agree to manage the device(s) for your customer, you need to accept the invitation in three days, otherwise the invitation will be invalid.

The Notification of Device Management Invitation

The notification shows the invitation details including name of the site where the device(s) is added, device name, device serial No., and the Hik-Connect user account. If you agree to manage the device(s) for your customer, you need to accept the invitation in three days, otherwise the invitation will be invalid.

Device Management Invitation

My!

Devices)

DS-

Site Own

yzpr

You should accept the invitation in 3 days if you agree to manage y our customer’s devices. Otherwise, the invitation will be invalid.
If you do not agree, you need not to perform any operation. The in vitation will be invalid in 3 days automatically.
If you agree, the site where the device is added will be displayed o n the Hik-Partner Pro Portal or Mobile Client, and you can view the device status and maintain the devices. Also, you can enter the site I ist page, and search for the site according to the site name or the us er s account name.

I Agree

Figure 6-10 Notification Example

How Can Your Customer Invite You to Manage Their Device via Hik-Connect

Refer to the following steps for details about how can your customer invite you to manage their device via the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

In the device list, tap «• of the device and the Share Device page will pop up. Or select More ^ Manage Sharing Settings ^ Share Device to show the Share Device page.

Figure 6-11 Share Device

LJilNote

If this page doesn’t show, it means the device cannot be managed by an installer and can only be shared with another Hik-Connect user.

Possible reasons: the device is shared from others; the device is already managed by an installer; the device is not enabled with the Hik-Connect service; or the Hik-Partner Pro service (installer service) is not available in your customer’s country or region.

Tap Share with Installer.
Tap New Installer and enter the installer’s account to share device permissions with a new installer; or select an existing installer.

OX Note

When entering a new installer’s account that has been linked with two or more companies, you should select a company to share device permissions with.

Figure 6-12 Select Installer

4. Select the Site where the device will be added and the device permissions to be granted to the installer.

\ Authorization

You can grant device authorization to the Installer. After authorization, your Installer will have the permissions that you select. You can deauthorize the device to revoke permissions from Installer at any time. If you have any questions, tap to get help.

Installer >

Site MySite ©

Permission

Live View ¿k

Validity Period: Permanent

Configuration

Validity Period: Permanent

Playback

Validity Period; Permanent

Figure 6-13 Authorization

6.9 Site Sharing

You can share sites with your maintenance service partners to allow them to cooperate with you in providing device management/maintenance services for your customers, especially in offering technical support. When sharing a site, you can determine the permissions for the MSP (maintenance service partner) to access devices on the site. After sharing a site, you can change the maintenance service partner’s permissions.

OS Note

If you change the maintenance service partner’s permissions, your customer will receive a notification about it on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

Read the following sections to learn the overall process and limitations of site sharing.

Share a Site not Handed Over
Share a Site that Has Been Handed Over
Limitations

Share a Site not Handed Over

The diagram below shows the overall process of sharing a site not handed over to your customer. For detailed steps, see Share a Site not Handed Over .

In the diagram, HPP represents Hik-Partner Pro, HC represents Hik-Connect, and MSP represents maintenance service partner.

Figure 6-14 Overall Process

Share a Site that Has Been Handed Over

The diagram below shows the overall process of sharing a site that has been handed over to your customer. For detailed steps, see Share a Site that Has Been Handed Over .

Figure 6-15 Overall Process

Limitations

Site sharing is not supported in every country or region.
You can only share a site with your maintenance service partner’s Installer Admin account.
Your account and your maintenance service partner’s Installer Admin account need to be in the same country/region.
You cannot share a site with any Installer of your company.
.9.1 Share a Site not Handed Over

For a site that has not been handed over, you can apply for site authorization and select permissions for the maintenance service partner at the same time when you hand over the site, in order to share the site with your maintenance service partner for managing and maintaining the site together.

Before You Start

Make sure the site status is Not Handed Over and you have the permission to manage all sites or assigned sites.

Steps

OS Note

The maintenance service partner’s Hik-Partner Pro account should be an Installer Admin account, of which the country/region should be the same as that of your account.
You cannot share the site with the account of any employee in your company.

Enter the Hand Over Site page. Refer to Hand Over Site for details.
In the Site Sharing section, check Apply for Site Authorization for Maintenance Service Partner.
Enter the maintenance service partner’s Hik-Partner Pro account.

CIS Note

If the account has been linked with two or more companies, you should select a company to share device permissions with.

Select permissions for the maintenance service partner.

C® Note

You can set the validity period for the permissions of configuration, live view, and playback, and select the device(s).
If you have no permission to manage devices, or no devices are added to the site, you cannot select the permissions of configuration, live view, and playback when handing over the site.
If the following permissions are selected, when your customer accepts the handover and the maintenance service partner accepts site sharing, the permissions will be authorized to the maintenance service partner.

Site Information Management

The permission to manage the site information.

Configuration

The permission to configure selected devices on the site.

Live View

The permission to stream the live video from the selected devices on the site.

Playback

The permission to play back videos of the selected devices on the site.

Configure other settings on the Hand Over Site page. Refer to Hand Over Site for details.
Click OK.
Optional: After your customer accepts the handover and the maintenance service partner accepts the site sharing, perform the operations below.

You can view the status and email address of the Maintenance Service Partner on the site details page.

View Information

About the Maintenance

Service Partner

Cancel Site Sharing

You can cancel site sharing on the Site Sharing page.

You can change permissions for the maintenance service partner on the Site Sharing page.

Change Permissions for the Maintenance

Service Partner

DU Note

You can only change the permissions that have already been granted to the maintenance service partner by your customer, and your customer will receive a notification on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client if the permissions are changed.

6.9.2 Share a Site that Has Been Handed Over

After a site is handed over, you can share the site with your maintenance service partner for managing and maintaining the site together.

Before You Start

Make sure the site status is Authorized and Monitoring and you have the permission to manage all sites or assigned sites.

Steps

CUlNote

The maintenance service partner’s Hik-Partner Pro account should be an Installer Admin account, of which the country/region should be the same as that of your account.
You cannot share the site with the account of any employee in your company.

On the navigation pane, click Customer Site to enter the Site page.
Select a site for site sharing.
Enter the Site Sharing page.

Move the cursor to in the Operation column and click ■=< .
Click the site name to enter the site details page and click Site Sharing.

Enter the maintenance service partner’s Hik-Partner Pro account.

CE Note

If the account has been linked with two or more companies, you should select a company to share device permissions with.

Select permissions for the maintenance service partner.

il Note

You can set the validity period for the permissions of configuration, live view, and playback, and select the device(s).
If you have no permission to manage devices, or no devices are added to the site, you cannot select the permissions of configuration, live view, and playback when handing over the site.
If the following permissions are selected, when your customer accepts the handover and the maintenance service partner accepts site sharing, the permissions will be authorized to the maintenance service partner.

Site Information Management

The permission to manage the site information.

Configuration

The permission to configure selected devices on the site.

Live View

The permission to stream the live video from the selected devices on the site.

Playback

The permission to play back videos of the selected devices on the site.

Enter the remarks, such as the reason for site sharing.
Click OK.
Optional: After your customer accepts the application and the maintenance service partner accepts the site sharing, perform the operations below.

View Information

About the Maintenance

Service Partner

You can view the status and email address of the Maintenance Service Partner on the site details page.

Cancel Site Sharing

You can cancel site sharing on the Site Sharing page.

Change Permissions for the Maintenance

Service Partner

You can change permissions for the maintenance service partner on the Site Sharing page.

‘Note

9.3 Accept Site Sharing

After the Installer Admin or Installer shares a site with the MSP (Maintenance Service Partner) on Hik-Partner Pro, the site owner will receive the device authorization application on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client. The site owner should agree to the authorization, so that the MSP can receive and handle the site sharing application on Hik-Partner Pro.

Before You Start

Make sure the site owner has agreed to the device authorization on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.
Make sure the MPS has logged in to the Hik-Partner Pro.
Make sure the country/region of the MSP’s account is the same as that of your account are the same.

Steps

In the upper-right corner of the page, click Notification Center.
Click the Business Notification tab.

All the business notifications (including the site sharing application) received by the MSP will be displayed.

Click I Agree to accept the site sharing.

s Business Notification 0!o Exception Center 4 System Message 3 ■■ Deals and Offers ®>

Site Sharing Application 10, Dec, 2021 10:10:16

Figure 6-16 MSP Accepts Site Sharing in Notification Center

The MSP can manage and maintain devices on the shared site together with the installer.

6.9.4 Features Available for MSP on a Shared Site

After the MSP (Maintenance Service Partner) accepts the site sharing, the MSP can perform configurations and operations which the customer authorized on the shared site. The MSP can also release device permission or cancel the site sharing. If the MSP is authorized to manage the site, the MSP can directly applying to the customer for device permission.

OZlNote

The MSP who accepted the site sharing cannot share the site with another MSP.

Features Available for MSP with Permissions

Customer Site

Includes live view and playback, arming and disarming devices, device remote configuration, device upgrade, linkage rule configuration, DDNS configuration, resetting password, exception notification configuration, and deleting site.

‘Note

The MSP can upgrade devices in the Customer Site module and the Health Monitoring module.
If the MSP deletes the site, it indicates that the site authorization is discarded by the MSP, but the installer can still manage the sites and their devices.

Health Monitoring

Includes viewing the status of devices on the shared sites, device remote configuration, refreshing devices’ status, live view, playback, manually checking devices’ status, and exporting health check reports.

Exception Center

Includes receiving device exceptions and exporting exception records.

Send Report Regularly

Includes configuring report settings to send reports regularly.

My Service

Includes viewing the validity periods, expiration time and status of activated services for the site and their corresponding resources.

dlNote

The MSP cannot activate or transfer services on the shared site. Only the installer can do the above operations.

MSP Applies to Customer for Device Permissions

If the MSP is authorized to manage the site, the MSP can directly apply to the customer for device permission. The installer who shared the site will receive the notification after the MSP sends the application for device permission.

For how the MSP applies to the customer for device permission, refer to Apply for Device Permission .

MSP Releases Device Permissions

If the MSP does not need device permission, or the MSP finished the device configuration task earlier than the planned time, the MSP can release the permission.

For how the MSP releases device permission, refer to Release the Permission for Devices .

MSP Cancels Site Sharing

If the MSP does not need to manage or maintain the site, or the MSP finished the site management and maintenance tasks, the MSP can cancel the site sharing. After the site sharing is canceled, the site and devices on the site will be deleted from the MSP’s Hik-Partner Pro account.

6.10 View Sites on the Map

If you have configured GPS information for the sites, you can view them on the map.

On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Site Map (or Site Map if HikCentral Connect is not available in your country or region) to enter the site map page.

Figure 6-17 Site Map

Note

Installer’s company is in the center of the map by default.
;’® : There are device(s) that have been activated the health monitoring service in this site.
Q : There is no device that has been activated the health monitoring service in this site.

You can perform the followings on this page.

You can view companies and sites whose GPS information have been configured on the map. For details about configuring GPS information for companies and sites, refer to Add New Site and Manage Company Information .
You can click a site to view its information, including site name, site owner, site location, the number of online/offline/abnormal devices, etc. Also, you can click Site Details to enter site details page to view more information about the site. You can click Health Monitoring Details to enter the health status page and view the health status of all the devices added to this site.

Figure 6-18 Site Information

• You can drag the map as needed. You can scroll the mouse or click / in the down-right corner to zoom in/out the map. Also, you can click a to view the company’s location on the map.

• You can enter keyword(s) in the search box in the upper-left corner to search for the site name.

Chapter 7 Device Management

Hik-Partner Pro supports multiple device types, including encoding device (e.g., solar camera), security control panel, video intercom device, access control device, doorbell. After adding them to the system, you can manage them and configure settings, including remotely configuring device parameters, configuring exception rule, linkage rule, people counting, temperature screening, etc.

OS Note

Some functions may not be available in specific countries and regions.

1. Batch Configure Devices on LAN

You can batch configure online devices on the same Local Area Network (LAN) with the PC on which the Hik-Partner Pro Portal runs. The available configurations include batch device activation and device IP address assignment, batch linking channels to NVR/DVR, and batch setting parameters for devices via templates. These functions allow you to complete basic configurations for multiple devices with much less effort compared with configuring devices one by one.

‘Note

For entering the device batch configuration page for the first time, a video tutorial about how to batch configure devices on LAN will pop up and automatically play in the down-left corner.
The functionality is only available to certain models of cameras, NVRs, and DVRs.
Before batch configuring devices, make sure you have connected them to the same LAN with the PC on which the Hik-Partner Pro Portal runs.

The flow chart for batch configuration of devices is shown below.

Figure 7-1 Flow Chart

Table 7-1 Flow Chart Description

Step	Sub-step	Description
Batch Activate Devices	N/A	Batch activate online devices on the same Local Area Network (LAN) with the PC on which the Hik-Partner Pro Portal runs, and assign IP addresses for the activated devices. See *Batch Activate Devices and* *Assign IP Addresses for Them* for details.
Batch Link Channels to NVR/DVR	N/A	If the activated devices include NVR or DVR, link channels to NVR or DVR. See *Batch Link Channels to* *NVR and DVR* for details.
Batch Set Device Parameters	Manually Set Parameters for a Device	Select an activated device and set its parameters manually. See *Create Template for Setting Parameters* for details.
	Create Template	Created a template based on the manually configured device. See *Create Template for Setting Parameters* for details.
	Configure Parameters for Devices via Template	Batch configure parameters for multiple devices via a selected template. See *Batch Set Parameters for* *Devices via Template* for details.
Add Device(s) to Site	N/A	If required, add the activated and configured device(s) to a Site. See *Add Detected Online Device* for details.

- 1. Batch Activate Devices and Assign IP Addresses for Them

The Portal can detect available devices connected to the same network with the Portal, and then you can activate devices and assign IP address for them.

Before You Start

Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers.

Steps

Click Install & Config ^ On-Site Config to enter the batch device configuration page.

Figure 7-2 Batch Device Configuration

2. Select the detected online devices to be activated.

3. Click Activate Devices & Assign IP to open the Activate Devices & Assign IP window.

4. Enter the device admin password and confirm the password.

5. Click Activate Devices & Assign IP.

CIS Note

The unactivated device and the activated device but not be assigned with IP address will be displayed as Not Obtained in the Device Name column.
For the activated device and be assigned with IP address, if you hover the mouse on the IP address, Auto will be displayed to remind you the IP address is automatically assigned.

The devices are activated, and the device IP address are assigned by the Portal.

The time of the computer will be synchronized to the activated devices.

6. Optional: After the devices are activated, you can perform the following operations.

Operation	Description
Edit Device Network Parameters	Click to edit the device network parameters, including IP address, device port, HTTP port, subnet mask, gateway, device admin password and then click OK.
Reset Device Admin Password	Click to reset the admin password of the device.
Unbind Device	Click and then enter the device password and verification code to unbind the device from its current account. After unbound, the device can be added to another account.

What to do next

After activating the devices, you should batch add channels to NVR or DVR. For details, refer to Batch Link Channels to NVR and DVR .

- 1. Batch Link Channels to NVR and DVR

If there are online NVR, DVR, and network camera on the same LAN, you can batch link the network camera to the NVR and DVR as channels. After linking, you can manage the linked channels according to your need.

Before You Start

Make sure you have activated the NVR, DVR, and network cameras. See Batch Activate Devices and Assign IP Addresses for Them for details.

Steps

OS Note

If there is no online NVR or DVR on the same LAN, skip this task.

On the Link Channel page, select an NVR or DVR on the left.

C® Note

If you have not logged in to the device, enter the password to log in.

Click Next.

Channels that have been linked will be displayed in the middle.

Figure 7-3 Channels on the Same LAN

‘Note

If a linked channel is offline, (p will be displayed beside the channel name. Hover the cursor on the icon to view the reason for being offline. You can click Set Parameters to change channel parameters to try again.

Click Link Channel to open the Link Channel panel.
Optional: Select a device and click to log in to the device and get device information.
Click + to link the device.
Optional: Perform the following operations.

Edit NVR/DVR/Channel Name	Click to edit the NVR/DVR/channel name.
Sort Channels	Click ]’ or to sort the channels.
Replace Device	Click Replace Device to unlink this channel and link a new device.
Unlink Device	Click ~ to unlink channel.

What to do next

Click Next to batch set parameters for devices. See Batch Set Parameters for Devices via Template for details.

- 1. Create Template for Setting Parameters

Before batch configuring parameters for devices, you should create a template. After creating a template, you can batch apply it to devices.

Before You Start

Make sure you have activated devices and linked channels to NVR and DVR (if any). See Batch

Activate Devices and Assign IP Addresses for Them and Batch Link Channels to NVR and DVR for details.

Steps

Click a device name or Set Parameters to enter the remote configuration page.
On the remote configuration page, set parameters for the device.
Click Save as Template on the top right.
Set a template name and check the parameters you want to save in the template.
Click Save to save the parameters as a template.
Optional: Add a new template based on device with configured parameters.
Click Manage Template ^ + .
Enter template name.
Select device type.
In the template content field, select a device.
Click Save.

Figure 7-4 Add Template

Optional: Click ® to delete a template.
- 1. Batch Set Parameters for Devices via Template

To configure devices with high efficiency, you can batch apply parameters in an existing template to devices.

Before You Start

Make sure you have created at least one template for setting parameters. See Create Template for Setting Parameters for details.

Steps

Check device(s) and click Set Parameters by Template.

dlNote

Before setting parameters for an NVR or DVR, you can tap Format to format the disk of the selected device. Batch formatting is not supported.

Select a template.

Figure 7-5 Set Parameters

3. Click Apply Parameters to apply the configured parameters to devices.

The application process and application results will be displayed.

Figure 7-6 Set Parameters by Template

4. Optional: Perform the following operations.

Add devices to Sites. See Add Device for details.

Add Device to Site

Manage Template

Edit NVR or Channel Name

Synchronize Computer Time to Device

Click Manage Template to add new template or delete template.

See Create Template for Setting Parameters for details.

Click Rename to edit name(s) of NVR or channels of NVR.

Check device(s) and click Synchronize Time to Device. And then check devices and click OK.

7.2 Add Device

Hik-Partner Pro accesses devices by two modes: Hik-Connect (P2P) and Device IP Address/Domain Name. The former provides securer data communication (between Hik-Partner Pro and devices) and full access to features based on the Hik-Connect service, such as device handover and exception notification; the latter provides faster data communication but no access to the features based on Hik-Connect service.

The table below shows the device adding methods for the two access modes respectively.

Table 7-2 Device Adding Methods

Access Mode

Device Adding Method

Hik-Connect (P2P)

Add Detected Online Device
Add Device by Entering Serial No.
Synchronize Devices with Hik-Connect Account
Add Devices Without Support for the Hik-Connect Service

CSNote

The last method in this table cell is for devices which do NOT support the Hik-Connect service. In this method, you can add them via the proxy of Hik-ProConnect Box to allow them to get full access to the features based on the Hik-Connect service.

Device IP Address/Domain Name

• Add Devices by IP Address or Domain Name

• Batch Add Devices

- 1. Add Device(s) after Batch Configuring Them

After batch configuring devices, you can add the device(s) to the existing site or a new site.

Select one of the following ways to enter the Add Device page.

After batch configuring device(s), click Add Device in the prompt box.

CXlNote

For details about batch configuring devices, refer to Batch Configure Devices on LAN

On the Home page, click Add Device.
On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your region).

o Click Add Device on the top of the site list.

o Click — in the Operation column of the site list.

o Click the site name to enter the site details page, and then go to Device ^ Add Device . Select Scan for Devices on LAN, Enter Serial No., Enter IP Address / Domain, Batch Import, or Synchronize devices from the Hik-Connect as the adding method.

Select the device(s) to be added, and perform one of the following two ways to add the device(s) to the site.

Select Existing Site and then click the site in the drop-down list.
Select New Site and edit the following parameters to create a new site.

Site Name

The name of the site, which can describe the site location, function, etc.

Time Zone

Select the time zone in the drop-down list according to the location the site belongs to.

Scene

Select the scene of the site in the drop-down list according to the usage scene, such as house, department, villa, and store.

Site Address

Enter the site address, such as street and number, apartment suite, unit, building, floor, etc.

City

Enter the city of the site.

State/Province/Region

Enter the state, province or region of the site.

Sync Time & Time Zone to Device

After checked, the time and time zone will be synchronized to the device from the site.

Click Next and perform the operations according to the prompts on the page. For more details, refer to Add Device .

- 1. Add Detected Online Device

The Portal can detect available devices connected to the same network with the Portal, which makes the devices’ information about themselves (e.g., IP address) recognized by the Portal. Based on the information, you can add the devices quickly.

OS Note

Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers.
You can add up to 15 detected online devices simultaneously.

On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your region).

On the Add Device page, click Scan for Devices on LAN.

‘Note

For details about how to enter Add Device page, refer to Add Device(s) after Batch Configuring Them .

The device(s) connected to the same LAN with the Portal will be displayed on the device list. You can view information including device serial No., device IP address, activation status (activated or not), Hik-Connect status (connected to Hik-Connect service or not), etc.

Check the online device(s) to be added and click Next. Perform part or all of the following 4 steps based on the status of the selected devices before you can add them.

After you add an AX PRO device to Hik-Partner Pro, you will be able to log into the AX PRO by your Hik-Partner Pro account (i.e., Installer account or Installer Admin account) to configure and manage the device; if you delete the AX PRO device from Hik-Partner Pro, you can no longer log into the AX PRO device by your Hik-Partner Pro account.

After your customer authorizes a Site with AX PRO devices to you, you can log into these AX PRO devices by your Hik-Partner Pro account to configure and manage the device. In this case, if you are an Installer, the Installer Admin can also log into these AX PRO devices by her/his Hik-Partner Pro account; if you are the Installer Admin, your employees (i.e., Installers) have no permission to log into these devices by their Hik-Partner Pro accounts.

Step	Description
Activate Device	If there are device(s) not activated, activate them. See *Activate* *Device* for details. HZXlNote If a device is activated, the platform will automatically assign a fixed IP address for it.
Enter Device Password	Enter admin password of the device. See *Enter Device Password* for details.
Automatically Connect to Hik- Connect Service	Connect device(s) to the Hik-Connect service. See *Connect to* *Hik-Connect Service* for details.
Set Device Verification Code	If a device is connected to the Hik-Connect service successfully, the platform will automatically get device verification code from device. If not, you need to set verification code for it. See *Set Device Verification Code* for details.

Table 7-3 Step Description

•

After you hand over a Site with AX PRO devices to your customer, your customer will be able to log into these devices by her/his Hik-Connect account, and you will no longer have the permission to log into these devices by your Hik-Partner Pro account.
For the AX Hybrid Pro, after the device is added to the Hik-Partner Pro, its account and password which are configured on the Device Configuration page will be overwritten by those of the Hik- Partner Pro.

After adding devices to the Portal, you can perform the following operations if required.

Table 7-4 Available Operations after Adding Devices

Operation	Description
Edit Device	Click the device name to edit it. Or move the cursor to the device and then click / to edit device name.
Configure Linkage Rule	Click [jj to configure linkage rule for the device. CSNote For details, see *Add Custom Linkage Rule* .
Activate Health Monitoring Service	Click Activate Service on the adding result page. Or hover the cursor onto S on the device card on the site details page, and then click Activate Service. CSNote For details about how to activate the health monitoring service, see *Activate the Health Monitoring Service for* *Devices* . For details about Health Monitoring service, see *Health* *Monitoring Service* .
Delete Device	Click ^ 0 to delete the device. CS Note Deleting device (except devices added by IP/domain) is not supported if the site is authorized. For AX Hybrid Pro (V1.0.1 and above) which is connected to the Hik-Connect service and is online, if the device is in the armed status, you should disarm the device before deleting it.
Upgrade Device Firmware	When device adding completes, the platform will start detecting whether the device firmware version is compatible. Some functions (including health monitoring, linkage rule, and remote

Operation	Description
	configuration) are unavailable if the device is not compatible with the Hik-Partner Pro. For devices incompatible with the Hik-Partner Pro, you need to upgrade them. Select Upgrade to Compatible Version on the Upgrade or Not column, and click Add and Upgrade. Enter device user name and password to add and upgrade the device.
Set Type for Unknown Device	If the Hik-Partner Pro cannot recognize a device’s type after you add it, you can manually set a device type for it. Click Set Device Type and select a device type from the drop-down list. You can edit it again after the selection.
Unbind Device from Its Current Account	If the adding result page shows that a device fails to be added and has been added to another account, you can click to unbind it. When the device is unbound, you can add it to your account. For details about unbinding device, see *Unbind a* *Device from Its Current Account* .

Activate Device

If there are inactivated device(s) in the selected devices, create a device admin password for all the inactivated device(s) on the pop-up window to activated them.

LJilNote

Enter Device Password

For devices which are activated but not connected to the Hik-Connect service, you should enter its admin password on the pop-up window. The admin password is created when you activate the device.

If multiple devices share the same password, enable Batch Enter admin Password to enter the password for all the devices in a batch. If any devices’ passwords are incorrect, a notification will prompt showing these device(s) for you to enter the correct password(s).

‘Note

Before entering admin password, you should make sure that no repeated device IP address exists, or one of the devices with the same IP address will fail to be added. You can click £_ in the Operation column, and then edit the device IP address.

Connect to Hik-Connect Service

After entering device admin passwords, the platform will automatically start connecting the device(s) to the Hik-Connect service. Devices that are failed to be connected to the Hik-Connect service cannot be added.

‘Note

Make sure that no repeated device IP address exists and that the IP addresses of the to-be- connected devices are in the same network segment with the PC running Hik-Partner Pro, or connection exception will occur. You can click .£ in the Operation column, and then edit the device IP address.

Set Device Verification Code

If a device is connected to the Hik-Connect service successfully, the platform will automatically get device verification code from device. If the platform failed to get the verification codes from any devices, you need to manually enter their verification codes.

If multiple devices share the same verification code, enable Batch Enter Verification Code and enter the verification code for all of them.

If device(s) failed to be connected to the Hik-Connect service, you need to set a shared device verification code for multiple devices, or set verification codes for each device. After you complete device verification settings, the device(s) will be connected the Hik-Connect service.

C®Note

For EZVIZ devices, admin password is not required, and device verification code is required.

7.2.3 Add Device by Entering Serial No.

If a device is connected to Hik-Connect service, you can manually add it to a site by entering the device serial number and device verification code.

Before You Start

Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers.
Make sure the device has been activated and connected to Hik-Connect service.

Steps

On the navigation pane, click Customer Site ^ Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your region).
Open the Add Device page.

OS Note

For details, refer to Add Device(s) after Batch Configuring Them .

Select Enter Serial No. as the adding mode.
Enter the device serial number and device verification code.

CIS Note

The device serial number and the default device verification code are usually on the device label. If no device verification code found, enter the verification code you created when enabling Hik- Connect service.

Click Next.

CS Note

Hik-Partner Pro will start detecting whether the device firmware version is compatible with the Hik-Partner Pro. Some functions (including health monitoring, linkage, and remote configuration) cannot be used if the device is not compatible with the Hik-Partner Pro. Firmware version detection will not happen if a site is authorized. For devices incompatible with the Hik- Partner Pro, you need to upgrade them.

Select Upgrade to Compatible Version on the Upgrade or Not column, and click Add and Upgrade.
Enter device user name and password to add and upgrade the device.
Check the device(s) to be added.
Click Add.

US Note

After you add an AX PRO device to Hik-Partner Pro, you will be able to log into the AX PRO device by your Hik-Partner Pro account (i.e., Installer account or Installer Admin account) to configure and manage the device; if you delete the AX PRO device from Hik-Partner Pro, you can no longer log into the AX PRO device by your Hik-Partner Pro account.
After your customer authorizes a Site with AX PRO devices to you, you can log into these AX PRO devices by your Hik-Partner Pro account to configure and manage the device. In this case, if you are an Installer, the Installer Admin can also log into these AX PRO devices by her/his Hik-Partner Pro account; if you are the Installer Admin, your employees (i.e., Installers) have no permission to log into these devices by their Hik-Partner Pro accounts.
After you hand over a Site with AX PRO devices to your customer, your customer will be able to log into these devices by her/his Hik-Connect account, and you will no longer have the permission to log into these devices by your Hik-Partner Pro account.
For the AX Hybrid Pro, after the device is added to the Hik-Partner Pro, its account and password which are configured on the Device Configuration page will be overwritten by those of the Hik-Partner Pro.

Optional: Perform the following operations after adding device(s).

Edit Device Name	Click the device name to edit it. Or move the cursor to the device and then click to edit it.
Delete Device	Click ^ 0 . □S Note Deleting device (except devices added by IP/domain) is not supported if the Site is authorized to you. For AX Hybrid Pro (V1.0.1 and above) which is connected to the Hik- Connect service and is online, if the device is in the armed status, you should disarm the device before deleting it.
Upgrade Device	Refer to *Upgrade Device* .
Set Type for Unknown Device	If the Hik-Partner Pro cannot recognize a device’s type after you add it, you can manually set a device type for it. Click Set Device Type and select a device type from the drop-down list. You can edit it again after the selection.
View DDNS Status	Click a * « and hover the cursor on “§■ . See *Configure DDNS for Devices* for details about configuring device DDNS.
Activate Health Monitoring Service	Click Activate Service on the adding result page. Or hover the cursor onto Fl on the device card on the site details page, and then click Activate Service. □3 Note For details about how to activate the health monitoring service, see *Activate the Health Monitoring Service for Devices* . For details about health monitoring service, see *Health Monitoring* *Service* .
Configure Cloud Storage	For the Hik-Partner Pro box, DVR that supports cloud storage, and NVR that supports cloud storage, you can click Cloud Storage Service to configure Cloud Storage settings. See *Set Cloud Storage for Hik-Partner Pro Box* , *Set* *Cloud Storage for DVR* , and *How to enable cloud storage for an NVR that* *supports cloud storage?* for details.

7.2.4 Add Devices by IP Address or Domain Name

If you know the IP address or domain name of a device, you can add it to Hik-Partner Pro by specifying its IP address/domain name, user name, password, etc. Once a device is added in this way, Hik-Partner Pro will generate a QR code containing the device information. After completing device setup, you can share the QR code to your customer. And then your customer can scan the QR code via the Hik-Connect Mobile Client to add the device to her/his Hik-Connect account.

Before You Start

Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers.

Steps

OS Note

Devices added in this mode do NOT support the device handover process. If you need to hand over a device to your customer after completing the device setup work, please add it in one of following two methods: Add Detected Online Device or Add Device by Entering Serial No. .
Only encoding devices mapped in WAN support this function.
Ask your customers to download or update the Hik-Connect Mobile Client (V 4.15.0 or later). You can send the QR code or download link shown in the banner on the Home page to them.

On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your region).
Open the Add Device page.

CS Note

For details, refer to Add Device(s) after Batch Configuring Them .

Select Enter IP Address / Domain as the adding mode.
Enter the device’s name, IP address/domain name, port number, user name, and password.

/t\ Caution

Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the installer and/or end-user.

Click Add.

A QR code containing the device information will be generated and displayed in the device card on the site details page.

Figure 7-7 The QR Code of the Added Device

6. Optional: Perform the following operations if you need.

Encrypt Device

QR Code

It is highly recommended that you encrypt the device QR code for security reasons.

Click to display the QR code.
Create a password to encrypt the QR code, and then click Save.

View and Edit

Device Information

Click the device’s IP address or domain name to view the device basic information. If the device’s information changed, or a network exception occurs, you can edit its information accordingly.

Select a device, and click « * • ^ to edit the device’s name, IP address/domain name, port number, user name, and password.

Set Type for

Unknown Device

If the Hik-Partner Pro cannot recognize a device’s type after you add it, you can manually set a device type for it. Click Set Device Type and select a device type from the drop-down list. You can edit it again after the selection.

Activate Health Monitoring Service

Hover the cursor onto Fl on the device card on the site details page, and then click Activate Service.

dlNote

For details about how to activate the health monitoring service, see Activate the Health Monitoring Service for Devices .
For details about the health monitoring service, see Health Monitoring Service .

Delete Device

Click • * « ^ .

QU Note

Deleting device (except devices added by IP/Domain) is not supported if the site is authorized to you.

7.2.5 Batch Add Devices

You can batch add multiple devices to the client by entering the device parameters in a predefined template.

Before You Start

Make sure the devices you are going to use are correctly installed and connected to the network as specified by the manufacturers.

Steps

OS Note

The devices added in this mode cannot be handed over to your customer. If you need to hand over a device to your customer after completing the device setup work, please add it by Hik- Connect (P2P). For details, see Add Detected Online Device or Add Device by Entering Serial No. .
Only encoding devices mapped in WAN support this function.

On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your region).
Open the Add Device page.

CS Note

For details, refer to Add Device(s) after Batch Configuring Them .

Select Batch Import as the adding mode.
Click Download Template to save the predefined template (CSV file) in your PC.
Open the downloaded template file and enter the required information of the devices to be added in the corresponding column.
Click Upload Template to upload the edited template to Hik-Partner Pro.
Optional: Perform the following operations after adding the devices.

Encrypt Device	A QR code will be generated and displayed in the device information area
QR Code	If an end user did not add the device to his/her Hik-Connect account, he/she can add it to the Hik-Connect account by scanning this QR code using Hik-Connect. Click to display the QR code. Enter a password to encrypt the QR code, and then click Save.
Activate Health	Hover the cursor onto nn on the device card on the site details page, and
Monitoring Service	then click Activate Service.

	‘Note For details about how to activate the health monitoring service, see *Activate the Health Monitoring Service for Devices* . For details about Health Monitoring service, see *Health Monitoring* *Service* .
View and Edit Device Information	Click the device’s IP address or domain name to view the device basic information. If the device’s information changed, or a network exception occurs, you can edit its information accordingly. Select a device, and click ^[1] ^[2] * * ^ to edit the device’s name, IP address/ domain name, port number, user name, and password.
Set Type for Unknown Device	If the Hik-Partner Pro cannot recognize a device’s type after you add it, you can manually set a device type for it. Click Set Device Type and select a device type from the drop-down list. You can edit it again after the selection.
Delete Device	Click * * * ^ . ‘Note Deleting device (except devices added by IP/domain) is not supported if the site is authorized . For AX Hybrid Pro (V1.0.1 and above) which is connected to the Hik- Connect service and is online, if the device is in the armed status, you should disarm the device before deleting it.

If an Installer hands over the site with this AX Pro to an end user, the end user’s Hik-Connect account will also become an account of the AX Pro, while the Installer’s account will be deleted from the AX Pro. This is also applicable to an Installer Admin.
For the AX Hybrid Pro, after the device is added to the Hik-Partner Pro, its account and password which are configured on the Device Configuration page will be overwritten by those of the Hik-Partner Pro.
- 1. Synchronize Devices with Hik-Connect Account

You can synchronize devices in your Hik-Connect account with devices in the Hik-Partner Pro account. After synchronization, the devices are still managed in your Hik-Connect account and you can continue to use Hik-Connect service.

In the following two cases, you need to synchronize devices in the Hik-Connect account with devices in the Hik-Partner Pro account.

Case 1: Before using Hik-Partner Pro, you managed the devices for the customer by the Hik- Connect Mobile Client after the customer shares her/his devices to your Hik-Connect account.
Case 2: Before using Hik-Partner Pro, you already have a Hik-Connect account and have added device(s) to it.

Under the above two circumstances, you can synchronize these devices (including the ones the customers shared to you, or the ones added in your Hik-Connect account) with the Hik-Partner Pro account for quick and convenient devices adding and better device management and maintenance.

Figure 7-9 Synchronize Devices With Hik-Connect Account

There are three entries.

On the Customer Site page, click Synchronize Devices from Hik-Connect on the top of the site list.
On the Add Device page, click Synchronize Devices from Hik-Connect.
Click the user name in the upper-right corner, click Link with Hik-Connect Account in the dropdown menu, and click Link with Account.

Log into Hik-Connect

First, you need to log into Hik-Connect by entering your account or by scanning QR code. (Optional): Check Get Your Account and Device Information to allow Hik-Partner Pro to get these information.

Check Authorize Automatic Device Synchronization from Your Account to the Current Hik-Partner Pro Account to authorize automatic device synchronization. After authorization, devices newly added to Hik-Connect will be automatically synchronized to Hik-Partner Pro.

Select Device for Synchronization

Secondly, you need to select the devices for synchronization.

After login, the devices added to your Hik-Connect account, as well as the ones others shared to you, will be displayed in the device list.

You can filter the devices by selecting Show All Devices, Show My Devices Only (the devices added to your Hik-Connect account), or Show Others’ Devices Only (the devices shared to your Hik- Connect account from the customer) in the drop-down list.

Select the devices you want to synchronize with Hik-Partner Pro account, and click Next.

Configure Site for My Devices

Thirdly, you need to set the site information in Hik-Partner Pro for your devices to be synchronized. For the devices added in your Hik-Connect account (displayed in My Devices list), you can add them to different sites or to the same site according to your actual needs.

You have site authorization, configuration, and live view permission by default.

Figure 7-10 Configure Site for My Devices

Apply for Permission

You have site authorization, configuration, and live view permission by default.

Add to Different Sites

If your devices are shared to different customers, select this option and you can add them to different sites.

For the devices which have been shared to the customers, the system will automatically create sites by the user names of the customers, and then add the devices to these sites. If there already exists a site the site owner of which is the customer, the information of this site (site name and time zone) will be displayed and the corresponding devices will be added to this site automatically.

For the devices which are not shared to anyone, the system will automatically create a site named after your Hik-Connect account user name, and then assign them to this site.

You can hover over the site name and click to edit the site name.

Add to the Same Site

You can also add these devices to the same site. The system will automatically create a site named after your Hik-Connect account user name, and then add all these selected devices to this site.

You can hover over the site name and click to edit the site name.

By default, after synchronization, you will have site authorization permission of the automatically created site(s), and configuration as well as live view permission of the devices in My Devices list.

Configure Site and Permissions for Others’ Devices

Fourthly, you need to set the site information in Hik-Partner Pro and set the device permission for the devices shared to you.

Figure 7-11 Configure Site and Permissions for Others’ Devices

For the devices shared to you by others, usually customers, (displayed in Others’ Devices list), they will be added to different sites. The system will automatically create sites named after the user names of the customers, and then add all these selected devices to this site. If there already exists a site the site Owner of which is the customer, the information of this site (site name and time zone) will be displayed and the corresponding devices will be added to this site automatically.

You can hover over the site name and click to edit the site name.

In the Apply for Permission list, you need to select the permissions that you want to apply from the customers for the devices. By default, you will have site authorization permission of the automatically created site(s). After synchronization, the customers will receive a notification on Hik-Connect Mobile Client. After authorization by the customers, you can manage the devices on Hik-Partner Pro.

Set Time Zone

Fifthly, you can set the time zone of the devices if needed.

You can set the time zone for each device, or you can select a time zone in the Set Time Zone dropdown list at the upper-left corner to set a time zone for the devices in a batch.

Start Synchronization

Finally, start device synchronization.

After setting the sites and device permissions, select the devices in the My Devices and Others’ Devices list, and click Synchronize to start synchronization.

For devices shared from the customers in Others’ Devices list, the system will send a request to the customers. After the customers approving the authorization request, the devices will be synchronized successfully.

Click Continue to select other devices for synchronization, or click Finish and View to view the devices synchronized after creating sites in the site list.

- 1. Add Devices Without Support for the Hik-Connect Service

Some devices do not support the Hik-Connect service, and therefore they cannot be accessed by Hik-Partner Pro via Hik-Connect (P2P). If they are accessed via device IP address/domain name, some features (such as health monitoring, exception rule, and remote configuration) will be unavailable. To solve this issue, you can add these devices to Hik-Partner Pro via the proxy of Hik- Partner Pro Boxes. In this way, the originally unavailable features will be available.

Before You Start

Make sure that you have added Hik-Partner Pro Boxes to Hik-Partner Pro. For details, see Add Device by Entering Serial No. or Add Detected Online Device .

Steps

OS Note

Currently only some encoding devices and access control devices can be proxied by Hik-Partner Pro Boxes. For detailed device models, see Hik-Partner Pro Device Compatibility List.
The proxied devices do not support features including ARC service, cloud attendance service, temperature screening service, people counting service, and ISAPI alarm. For the proxied encoding device, in addition to the above-mentioned features, linkage rule is not supported as well.

On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your region).
Click the name of a site with Hik-Partner Pro Boxes added.

You enter the site details page.

Click a Hik-Partner Pro Box to show its details panel, and then select Proxied Device ^ Add ToBe-Proxied Device to enter the following page.

Figure 7-12 Add To-Be-Proxied Devices

Add devices in one of the following two ways.

Table 7-5 Add Devices

Way

Description

Online Device

Add devices on the same LAN with the Portal.

Select devices, and then click Next.
Select all devices, and then click Batch Verification to set a user name and a password shared by all devices.

Or enter the device user name and password for each device.

Click Next.

Manual Adding

Add a device manually.

Click Add Device.

In the Manual Adding window, select the target Site, and then enter the device IP address and device port No.

Click OK and the device will be displayed in the device list.
Click Enter user name and password. in the User Name/ Password column to enter the device user name and password.

Way

Description

OS Note

You can also add multiple devices first, and then click Batch Verification to set a user name and a password shared by all these devices.

d. Click Next.

The adding result page shows.

If adding failures exist, you can view the failure reasons on the adding result page and do corresponding operations (e.g., entering password again if the failure is caused by incorrect password).
Click Next.
If there are encoding devices, enable proxy for channels of encoding devices before you can view live video and video footage of these channels.
Click Enable Proxy in the Operation column.
Select channels and then click OK.
Click Complete.
Optional: View the proxy information on the device details page of the Hik-Partner Pro Box.

7.3 Move Devices

You can use the Device Movement feature to move devices from one Site to another. By distributing devices to different Sites, you can manage both the Sites and devices more efficiently.

Steps

OS Note

• The feature is only supported by a device matches the following conditions:

The original Site where the device belongs to needs to have been authorized to you.
The device needs to be added by Hik-Connect (P2P). The devices added by IP address / domain name are not supported.
The original Site and the target Site should belong to the same Site Owner.

• Once a device is moved from its original Site, you need to configure the device again because all the original device configurations will be invalid. In addition, device related configurations including the linkage rules, exception rules, ARC settings, network switch settings, people counting service, temperature screening service, cloud storage service, and cloud attendance service, etc., will be affected. You need to configure these related configurations again also.

Go to Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your country or region).
Click the name of an authorized Site to enter its details page.
Click Move Device to open the Move Device pane.
Click Select Device to Move, select device(s), and click Next.

Figure 7-13 Select Device

Select a Site.

Qi] Note

New Site: If you select New Site, you need to create a name for the Site and set its time zone.
Existing Site: If you select Existing Site, you need to select a Site that shares the same Site Owner with the current one.

Figure 7-14 Select Site

Click Submit Application.

The application will expire if not handled within 7 days.

Optional: On the Move Device pane, click View Device Movement Record to enter the Device Movement Record page, and perform the following operation(s) if needed.

Apply Again

View Details

Move More

Click Apply Again to send an application for device movement again if the former one has been rejected or expired.

Click an application record to enter its details page to see the details.

Click an approved or sent application, and then click Move More to move more devices.

1. Manage Device Permission

By handing over the site and applying for site authorization, you have already acquired some device permissions. You can still apply for additional device permissions afterward or release device permissions if needed.

- 1. Apply for Device Permission

After handing over a Site to the end user, and if you need to view the live view/recorded videos of devices added to the Site or configure the devices added to the Site, you can apply for the permission accordingly from the end user.

Steps

Click the name of a Site to enter the site details page.
On the Device tab, click Apply for Permission ^ Apply for Configuration Permission/Apply for Live View Permission/Apply for Playback Permission .
Check device(s) you want to apply for permission, and click Apply.
In the Validity Period drop-down list, select a validity period for the permission.

CXlNote

You can select Permanent, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, 4 Hours, or 8 Hours as the validity period.

Optional: Enter the remarks for the permission.
Click Apply to apply for the permission from end user.

If the end user approves your application, you will get corresponding permission(s).

- 1. Release the Permission for Devices

If you do not need the permissions of configuration and live view for devices, or you finish the device configuration task earlier than the planned time, you can release the permissions manually.

Before You Start

Make sure the site of the devices has been handed over to you.

Steps

Click a site in the site list to enter the site details page.
Click a device to show the device details page.
In the Permission section, select a permission, and click ^ OK to release the permission.

djNote

After releasing, the permission will be unavailable for you. You need to apply for it again if needed.
You do not have to release permission if the permission validity is Permanent.
1. Linkage Rule and Exception Rule

You can set up a linkage rule to trigger certain device actions when the triggering event occurs. You can configure an exception rule to specify how, when, and where you want to receive exception notifications of a device or channel.

□3 Note

Make sure you have enabled the Notification functionality of the source device of the linkage/ exception rule. If the function is disabled, events detected by the device cannot be reported and thus the linkage/exception rule cannot be triggered.

- 1. Add Linkage Rule

A linkage (see the picture below for reference) refers to the process in which an event detected by resource A triggers actions of resource B, resource C, resource D, etc. You can add a rule using the predefined template or customize a rule to define such a linkage.

The rule contains five elements, including Source (resource A), Triggering Event (the event detected by resource A), Linked Resources (resource B, resource C, resource D… ), Linkage Actions (actions of resource B, resource C, resource D… ), and Linkage Schedule (the scheduled time during which the linkage is activated). The linkages can be used for purposes such as notifying security personnel, upgrading security level, and saving evidence, when specific events happen.

The picture below shows the process of the linkage.

Figure 7-15 Linkage

Linked Resources

Linkage Actions

Recording

Remain Closed

Alarm Output

Other Actions…

Door Linked to Access Control Device

Alarm Output Device

Example

Sample Application

Assume that the end user is the manager of a jewelry store, and the store needs to upgrade security level during non-work hours. And the store has been installed with a PIR detector linked to a security control panel, a sounder linked to the security control panel, and several network cameras.

In this case, you can set a linkage rule for him/her to trigger alarm output and recording in the store when object(s) in motion are detected in the store during non-work hours. The following elements need to be defined in the linkage rule:

Source: The PIR detector in the store.
Triggering Event: Motion detection event.
Linked Resources: The alarm output (the sounder in this case) and the network cameras in the store.
Linkage Actions:

° For sounder: The sounder sends out audible alarm.

° For network cameras: The network cameras starts recording.

Linkage Schedule: Non-work hours every day.

Add Custom Linkage Rule

If the pre-defined templates cannot meet your needs, you can customize linkage rules as desired.

Steps

C® Note

Make sure you have the permission for the configuration of the devices. Or you should apply for the permission first. For details about applying for the permission, see Apply for Device Permission .
The Source and the Linked Resource cannot be the same resource.
You cannot configure two totally same linkage rules. In other words, you cannot configure two rules with the same Source, Triggering Event, Linked Resource, and Linkage Action.
If the Source or Linked Resource is an AX security control panel, when EN50131 Compliant mode is enabled on the device, make sure that you have done authentication by entering the device password, otherwise the configuration of linkage rule will fail.
When the Source is a device added by IP/domain, the device added by Hik-Connect cannot be set as the Linked Resource for triggering capture.

On the navigation pane, click Customer Site to enter the site list page.
Open the Add Linkage Rule panel.

Select a site and click ^ [jj in the Operation column.
Click the name of a site to enter the site details page, and then click Linkage Rule ^ Add Linkage Rule .
Click the name of a site to enter the site details page, and then select a device and click [jj .

Set the required information.

Linkage Rule Name

Create a linkage rule name.

Trigger

Define the trigger for the linkage action.

Select Source

Select a resource as the Source.

Set Triggering Event

Select an event as the triggering event.

OS Note

Make sure that the triggering event has been configured on the selected device. For details about configuring event on device, see the user manual of the device.

Table 7-6 Available Triggering Events for Different Resource Types

Resource	Triggering Event
Camera	Motion Detection Face Detection Intrusion Line Crossing Detection
Access Control Device	• Tampering Alarm
Door Linked to Access Control Device	Door Opened Normally OS Note Capture or Recording cannot be set as the linkage action for the triggering event Door Opened Normally. Door Opened Abnormally Tampering Alarm
Door Station	• Calling
Area of Security Control Panel	Away Arming Disarmed Stay Arming Alarm, such as Instant Zone Alarm, 24-Hour Annunciating Zone Alarm, and Delayed Zone Alarm.
Zone (Detector) Linked to Security Control Panel	• Alarm, such as Triggering Alarm, such as Instant Zone Alarm, 24-Hour Annunciating Zone Alarm, and Delayed Zone Alarm.
Doorbell	Calling PIR Detection

Linkage

Click Add to select Linkage Action(s) and Linked Resource(s).

Note

After selecting a Linkage Action, the resource(s) available to be set as Linked Resource(s) will appear.
Up to 128 Linkage Actions or 10 Linked Resources can be selected.

Linkage Action

Select linkage action(s).

Table 7-7 Linkage Action Description

Linked Resource	Linkage Action	Description
Camera (Channel)	Capture	The camera will capture a picture when the Triggering Event is detected.
	Recording	The camera will record video footage when the Triggering Event is detected. CH Note The recorded video footage starts from 5 s before the detection of the Triggering Event, and lasts 30 s.
	Call Preset	Select a preset from the Preset drop-down list to specify it as the preset which will be called when the Triggering Event is detected. A preset is a predefined image position which contains configuration parameters for pan, tilt, zoom, focus and other parameters. By calling a preset, the PTZ camera will move to the predefined image position. [dlNote Make sure you have configured presets for the PTZ camera. For details, see the user manual of the PTZ camera.
	Call Patrol	Select a patrol from the Patrol drop-down list to specify it as the patrol which will be called when the Triggering Event is detected. A patrol is a predefined PTZ movement path consisted of a series of key points (i.e., presets) that have their own designated sequence. By calling a patrol, the PTZ camera

Linked Resource	Linkage Action	Description
		will travels to all the key points in set speed so as to provide a dynamic view. 0X1 Note Make sure you have configured patrols for the PTZ camera. For details, see the user manual of the PTZ camera.
	Call Pattern	Select a pattern from the Pattern drop-down list tot specify it as the pattern which will be called when the Triggering Event is detected. A pattern is a predefined PTZ movement path with a certain dwell-time configured for a certain position. By calling a pattern, the PTZ camera moves according the predefined path. nXlNote Make sure you have configured patterns for the PTZ camera. For details, see the user manual of the PTZ camera.
	Arm	The camera will be armed and hence the events related to the camera will be uploaded to the Hik-Connect Mobile Client when the Triggering Event is detected.
	Disarm	The camera will be disarmed and hence the events related to the camera will not be uploaded to the Hik-Connect Mobile Client when the Triggering Event is detected.
	Enable Privacy Mask	Privacy mask will be displayed on the live images of the camera when the Triggering Event is detected. diNote Make sure you have configured privacy mask for the camera. For details, see the user manual of the camera.
	Disable Privacy Mask	Privacy mask will NOT be displayed on the live images of the camera when the Triggering Event is detected.
Alarm Output	Alarm Output	The alarm output of the Linked Resource will be triggered when the Triggering Event is detected.

Linked Resource	Linkage Action	Description
Area of Security Control Panel	Stay Arm	The arming status of the area of the security control panel will switch to Stay when the Triggering Event is detected.
	Away Arm	The arming status of the area of the security control panel will switch to Away when the Triggering Event is detected.
	Disarm	The area of the security control panel will be disarmed when the Triggering Event is detected.
Door Linked to Access Control Device	Open Door	The door related to the access control device will be opened when the Triggering Event is detected.
	Remain Open	The door related to the access control device will remain open when the Triggering Event is detected.
	Remain Closed	The door related to the access control device will remain closed when the Triggering Event is detected.
Door Station	Open Door	The door linked to the door station will be automatically opened when the Triggering Event is detected.
Alarm Input	Arm Alarm Input	The alarm input will be armed and hence events related to it will be uploaded to the Hik-Connect Mobile Client when the Triggering Event is detected.
Alarm Input	Disarm Alarm Input	The alarm input will be disarmed and hence events related to it will NOT be uploaded to the Hik-Connect Mobile Client when the Triggering Event is detected.

Linked Resource

Select resource(s) as the trigger source of the Linkage Action.

CHjNote

For configuring Linkage Actions for a same Source, if its Linked Resources are cameras (i.e., channels), you can set at most four Linkage Actions. For example, if you have set capturing picture and recording (the two are considered as two Linkage Actions) as the Linkage Actions for camera 1, you can only set two more Linkage Actions, i.e., capturing picture and recording for camera 2, or capturing picture for channel 2 and recording for channel 3, or recording for channel 2 and capturing picture for channel 3.

Note

After selecting Linkage Action(s) and Linked Resource(s), you can check the check-box(es) and then click Delete to delete the selected Linked Action(s) and Linkage Resource(s).

Linkage Schedule

Define the scheduled time during which the linkage is activated.

All Days

The external linkage action is always activated from Monday to Sunday, 7 days x 24 hours.

Custom

Select date(s) within a week and then specify the start time and end time for each selected date.

C®Note

The date(s) marked blue is selected.

Click OK

The linkage rule will appear on the Linkage Rule list.

Optional: Perform the following operations if required after adding linkage rules.

Edit Linkage Rule Click ^ / to edit the linkage rule.

Delete Linkage Rule Click ^ 0 to delete the linkage rule.

Disable Linkage Rule Set to to disable the linkage rule.

What to do next

If you have enabled the linkage rule, make sure the Notification functionality of the Source is enabled. For details about enabling the functionality, see Enable Device to Send Notifications .

OZlNote

If the Notification functionality of the Source is disabled, the Linkage Action will NOT be activated no matter the Triggering Event is detected by Source or not.
Please notify the end user after handing over the site to him/her that notification of the Source should be kept enabled on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client, or the Linkage Action will NOT be activated no matter the Triggering Event is detected by Source or not. For details about enabling alarm notification for a specific device or channel, see the Hik-Connect Mobile Client User Manual.
Please notify your end users to download or update the Hik-Connect Mobile Client (V 4.15.0 or later). You can send the QR code or download link shown in the banner on the Home page of Portal to them.

Add Linkage Rule Based on Pre-defined Template

You can use six pre-defined templates to add linkage rules, including Intrusion, Forced Entry Alarm, Back to Home/Office, Away, Visitor Calling, and Perimeter Zone Alarm. Each of the six templates is designed for a typical applications (see the table below) of linkage rule.

Before You Start

Make sure you have the permission for the configuration of the devices. If not, you need to apply for the permissions first. For details about applying for permission, see Apply for Device Permission .

Table 7-8 Template Description

Template	Description
Intrusion	The Intrusion Template: Used for improving security level by triggering the linkage actions including capture, recording, and alarm output, when the intrusion event (people, vehicles, or other objects enter a predefined area) occurs.
Forced Entry Alarm	The Forced Entry Alarm Template: Used for improving security level by triggering the linkage actions including capture, recording, remaining door closed, alarm output, and calling preset when a door is opened abnormally.
Back to Home/Office	The Back to Home/Office Template: Used for lowering the security level and enabling privacy protection by triggering the linkage actions including disarming and enabling privacy mask, when you are back to home or office.
Away	The Away Template: Used for improving security level and canceling privacy protection by triggering the linkage actions including arming and disabling privacy mask when you leave your home or office.
Visitor Calling	The Visitor Calling Template: Used for improving security level by triggering the linkage actions including capture and recording when visitor(s) are calling from the door station.
Perimeter Zone Alarm	The Perimeter Zone Alarm Template: Used for improving security level by triggering the linkage actions including capture, recording, calling preset, alarm output, and remaining door closed, if people or other objects are detected in all accesses (including doors, windows, cellar doors, etc.) to a property.

Steps

[2® Note

Due to the similarity of adding linkage rules based on different templates, here we only introduce how to add a linkage rule based on the Forced Entry Alarm template.

On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your country or region).
Open the Add Linkage Rule panel.

Click the name of a site to enter the site details page and select the Linkage Rule tab, and then click Forced Entry Alarm template in the Linkage Template area.

Click ^ [ji in the Operation column, and then select the Forced Entry Alarm template from the left side of the Add Linkage Rule panel.

Click the name of a site to enter the site details page, click Add Linkage Rule and then select the Forced Entry Alarm template from the left side of the Add Linkage Rule panel.

Figure 7-16 Add Linkage Rule by Template

Set the required information.

Linkage Rule Name

Create a linkage rule name.

When

Select a resource as the Source for detecting line crossing event from the drop-down list.

Trigger the Following Actions

Click Select to select the Linked Resources used for triggering the linkage actions, and then click Add.

OS Note

You can set only one linkage action.
For details about the linkage actions, see Table 7-7 .

Linkage Schedule

Define the scheduled time during which the linkage is activated.

All Days

The linkage action is always activated from Monday to Sunday, 7 days x 24 hours.

Custom

Select date(s) within a week and then specify the start time and end time for each selected date.

C®Note

The date(s) marked blue is selected.

Click OK

The added linkage rule will be displayed in the linkage rule list.

Optional: Set <3 to to disable the linkage rule.

What to do next

If you have enabled the linkage rule, make sure the Notification functionality of the Source is enabled. For details, see Enable Device to Send Notifications .

OU Note

If the Notification functionality of the Source is disabled, the Linkage Action will NOT be activated no matter the Triggering Event is detected by Source or not.
Please notify the end user after handing over the site to him/her that notification of the Source should be kept enabled on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client, or the Linkage Action will NOT be activated no matter the Triggering Event is detected by Source or not. For details about enabling alarm notification for a specific device or channel, see the Hik-Connect Mobile Client User Manual.
Please notify your end users to download or update the Hik-Connect Mobile Client (V 4.15.0 or later). You can send the QR code or download link shown in the banner on the Home page to them.

Video Tutorial

The following video shows that what is a linkage rule and how to set a linkage rule.

7.5.2 Add Exception Rule

An exception rule is used to monitor the status of managed resources in real time. When the resource is exceptional, the resource will push a notification to the Hik-Partner Pro to notify the specified Installer(s) about this exception. Currently, the exceptions include two types: device exceptions and channel exceptions.

Before You Start

Make sure you have the permission for configuration of the device. For applying configuration permission, refer to Apply for Device Permission .
Make sure you have enabled the device to send notifications to the system (if the device supports). For details, refer to Enable Device to Send Notifications .

You can add a rule to define such a notification. The rule contains five elements, including Source (device A or channel A), Exception (the exception occurred on device A or channel A), Received by (the source pushes a notification to notify the recipient via certain ways), Recipient (who can receive the notification), as well as Schedule (when the recipient can receive the notification).

Steps

CS Note

This function is not supported by the solar camera.

On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your country or region).
Click the name of a site to enter the site details page, and then click Exception.

The exception rules of all the devices added in this site are displayed by default.

Optional: Click Unfold Channels to display all the channels of the device.

Example

For security control panels, all the zones and alarm outputs are displayed.

Set the types of exceptions which can trigger the notification.

Move the cursor to the Exception field of the device or channel and click

	( ■ )
	( ■ )
Name 1 (	Exception Received by Recipient Schedule All Exceptions
	Site Manager All Days
Camera 01	All Exceptions

Figure 7-17 Edit Exception

Check the exception type(s) that you want to set exception rules for.

‘Note

For Offline exception, you can set the threshold of offline duration. When the device or channel is offline for longer than this threshold, an offline exception will be triggered.
The threshold of offline duration should be between 5 and 120 minutes.
For network switch, you can set exception rules for the following: PoE Port Power Off, SFP Port Disconnected, RJ45 Port Disconnected, Port Blocked, Port Busy, and PoE Power Exceeds Limit.

Click OK.
Set where the notifications will be sent.

Move the cursor to the Received by field and click — .

Check the receiving mode(s) according to actual needs.

Portal

When an exception is detected, the device will push an notification to the Portal in real time.

The Portal is checked by default and you cannot edit it.

□S Note

For checking the received notification in Portal, refer to Exception Center .

Hik-Partner Pro App

When an exception is detected, the device will push an notification to the Hik-Partner Pro Mobile Client in real time.

Email

When an exception is detected, the device will push an notification to the Hik-Partner Pro, and the system will send an email with the exception details to the email address(es) of the recipient(s) in real time.

Hik-Connect App (Site Owner)

When an exception is detected, the device will push an notification to the Hik-Connect Mobile Client, used by your customer in real time.

CU Note

For alarm devices, this option is enabled by default and you cannot disabled it.

Click OK.
Set who will receive the notification.

Move the cursor to the Recipient field and click ‘ .

Select Site Manager or Installer Admin. The recipient can receive the notification when the exception is detected in real time.

Note

The Site Manager is checked by default and you cannot edit it.
If you select Hik-Connect App (Site Owner) in the previous step, your customer will receive the exception notifications.

Click OK.
Set when the recipient can receive the notification.

Move the cursor to the Schedule field and click — .

Select the schedule.

All Day

The recipient can always receive the notification from Monday to Sunday, 7 days x 24 hours.

Custom

Customize the days and time period on the selected days according to the actual needs.

Click OK.
Optional: Set or edit the exception rules of the devices in the site in a batch.
Click Batch Edit.
Check the devices or channels you want to set the exception rules.

Click — in the bottom to set/edit the exception types, receiving mode, recipient, and notification time.

Figure 7-18 Batch Set/Edit Exception Rules

Click OK to save the settings.
Optional: After setting one rule, you can copy the rule settings to other devices or channels for quick settings.
Click Copy to.
In the Copy Exception Settings from field, select device(s) or channel(s) as the sources.
In the To field, select the target resources of the same type as the selected sources.
Click Copy to copy the rule settings of the sources to the target resources and back to the exception rule list. Or you can click Copy and Continue to copy the rule settings and continue to copy other settings.
After setting the exception rule, you need to set the Enable switch in the upper-right corner of the rule to on to enable the device’s exception rule, or set the Enable All switch to on to enable the all the devices’ exception rules in the site.

After enabling the rule, it will be active and when an exception occurs, the device will push a notification according to the settings in the rule.

7.5.3 Enable Device to Send Notifications

After adding and enabling a linkage rule or exception rule, you should make sure the Notification functionality of the Source device is enabled so that the events detected by the device can be uploaded to the Hik-Partner Pro system and the Hik-Connect Mobile Client, which is the prerequisite to trigger the linkage actions and exception rules defined in the Source-device-related linkage rule(s) and exception rule(s) respectively.

Steps

C®Note

The device should support this functionality. If you have activated the health monitoring service for the device, the Notification function of the device is enabled by default. For details about activating the health monitoring service, refer to Activate the Health Monitoring Service for Devices .

On the navigation pane, click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site (or Customer Site if HikCentral Connect is not available in your country or region).
Click a site in the site list to enter the site details page.
Select the Device tab.
Click – ^ A to open the Notification Settings window.

Figure 7-19 Notification Settings

Set the parameters.

Notification

Make sure the functionality is enabled.

Notification Schedule

After enabling the Notification functionality, set a time schedule for uploading the events detected by the Source to the Hik-Partner Pro system and the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

You can select date(s) and then set the start time and end time for each selected date.

Click OK.

CU Note

Please notify the end user after handing over the site to her/him that notification of the Source should be kept enabled on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client, or the Linkage Action will NOT be activated no matter the Triggering Event is detected by Source or not. For details about enabling alarm notification for a specific device or channel, see the Hik-Connect Mobile Client User Manual.
Please notify your end users to download or update the Hik-Connect Mobile Client (V 4.15.0 or later). You can send the QR code or download link shown in the banner on the Home page to them.
1. Reset Device Password

You can reset the password of a device when you and the Site Owner both lost the password. Two methods of resetting device password are available: resetting password offsite (when you are not at the site) and resetting password onsite (when you are at the site).

OS Note

Resetting password via the Hik-Partner Pro platform is not supported by every device type/ model. For example, AX PRO does not support this function.
Make sure that the device is authorized by the Site Owner to you before resetting device password. For details, see Apply for Site Authorization from Site Owner.

On the navigation pane, click Site to enter Site page.

Select the device and click « * • ^ Reset Device admin Password . There are two methods to reset password.

Reset Password Offsite: You needn’t go to the site where the device is located to reset the device password. This method can be used when you are not at the site.

CIS Note

Make sure that Hik-Connect (the Mobile Client for your customers) and the device are on the same LAN and that the version of Hik-Connect is V 4.15.0 or later.

Refer to the flow chart below for resetting the password offsite.

Figure 7-20 Flow Chart of Resetting Device Password Offsite

• Reset Password Onsite: You need to go to the site where the device is located. This method can be used when you are at the site.

OS Note

Make sure that Hik-Partner Pro (the Installer platform) and the device are on the same LAN.

Refer to the flow chart below for resetting the password onsite.

Figure 7-21 Flow Chart of Resetting Device Password Onsite

1. Enable Remote Log Collection

Remote Log Collection is for getting device logs. When this function is enabled, the technical support can collect device logs remotely for troubleshooting. You can set the validity period for collecting remote logs as needed, and this function will be automatically disabled when the validity period expires.

Before You Start

Make sure you have added the device which supports remote log collection to the site, and the site has not been handed over to the end user. If the site has been handed over to the end user, you should contact with the end user to enable the Remote Log Collection function on Hik-Connect.

Steps

Enter the site list page.
Click a site to enter the site details page.

The devices added in the current site are displayed.

Find the device in the device list, and click Remote Log Collection; or click the device to enter its details page, and click Remote Log Collection.

• Online ©Activated

Device Serial No.: C

Device Type: Alarm Device

£°3 Remote Configuration Add Linkage Rule I Remote Log Collection

Figure 7-22 First Entry to Remote Log Collection

Figure 7-23 Second Entry to Remote Log Collection

The Remote Log Collection window pops up.

Click Authorize.
Select the validity period from the drop-down list.

Note

The function of remote log collection will be automatically disabled when the validity period expires.

Click Enable to enable the function.

The Remote Log Collection icon turns from k to .

Optional: Disable the function.
Click Remote Log Collection.
Click Deauthorize in the pop-up window.

7.8 Manage Security Control Panel

You can add and manage AX PRO, AX HUB, AX HYBRID, and AX HYBIRD PRO security control panels on Hik-Partner Pro.

C0 Note

The following chapter introduces functionality supported by AX PRO / AX HYBIRD PRO security control panel (hereinafter referred to as “AX PRO / AX HYBIRD PRO device”), including batch arming/disarming and batch device configuration by template.
AX HUB or AX HYBRID security control panel does not support the functionality introduced in the following chapter. AX HUB and AX HYBRID support generic device management, such as enabling ARC service, running health monitoring, setting rules for linkage or exception reporting, and configuring parameters remotely. For details, refer to Enable ARC Service for Devices , Health Monitoring , Linkage Rule and Exception Rule, and Remote Configuration respectively.
- 1. Control AX PRO and AX HYBIRD PRO

You can perform operations including arming/disarming area, clearing alarm, and bypassing zone.

Click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site or Customer Site to enter the site list page, and then click the name of a site to enter site details page.

Click the AX PRO or AX HYBIRD PRO device to open the operation panel. You can perform the following operations.

Function	Operation
Stay Arm an Area	Select the Area tab, and then click Stay Arming to stay arm the area.
Away Arm an Area	Select the Area tab and then click Away Arming.
Disarm an Area	Select the Area tab and then click Disarm.
Stay Arm Multiple Areas	Select the Area tab. Select areas and click ft .

Function	Operation
Away Arm Multiple Areas	Select the Area tab. Select areas and click .
Disarm Multiple Areas	Select the Area tab. Select areas and click ft .
Clear Alarms of Multiple Areas	Select the Area tab. Select areas and click □ . C@Note This function is not supported by the AX HYBIRD PRO device.
Filter Peripheral Device by Area	Select the Device tab. Click v and select an area to only display the peripheral devices linked to the selected area, or select All to display all peripheral devices linked to all the areas. CH] Note The AX HYBIRD PRO device only supports adding keyfobs as the peripheral device.
Bypass Zone	Select the Device tab. Select a zone (i.e., detector) and turn on the Bypass switch to bypass the zone. JNote This function is not supported by the AX HYBIRD PRO device.

Figure 7-24 Operation Panel of AX PRO

- 1. Configure AX PRO and AX HYBIRD PRO

You can remotely configure AX PRO and AX HYBIRD PRO device parameters, apply for PIN (required for upgrading firmware), and switch the language of the device.

Click Site & HCC ^ Customer Site or Customer Site to enter the site list page, and then click the name of a site to enter site details page.

Remotely Configure AX PRO / AX HYBIRD PRO

You can click @ Remote Configuration to enter the web page of the device to configure its parameters.

Note

For details about remote configuration, see the user manual of the device.

Apply for a PIN

You can click • * « ^ gj Apply for a PIN to get a PIN code for verification.

Figure 7-25 Apply for a PIN

Switch Language

You can click * * * ^ -l Language and set the device language. After you click OK, a pop-up window will ask you if you need to reset the names of the device and its areas. Click Reset to switch the device language and switch the names to the default names in the switched language; click Cancel to switch the device language only.

Note

A PIN code is required for switching language.

Figure 7-26 Language Window

- 1. Batch Configure AX PRO

You can batch configure parameters for the added AX PRO devices by creating templates. You can also batch upgrade the firmware of multiple AX PRO devices.

OS Note

Only AX PRO devices (Version 1.1.0 and later) and AX HYBRID PRO devices are supported.
The function is only supported in certain countries and regions.

Create a Template

You can create a template for batch configuring parameters of AX PRO devices.

Go to Install & Config ^ Remote Batch Config ^ Manage Template to enter Manage Template page.
Add a template.

Click Add Template for adding a template for the first time.
If not, click .

Edit the template by configuring parameters as needed, and these configured parameters can be batch applied to AX PRO devices later. See the following for the detailed parameters explanations.

Arming Schedule

Enable auto Arm

Enable the function and set the arming start time. The area will be automatically armed according to the configured time.

Enable auto Disarm

Enable the function and set the disarming start time. The area will be automatically disarmed according to the configured time.

US Note

The auto arming time and the auto disarming time cannot be the same.

Late to Disarm

Enable the device to push a notification to the phone or tablet to remind the user to disarm the area when the area is still armed after a specific time point.

Weekend Exception

Enable the function and the area will not be armed or disarmed on the weekend.

Holiday Exception

Enable the function and set the holiday schedule. The area will not be armed or disarmed on the holiday.

OS Note

You can set up to 12 holiday groups.

Panel Alarm Duration

The time duration of the panel alarm.

Alarm Receiving Center

Protocol Type

Select ADM-CID, ISUP, SIA-DCS, *SIA-DCS, *ADM-CID, CSV-IP, FSK Module, RDC Module and IDS Module as the protocol type.

US Note

When selecting *SIA-DCS or *ADM-CID, you should configure the Encryption Arithmetic and Secret Key.

Address Type (Alarm Receiver Server)

Select IP or Domain Name as the address type, and enter the IP address or domain name of the alarm receiver server accordingly.

Port No. (Alarm Receiver Server)

Enter the port No., of the alarm receiver server.

Account Code

Enter the assigned account provided by the alarm receiving center.

Transmission Mode

Select TCP or UDP as the transmission mode from.

Impulse Counting Time

Set the timeout period waiting for the receiver to respond. Re-transmission will be arranged if the transceiver of receiving center is timed out.

Attempts

Set the maximum number that re-transmission will be tried.

Polling Rate

Enable the function and set the interval between 2 live polling.

Event Types Notification (Alarm Receiving Center)

Select which alarm receiving center to receive event notifications and the corresponding event types, including alarms and tampers, life safety alarms, maintenance and faults, zone alarm/lid opened, etc.

Notification by Email

Enable the function of sending video verification event and configure the related parameters including the sender’s name and email address, the SMTP server’s IP address and port No., and the receiver’s name and email address, etc.

Server Authentication

If enabled, you should enter the sender’s user name and password.

FTP Settings

Address Type

Select IP or Domain Name as the address type, and enter the IP address or domain name of the FTP server accordingly.

Port No.

Enter the port No. of the FTP server.

Protocol Type

Select FTP or SFTP as the protocol type.

User Name

Enter the user name of the FTP server.

Password

Enter the password of the FTP server.

Enable Anonymity

If enabled, you do not need to enter the user name and password of the FTP server.

OS Note

This function is only available when selecting FTP as the protocol type.

Directory Structure

The saving path of snapshots in the FTP server.

Batch Configure AX PRO by Template

You can batch configure parameters for AX PRO devices by the predefined template.

Steps

Go to Install & Config ^ Remote Batch Config .
Select multiple AX PRO devices to be configured.
Click Set Parameters by Template.

A window of Set Parameters by Template pops up on the right side.

Select a template from the list.

Note

If you have not added a template, you should click Manage Template to enter Manage Template page and add a template for AX PRO devices. For details, refer to Create a Template .
You can view the general template content on the lower side.

Optional: Click Details to view the details of the template.
Click Apply to start applying parameters to the devices.

What to do next

View the applying results. If applying failed, you can view the failure reasons.

Batch Upgrade AX PRO

You can batch upgrade the firmware of multiple AX PRO devices to ensure the proper functioning of these devices. If the firmware version of an AX PRO device is too old, some features might be unavailable.

Steps

Go to Install & Config ^ Remote Batch Config to enter the page shown below.

Figure 7-27 Remote Batch Configuration

Select AX PRO devices and then click Upgrade.

The Upgrade Device window will pop up.

Click Apply for a PIN to get one.

The PIN code will be automatically entered.

Click Update.

7.8.4 Batch Arm/Disarm AX PRO and AX HYBRID PRO

You can batch arm or disarm multiple AX PRO / AX HYBRID PRO devices on multiple sites by grouping the devices. For example, assume that your customer needs to have her office building cleaned in the period from 7:00 a.m. to 8:00 a.m. everyday, you can add all the AX PRO / AX HYBRID PRO devices in the building to a group and then disarm the group in the period everyday to avoid the nuisance of false alarms triggered by the cleaning.

Follow the steps to create a group of AX PRO / AX HYBRID PRO devices and then control the group.

Steps

OS Note

This function is only available in some countries/regions.

Go to Install & Config ^ Batch Arm/Disarm .

Figure 7-28 Batch Arm/Disarm Page

Click Add Group.
Create a name for the group.
Add devices to the group.
Click Add and select the devices in different Sites.

OS Note

Only devices of which you have the Configuration permission can be added.
Up to 500 devices can be added to one group.

Click OK.
Optional: Select devices and click Delete to remove them from the group.
Click OK.

Figure 7-29 Add Group for Batch Arming Control

Optional: Perform further operations.

View Group Click on the group to view its details, including devices in the group and their

Details arming/disarming status.

Arm/ Click Stay Arm or Away Arm to arm all devices in the group. Or click Disarm to Disarm disarm the group.

Group

□3 Note

•

If you leave the page after starting arming/disarming, you can click in the upper-right corner to go back. When the arming/disarming process is completed, a notice of result will pop up. Click Details to check full result.

• You will also be notified on the Mobile Client when the arming/disarming process is completed.

Batch Arm/Disarm

Stay arming Building B completed. Armed device…

Figure 7-30 Notice on the Mobile Client

Check Last Click Last Arming Control Record to check the last arming/disarming results. If Result there are devices that failed to be armed/disarmed, you can check the failure reasons and arm/disarm the failed ones again.

Edit Group Click a ^[3] ^[4] * ^ Edit to edit group name or edit devices in the group.

Delete Click * * * -> Delete to delete the group.

Group

1. View Video

You can view the live video and the recorded video footage of the added encoding device(s).

- 1. View Live Video

By viewing live view of managed cameras, you can check whether the camera is installed and located properly by capturing pictures, recording, PTZ control, etc.

Click Encoding Device on the top of the Site Detail page to show all the encoding devices of the site. Select an encoding device and click D to start live view. The live view will work for up to five minutes. When the live view ends, you can still start a new live view.

Hover the cursor on the live view window and click icons on the tool bar to start recording, conduct digital zoom and PTZ control, capture a picture, switch image quality, and turn on/off audio. Double-click the live view image to enter the full-screen mode, and double-click the image again to exit full-screen mode. the device verification code, ask the end user for it. For details about Image and Video Encryption, see Hik-Connect Mobile Client User Manual.

Please inform your end users to download or update the Hik-Connect Mobile Client (V 4.15.0 or later). You can send the QR code or download link shown in the banner on the Home page to them.
Make sure the device is online, otherwise the function cannot be used.
- 1. Play Back Video Footage

Video playback shows what happens when emergencies occur. If an end user approves your application for device playback permission, you will be able to play back the recorded video footage stored on the device.

dlNote

Make sure your account has the permission for playback. Otherwise, you cannot enter the playback page. See Apply for Device Permission for details about applying device permission.
This function needs to be supported by device.
Make sure you have configured recording schedule for the device and there is video footage stored in the device.

On the Device tab page, select a device and click . to enter the playback page. You can select a date and time on the calendar to view the playback during a certain time range.

You can select channels from the drop-down list on the top right. Drag the time bar at the bottom to jump to different video footage. Hover the cursor on the time bar and zoom in the time bar to select a more accurate time. Hover the cursor on a playback window and click icons on the tool bar to capture a picture, clip video footage, perform digital zoom, download video footage, and turn on the audio.

For devices (including the added online devices) added by Hik-Connect Service without configuring DDNS, the playback will work for up to five minutes; for devices added by IP/Domain Name, and devices (including the added online devices) added by Hik-Connect Service with DDNS configured, the playback duration is not limited.

dJNote

Up to four playback windows are supported.

1. Other Management

You can perform more operations for device management, including upgrading device firmware, unbinding device from its current account, configuring DDNS for devices added by Hik-Connect service, and remotely configure parameters for devices such as encoding devices and security control devices.

- 1. Upgrade Device

On the device list page, O will appear beside the name of a device if it is upgradable. You can upgrade the device to make it compatible with the Hik-Partner Pro.

Steps

OS Note

The function is supported by devices such as security control panels (including AX PRO), doorbells, and certain models of network cameras, Hik-Partner Pro boxs, and DVRs/NVRs that support cloud storage.
The system supports upgrading encoding device, some access control devices and video intercom devices connected to the same LAN with the PC where the platform runs.
You can also upgrade devices in the Health Monitoring module. For details, see Health Monitoring .
You can also upgrade devices when you add them. See Add Detected Online Device and Add Device by Entering Serial No. for details.

Click a site name to enter the site details page.
Hover over 0 , click Upgrade Device and then select upgradable device(s).
Click Upgrade.
Optional: If there are devices which have enabled EN50131 Compliant mode, enter the device passwords and click OK.

CIS Note

Once started, the upgrade cannot be stopped. Make sure a power failure or network disconnection does not happen during the upgrade.
You can enable EN50131 Compliant mode on device configuration page via the Web Client. See device user manual for details.
For the device failed to be upgraded, you can click a to download the upgrade firmware package, and then upgrade the device on the remote configuration page of device or via other upgrade tools.

A window will pop up showing the upgrade progress. If there are devices failed to be upgraded, the causes will be displayed on the window.

- 1. Batch Upgrade Devices on LAN

You can batch upgrade devices (security control panels, encoding devices, doorbells, etc.) on the same LAN to make the devices compatible with Hik-Partner Pro, if there are new firmware versions of the devices.

Click Install & Config ^ On-Site Batch Upgrade .

HS Note

A video tutorial about how to use search tool for important firmware update on Hik-Partner Pro Portal will pop up in the lower-right corner of the page.

Select device(s) that need to be upgraded.
Click Upgrade Online or Upgrade by Local File to upgrade the selected device(s).
- 1. Unbind a Device from Its Current Account

When you add detected online device(s), if the adding result page shows that a device has been added to another account, you need to unbind it first before you can add it to your account. The device unbinding functionality is useful when you need to add a device to a new account but have no access to delete it from the old account (e.g., if you forgot the password of the old account).

OS Note

For details about adding detected online device, see Add Detected Online Device .
If you checked Allow Me to Disable Hik-Connect Service when handing over a Site to your customer, you cannot unbind the devices added to this Site. For details about Site handover, see Hand Over Site .

On the adding result page, click in the Operation column, and then enter the device password and click OK to unbind it from its current account. When the device is unbound, you can click in the Operation column to add the device to your account.

CS Note

If the device firmware does not support device unbinding, you are required to enter a CAPTCHA code after entering device password.

- 1. Configure DDNS for Devices

For devices with invalid or old firmware version, you can configure DDNS for them to make sure they can be managed by Hik-Partner Pro properly.

Steps

C® Note

Only encoding devices added by Hik-Connect (P2P) support this function.

On the navigation pane, click Site to enter Site page.
Select a device, and click < * * ^ ~ to open the DDNS Settings window.
Switch Enable DDNS on to show the DDNS parameters.

‘Note

You can click How to set port? to learn the configuration.

Select Port Mapping Mode.

Auto

In this mode, the service port and HTTP port are obtained automatically, and you cannot edit them after obtaining them.

Manual

You enter the service port and HTTP port manually.

Enter the device’s domain name.
Enter the user name and password.

Caution

Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the installer and/or end-user.

Click OK.
- 1. Remote Configuration

You can perform device remote configuration if you need.

CSNote

Only site manager can perform the following operations and configurations of a site. See Assign Site to Installer for details about assigning site.

On the navigation pane, click Site to enter Site page. Click a site’s name to enter the site’s page.

And then click Device tab to show the site’s devices.

Click @ to open the remote configuration page of the device and set the device’s parameters.

dJNote

Only doorbells, encoding devices, indoor stations, and security control panels support remote configuration.
Make sure the device is online, otherwise the function cannot be used.
For doorbells, you don’t need to enter the device user name and password before accessing the remote configuration page.
For encoding devices, if you have already entered the device’s user name and password when adding it, you do not need to enter these information before remote configuration. For NVR and DVR, operations including rebooting, HDD formatting, and network settings are supported.
For security control devices:

° If the security control device is in the same LAN with the Portal, you need to enter the user name and password before accessing the remote configuration page.

° If the AX Hub device and AX Hybrid device are not in the same LAN and EN50131 Compliant mode is enabled, you need to enter the devices’ admin passwords for verification first. After that, you can enter their remote configuration page after entering password of setter account.

For encoding devices and security control devices, if the device is not in the same local area network with the Portal, some operations in the remote configuration (such as device account management, enabling Hik-Connect, and restoring device, etc.) are not available.
See device user manual for details about remote configuration.
If you have changed device parameters by other software or client (such as device page, Hik- Partner Pro Mobile Client, iVMS-4200, , HikCentral Professional, etc.), and the parameters on the Portal’s remote configuration page are not updated to the latest, you can click Clear Cache in the drop-down list on the top right of the remote configuration page to update the device parameters.

Chapter 8 Health Monitoring

The Health Status module provides near-real-time information about the status of the devices added to the sites. If you have added network switches to a site, you can view the device status and link status in a visualized way via network topology. The status information, which is of importance for the maintenance of devices managed across the Hik-Partner Pro platform as a whole, helps you locate the source of exceptions and determine troubleshooting methods in time.

‘Note

A video tutorial on how to check device health status will pop up in the lower-right corner of the page when you enter the Health Status module.
For Installer, you can only view the status information of devices on the site assigned to you. For Installer Admin, you can view the status information of devices on all sites.
When any exception occurs during health monitoring, the notification will appear in the

Exception Center under the Notification Center module. See details in Exception Center .

1. View Status of Devices in All Sites

For Installer, you can view the status of each device type in all the sites which has been assigned to you. For Installer Admin, you can view the status of each device type in all the sites.

Click Health Monitoring ^ Health Status on the Navigation panel to enter the Health Monitoring page, and then select All Sites from the site list.

You can view the total number of devices and the number of abnormal devices of each device type.

Refer to the following table to get to the device description and operations.

Table 8-1 Links of Different Device Types

Encoding Device	Refer to *Encoding Device* .
Access Control Device	Refer to *Access Control Device* .
Alarm Device	Refer to *Alarm Device* .
Video Intercom Device	Refer to *Video Intercom Device* .
Doorbell	Refer to *Doorbell* .
Hik-ProConnect Box	Refer to *Hik-ProConnect Box* .
Network Switch	Refer to *Network Switch* .

Encoding Device

You can view the status including network status, the number of offline linked cameras, storage status, HDD usage, last inspected time, overwritten recording status, etc.

OS Note

For analog camera, you can view the status if video loss occurs.

Offline Cameras

The number on the left of the slash represents the number of offline/total cameras linked to the device.

Offline Duration

The column displays offline duration of devices in the format of “x Day(s) x Hour(s) x Minute(s)”. If the offline duration is less than one day, the duration will be displayed as “x Hour(s) x Minute(s) x Second(s)”. You can clickOffline Duration to sort devices by offline duration.

You can perform the following operations.

Operation	Description
View Device Name and Version	Hover the cursor over the device name to view its device type and device version.
Remotely Configure Device	Click ¡§j in the Operation column to remotely configure the device parameters. For details, see the device user manual.
Inspect All Encoding Devices	Click Refresh to inspect all the encoding devices in all sites.
Inspect Selected Encoding Device	Click c in the Operation column to inspect the selected encoding device manually.
Display Abnormal Devices	Check Display Abnormal Devices Only to display the abnormal devices only.
Display Authorized Devices	Check Display Authorized Devices Only to display the devices of which configuration permission has been authorized to you.
View Camera Status	Click > to show the cameras linked to the device, and then you can view the online/offline status of each camera.
View HDD Information of DVR	Click > to show the HDD information of the DVR, including self-inspection evaluation result, overall evaluation result, running status,

Operation	Description
	running time, HDD temperature, and S.M.A.R.T information.
View Site Owner and Site Manager Information	Move the cursor to V in the Site column to view the information of the Site Owner and Site Manager, such as name and phone number.
Live View	Click Bi in the Operation column and then select camera(s) to view live video(s). CH Note If you have no permission to view the live video, you can apply for the live view permission from the end user. For details, see *Apply for Device Permission* . If a selected camera has enabled stream encryption, you should enter the device verification code before you can view its live video. The device verification code is created when you connecting the device to the Hik- Connect service. For details, see *Add* *Detected Online Device* .
Apply for Permission or Reconfigure Device	0 appearing beside the device name represents that you have no configuration permission for it, the IP address/domain set for the device is invalid, or DDNS is invalid. You can hover the cursor on the icon, and then apply for the permission from the end user, reconfigure its IP address/domain, or reconfigure DDNS respectively based on the prompts.

Operation

Description

DjNote

For details about applying for configuration permission, see Apply for Device Permission .
For details about configuring device IP address/domain, see Add Devices by IP Address or Domain Name .
For details about configuring DDNS, see Configure DDNS for Devices .

Access Control Device

You can view the status including network status, door number, last inspected time, etc.

You can perform the following operations.

Operation	Description
View Device Name and Version	Hover the cursor over the device name to view its device type and device version.
Inspect All Access Control Devices	Click Refresh to inspect all access control devices.
Inspect Selected Access Control Device	Click c in the Operation column to inspect the selected access control device manually.
Display Abnormal Devices	Check Display Abnormal Devices Only to display the abnormal devices only.
Display Authorized Devices	Check Display Authorized Devices Only to display the devices of which configuration permission has been authorized to you.
View Site Owner and Site Manager Information	Move the cursor to V in the Site column to view the information of the Site Owner and Site Manager, such as name and phone number.
Apply for Permission or Reconfigure Device	0 appearing beside the device name represents that you have no configuration permission for it. You can apply for the permission from the end user.

Operation

Description

DjNote

For details about applying for configuration permission, see Apply for Device Permission .

Alarm Device

You can view the status including network status, remaining battery power, ARC ID, number of abnormal peripheral devices, etc.

Note

Displaying peripheral device’s remaining power is not supported.

You can perform the following operations.

Operation	Description
View Device Name and Version	Hover the cursor over the device name to view its device type and device version.
Remotely Configure Device	Click in the Operation column to remotely configure the device parameters. For details, see the device user manual. HZXlNote Remote configuration is not supported if the device is armed.
Inspect Access Control Device	Click c to inspect access control devices.
Display Abnormal Devices	Check Display Abnormal Devices Only to display the abnormal devices only. After Display Abnormal Devices Only is checked, you can check different exceptions (offline, low battery, lid opened, etc.) to display abnormal devices with different exceptions accordingly.
Export Abnormal Devices	Click Export Abnormal Devices and the Export Abnormal Alarm Devices page will pop up on the right side. You can export the file to the local PC in Excel or CSV format.

Operation	Description
Display Authorized Devices	Check Display Authorized Devices Only to display the devices whose configuration permission has been authorized to you.
Upgrade Device	If 0 appears beside the device name, hover the cursor over the icon and then click Upgrade on the pop-up dialog to upgrade the device. For details, see *Upgrade Device* .
Authenticate or Apply for Permission	© appearing beside the device name represents that EN50131 Compliant mode has been enabled on the device, or that you have no configuration permission for it. For the former situation, you should hover the cursor over the icon and then click Authenticate on the pop-up dialog for authentication before you can view the device status; For the latter situation, you can apply for the permission from the end user. OS Note For details about applying for configuration permission, see *Apply for Device Permission* .
View Zone and Peripheral Device Status	Click > to view the status of the zones and peripheral devices linked to the security control panel.
View Detailed Exceptions	You can hover the cursor over a specific zone to view its detailed exceptions.
View Site Owner and Site Manager Information	Move the cursor to V in the Site column to view the information of the site owner and site manager, such as name and phone number.
Inspect Alarm Device	Click o in the Operation column to inspect the selected alarm device manually.

Video Intercom Device

You can view the status such as network status and last inspected time.

You can perform the following operations.

Operation	Description
View Device Name and Version	Hover the cursor over the device name to view its device type and device version.
Inspect All Video Intercom Devices	Click Refresh to inspect all video intercom devices.
Inspect Selected Video Intercom Device	Click e in the Operation column to inspect the selected device manually.
Display Abnormal Devices	Check Display Abnormal Devices Only to display the abnormal devices only.
Display Authorized Devices	Check Display Authorized Devices Only to display the devices of which configuration permission has been authorized to you.
Apply for Permission or Reconfigure Device	© appearing beside the device name represents that you have no configuration permission for it. You can apply for the permission from the end user. CENote For details about applying for configuration permission, see *Apply for Device Permission* .

Doorbell

You can view the information including device model, network status, SD card status, last checked time, etc.

You can perform the following operations.

Operation	Description
View Device Name and Version	Hover the cursor over the device name to view its device type and device version.
Inspect All Doorbells	Click Refresh to inspect all doorbells.
Inspect Selected Doorbell	Click o in the Operation column to inspect the selected doorbell manually.
Display Abnormal Devices	Check Display Abnormal Devices Only to display the abnormal devices only.

Operation	Description
Display Authorized Devices	Check Display Authorized Devices Only to display the devices whose configuration permission has been authorized to you only.
Remotely Configure Device	Click $ in the Operation column to remotely configure parameters of the device. For details, see the user manual of the device.
Live View	Click Bi in the Operation column and then select camera(s) to view live video(s). CH Note If you have no permission to view the live video, you can apply for the live view permission from the end user. For details, see *Apply for Device Permission* . If a selected camera has enabled stream encryption, you should enter the device verification code before you can view its live video. The device verification code is created when you connecting the device to the Hik- Connect service. For details, see *Add* *Detected Online Device* .
Upgrade Device	If © appears beside the device name, hover the cursor over the icon and then click Upgrade on the pop-up dialog to upgrade the device. For details, see *Upgrade Device* .
Apply for Permission	© appearing beside the device name represents that you have no configuration permission for it. You can apply for the permission from the end user. CS Note For details about applying for configuration permission, see *Apply for Device Permission* .

Hik-ProConnect Box

View information including network status of the box, number of offline channels (cameras) added to the box, and the latest time when the device was inspected.

You can perform the following operations:

Operation	Description
View Device and Channel Information	Click to view the basic information (e.g., device serial number and device model) and the detailed list of online and offline channels.
Remotely Configure Device	Click $ in the Operation column to remotely configure parameters of the device. For details, see the user manual of the device.
Inspect Selected Device	Click e in the Operation column to inspect the selected device manually.

Network Switch

View information including network status of the switch (online/offline), the number of online ports of the switch, and the latest time when the device was inspected.

You can also perform the following operations:

Operation	Description
Inspect Selected Device	Click e in the Operation column to inspect the selected device manually.
Remotely Reboot Device	Click § in the Operation column to reboot the network switch remotely.
View Typology	Click 5 in the Operation column to view the topology of this switch. For details about topology, refer to *Network Topology* .
View Switch Details	Click > to view the detailed information of the switch, including the memory usage, CPU usage, POE power, peak POE power, working duration, port status (alarm, normal, not connected). □S Note Working duration refers to the time from when the switch is turned on till the current moment. If the switch is turned off, its working duration will be recounted when turned on again.

Figure 8-1 Switch Details

On the Switch Details page, You can perform the following operations:

Operation	Description
View Enlarged Port Picture	Hover the cursor onto the switch picture to view the enlarged picture of the ports.
Clear Alarm	For port with alarm(s), click ^ Clear Alarm to clear the alarm(s) of this port.
Restart Port	For the abnormal port, click ^ Restart Port to restart this port.
Extend Port Transmission Range	Click ^ Enable Extend Mode/Disable Extend Mode to extend the transmission range of this port or not. 1’Note When enabled, the transmission range of the port will be extended from 200 to 300 m. Meanwhile, its bandwidth will be limited within 10 Mbps.

1. View Status of Devices in a Specific Site

You can view the status of devices in a specific site which has been assigned to you.

Steps

Click Health Monitoring ^ Health Status on the Navigation panel to enter the Health Status page.
Select a specific site from the site list.

The status of the devices in the site will be displayed.

Optional: Perform the following operations.

Filter Data	Check Display Abnormal Devices Only to display the abnormal device(s) only. Check Display Authorized Devices Only to display the device(s) of which configuration permission has been authorized to you only.
Upgrade Device Firmware	If there are device(s) available for upgrade, a number in red will be displayed on Upgrade showing the number of upgradable device(s). You can click Upgrade, select the upgradable device(s), and then click Upgrade to upgrade them. Select a device to view its basic information. If the device firmware is upgradable, you can click Upgrade in the Firmware Version field to upgrade it. □S Note For details, see *Upgrade Device* .
Diagnose Devices of the Site	Click Health Check to open the Health Check window, and click Check Now to diagnose the devices of the site. When the checking completed, you can view the status of each device in the site. For AX PRO security control panel, NVR, and DVR, you can click View Report to export the diagnostics report as a PDF file to the local PC.
View Site Owner Information	Click Site Owner to view the Site Owner information, including name, email address, and phone number.
View Site Manager Information	Click Site Manager to view the Site Manager information, including name, email address and phone number. Up to 100 site managers can be displayed.
Inspect Devices in the Sites	Click Refresh to inspect all the devices in the site.
Remote Configuration	Select a device and then click Remote Configuration to remotely configure the parameters of the device. El® Note The device should be online, or remote configuration will be unavailable. For details, see the user manual of the device.

Inspect a Single Device	Select a device and then click to inspect it.
Reconfigure IP/ Domain of Encoding Device	Move the cursor to , and then click Edit IP/Domain to reconfigure the device’s IP/domain. For details about configuring IP/Domain, see *Add* *Devices by IP Address or Domain Name* .
Reconfigure DDNS	Move the cursor to © , and then click Configure DDNS to reconfigure the device’s DDNS. For details about configuring DDNS, see *Configure* *DDNS for Devices* .
View Encoding Device Details	You can view the network status, storage status, HDD usage, and overwritten recording status, etc. You also click the encoding device to view its details, including basic information such as device type and serial No., and the network status of each camera linked to it. You can click □ and select linked cameras, and then click to view live videos. If the encoding device is a DVR, you can also view its HDD information, including self-inspection evaluation result, overall evaluation result, running status, running time, HDD temperature, and S.M.A.R.T information. For analog camera, you can view if video loss occurs. □J Note If you have no permission to view the live video, you can apply for the live view permission from the end user. For details, see *Apply for* *Device Permission* . If a camera has enabled stream encryption, you should enter its device verification code in the pop-up window before you can view its live video. The device verification code is created when you connecting the camera to the Hik-Connect service. For details, see *Add Detected* *Online Device* .
View Access Control Device Details	Click an access control device to view its details, including basic information such as device type and serial No., and the device status including network status and the number of its linked doors.
View Security Control Panel Details	Click a security control panel to view its details, including the basic information of the security control panel, and status of the zones, the linked peripheral devices, and the linked cameras. The following list shows the description of each status icon. J : Sufficient battery power. ii : Insufficient battery power.

	O : Normal strength of the communication signals between the peripheral device and the security control panel. © : Weak strength of the communication signals between the peripheral device and the security control panel. j> : Alarm triggered. S : Device tampered. À : Zone bypassed. A : Trigger exception.
View Video Intercom Device Details	Click a video intercom device to view its basic information and its network status.
View Doorbell Details	Click a doorbell to view its basic information (including device model, device type, and device serial No.) If the camera(s) are linked to the doorbell, you can also click a linked camera to view the live video.
View Hik- ProConnect Box Details	Click a Hik-ProConnect box to view its basic information and the channel(s) added to it. You can also view the online status of the added channel(s).
View Network Switch Details	The network switches are displayed by card. Click a switch to view its information, including the device model, device type, device serial No., the time of last inspection, network status, memory usage, CPU usage, PoE Power, peak PoE power in latest 70 days, working duration, port status (alarm, normal, not connected). □J Note Working duration refers to the time from when the switch is turned on till the current moment. If the switch is turned off, its working duration will be recounted when turned on again. Hover the cursor onto the picture of switch to view the enlarged picture of the switch. Click ‘E Topology at the top of the page to view the topology of this switch. For details about topology, refer to *Network Topology* . Click in the Operation column to inspect the device manually. For port with alarm(s), click ^ Clear Alarm to clear the alarm(s) of this port. For the abnormal port, click ^ Restart Port to restart this port. Click ^ Enable Extend Mode/Disable Extend Mode to extend the transmission range of this port or not.

CE Note

When enabled, the transmission range of the port will be extended to 200 to 300 m. Meanwhile, its bandwidth will be limited within 10 Mbps.

1. Send Report Regularly

You can set up schedules for the platform to generate and send device health check reports to the specified email addresses automatically, so that the recipients can get regular updates on the health status of important devices and compare the report of each period.

Before You Start

Make sure you have activated the Health Monitoring service.

Steps

Go to Health Monitoring ^ Scheduled Report .

CIS Note

All sites available for this feature are shown on the page automatically.
The platform only supports automatically sending health check reports of encoding devices and AX PRO security control panels on authorized sites.
Sites without the above-mentioned types of devices or sites that are not authorized to you will NOT be shown on the page.

Enter the editing mode.

To configure the report sending schedule for a single site, click Edit on the right side of a site.
To configure the report sending schedule for multiple sites, click Batch Configure and then select the sites you want to configure.

Configure the report sending settings.

Device

Select the device(s) to be health-checked and included in the report.

Send At

Specify the frequency, date, and time of sending the reports. You can set the frequency to Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, Semiannually, or Annually.

Recipient Email Address

Add and edit the email addresses of the recipients.

CS Note

You can check Site Owner’s Email to send a copy of the report to your customer.
Up to 4 email addresses can be added.

Report Language

Choose a language for the report. The report is now available in 39 languages.

Click OK.
Enable the settings.

To enable the settings for one site, switch on Enable for the site.
To enable the settings for all sites, switch on Enable All in the upper-right corner.

The platform will generate and send reports according to the settings.

C® Note

If there are more than three site owners, only the first three can be displayed on the report while the others will be displayed as “…”.

1. Network Topology

If you have added network switch(es) to a site and connected devices to the network switch(es), you can view these devices’ network topology. Network topology displays the network links between devices and shows the link exceptions and abnormal devices, which helps you to locate exception source and troubleshoot faults in a visualized way.

‘Note

Make sure you have the configuration permission of the network switch, otherwise network topology will be unavailable. For details about applying for the configuration permission, see Apply for Device Permission .
If you have not activated the health monitoring service for the network switch, some topology functions (e.g., viewing device status on the topology) will be unavailable. For details about activating the heath monitoring service for devices, see Activate the Health Monitoring Service for Devices .

You can enter the network topology page in the following ways:

On the navigation pane, click Site to enter the Site page, and then click the name of a site to enter the site details page, and then click View Topology.

□S Note

If you have NOT enabled the Health Monitoring service for the network switch, you can enter the network topology page in this way only.

On the navigation pane, click Health Monitoring ^ Health Status , select All Sites from the site list, and then select Network Switch, and then click ?, in the Operation column in the network switch list.
On the navigation pane, click Health Monitoring ^ Health Status , select a site from the site list to enter the site details page, and then click Topology.

Figure 8-2 Network Topology

The following table shows the descriptions of the available operations on network topology.

Table 8-2 Available Operations

Operation		Description
View Legend	Network Cable	You can click y next to More to view the legends. = Optical Fiber ™ Normal ™ Busy ■ Blocked Disconnected
	Device Type fcffj Network Switch Security Control P	fcvr? Virtual Network Switch Li-B Video Intercom Device Access Control Device FT Thermal Camera Speed Dome © N inel Doorbell Hik-ProConnect Box Iffil DVR/NVR Unknown Device Type
	Device Status Xx-xxxxxxxxxxxx-xxxx XXX.XXX.XXX.KXX Normal	TiMR Xx-xxxxxxxxxxxx-xxxx Xx-xxxxxxxxxxxx-xxxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Abnormal Offline Devices not Under the Site Figure 8-3 Legend
Edit Root Node		When multiple network switches are added to a site, the platform will randomly select one of them as the root node by default for

îtwork Camera

Operation	Description
	the network topology. If the randomly-selected network switch is not the real root node, you can hover the cursor over the current root node, and then click g to select a network switch as the root node.
	£ll£& ) 10 18m	E E84

	Figure 8-4 Edit Root Node
Refresh Topology	Click Refresh to refresh the topology structure. □S Note The device status will not be refreshed.
Display in Cards	If you want to view more device status information of all the devices connected to the network switch(es), click Display in Cards to display device information in cards.
Move Network Topology	Drag the network topology to move it.
Zoom In/Out	You can click – / in the upper left corner to zoom in/out the topology.
Adjust Topology Size	You can click •> in the upper left corner to fit the topology size into the display window. You can click : : in the upper left corner to display the topology in full-screen mode.
Display Thumbnail	If you have zoomed in the topology to a large scale, you can click æ to show the thumbnail which shows the current cursor location on the topology.
Search Devices in Topology	You can enter the keyword of a device to search for it on the topology. Once the device is found, the topology will pan and zoom automatically to display the found device.

mjHj

Operation		Description
View Link Information		You can view link information based on the legends shown in the figure below.
	Netw	>rk Cable = Optical Fiber ■ Normal ■■ Busy ™ Blocked (X) Dis	connected
		Figure 8-5 Link Information Legend
View Link Details		You can hover the cursor over a specific link to view its details, such as the upstream, downstream, port name, and port status.
Apply for Configuration Permission		If you don’t have the permission to configure a device, a prompt will pop up asking you to apply for the permission first. You can click Apply for Permission to apply for it. 0@Note If you don’t have the permission, the position of the device in the network topology might be incorrect.
View Network Switch Details and Control It		You can click a network switch on the topology to view the information about the network switch, including basic information, device status, and port status. You can also perform operations such as rebooting the network switch and restarting the port. For details, see *Network Switch* and *View Status of Devices in a Specific Site* . 03 Note You cannot view details of a virtual network switch.
View Another Device’s Details and Configure It		If an online device is connected to the network switch and added to the same site with the network switch, its device icon and device serial number will be displayed. And you can click the device to view its information including the basic information (e.g., device model) and device status (e.g., network status). You can also click » to configure device parameters.

Operation

Description

CSNote

• If an unknown device (e.g., a PC) is connected to the network

• . 1 • , •III 1» 1 1 J™.«™™-™ Al ■ • • ■

switch, it will be displayed as —— . And you cannot view its information.

• If an online device is connected to the network switch but is NOT added to the same site with the network switch, its serial number displayed will be a randomly-generated virtual serial number. And you cannot view its information.

1. Create a Maintenance Quotation

You can create a quotation for providing the device maintenance service for your customer. Thus, you can standardize the service process, improve customer satisfaction, and expand your business.

Before You Start

Make sure your company is authenticated. See Authenticate Account for details.

Steps

Go to Health Monitoring ^ Maintenance Quotation .
Click Create Quotation.
Set the quotation information.

Quotation Details

Enter a name for the quotation, and if needed, edit the quotation No. which is generated automatically.

Customer Information

Set the customer information including the name, email, phone number, and address. Enter the information manually, or click Get from Site and then select a site from the drop-down list to automatically synchronize the customer (site owner) information.

Item

Click Add Item to set the quotation items. Add default items (remote maintenance, health check report, on-site maintenance (annual), on-site maintenance (additional), etc.) or custom items. After adding the items, set the device model, unit price, and quantity. The quotation tool will automatically add up the prices of all set items to calculate the total price.

Set Discount

If needed, enable Set Discount and enter the discount percentage to give your customer a discount.

Set VAT Rate

If needed, enable Set VAT Rate and enter the VAT rate to include the value-added tax.

Service Provider Information

The service provider information, including the name, email, phone number, address, and company logo, is automatically set according to your company information. Edit the information (except for the company logo) if needed.

Optional: Click Preview/Export to see how the quotation will be presented and to export it as a PDF file.
Click Save.

OS Note

You can create no more than 10 quotations if co-branding is enabled; otherwise, you can only create 3 quotations.

Optional: Perform the following operations after creating the quotation.

Edit a Quotation On the quotation list, click Edit to edit a quotation.

Delete a Quotation On the quotation list, click ^ Delete .

Preview/Export a Quotation On the quotation list, click Preview/Export.

Search Operation Log

All operations information (including operator, operating time, site, operation target and result, etc.) of the employees (referring to Installer Admin and Installers) will be recorded so that you can search the operation log(s) of any employee to make sure what makes the sites wrong.

‘Note

This feature is not available to authenticated channel partner.

Click My Hik-Partner ^ Company Management ^ Operation Log to display the employee list and all the operation logs. You can search logs by employee, site, and time.

C0 Note

Logs of all accounts are available for accounts with the permission for managing account and role. For accounts without permission for managing account and role, they can only view their own logs.
Logs of all sites are available for accounts with the permission for managing all sites. For accounts without permission for managing all sites, they can only view the logs of assigned site.

Figure 9-1 Search Operation Logs

Notification Center

The Notification Center module shows all the history business notifications (including device management invitations, site sharing notifications, and notifications about device installation work orders) and notifications of device/channel exceptions, which help you take reactions in time for the smooth running of the devices. The module also keeps you informed about the new features of the system messages and the latest deals and offers.

1. Business Notifications

In the Business Notification module, you can receive the device management invitations from Hik- Connect users for device management on Hik-Partner Pro. You can also receive the notifications concerning site sharing with the Maintenance Service Partner (MSP).

Device Management Invitations

Besides receiving the device management invitation from Hik-Connect users through an email, you can also receive it in the Business Notification on Hik-Partner Pro. After accepting the invitation, you will be able to manage the device on Hik-Partner Pro.

For details about accepting the invitation, refer to Accept a Device Management Invitation from a Hik-Connect User .

Site Sharing Notifications

Both the Installer and the MSP can view the notifications concerning site sharing. For Installers, you can receive site sharing notifications involving the customers and/or the MSP. For example, when the MSP accepts or cancels the site sharing, the customer cancels the site sharing authorization to you and/or the MSP, or the customer modifies your and/or the MSP’s device management permissions.

For MSPs, you can receive site sharing notifications involving the Installer and/or the customers. For example, when the Installer accepts or cancels the site sharing, the Installer shares a site with you and modifies your device management permissions, the customer cancels the site sharing authorization to you and/or the Installer, or the customer modifies your and/or the Installer’s device management permissions.

For details about accepting site sharing, refer to Accept Site Sharing .

Notifications about Work Order for Device Installation

If ARC from HikCentral ReGuard assigns a work order for device installation to the Installer, the message will be displayed in Notification Center ^ Business Notification .

The message shows work order name, person who created it, and telephone number. You can handle the work on the Mobile Client.

1. Exception Center

Exception Center shows all the history notifications of device exceptions and channel exceptions.

OS Note

For Installer Admin, you can view all the exceptions of the devices in all the added sites. For Installers, you can view the exceptions of the devices in the site which has been assigned to you.
Device exception messages can be preserved for up to 90 days.
You need to set the exception rule first. For details, refer to Add Exception Rule .

Go to the Notification Center page. Click Exception Center to enter the Exception Center page.

Filter the Exceptions

You can filter the exceptions according to your actual needs.

Select a site in the site list to view the exceptions of the devices in this site. You can also select a device or a channel to view the exceptions occurred on the device or channel.
Set the time period. The exceptions received during this time period will be displayed.
Set the handling result from All Status, Not Handled, Solved, False Alarm, and To Be Checked.
Select the exception types that you want to check. The exception types include alarm, exception, and operation.

You can switch on Auto-Update so that the latest exceptions received by the Portal will be displayed in the table in real time.

OS Note

The auto-update will be invalid when viewing history records (including records after page 1 and records received before today).

Handle an Exception

When you have solved an exception or you want to mark it for further examinations, you can select the handling result on Hik-Partner Pro. By handling the exceptions, you can better sort the exception list and avoid leaving some exceptions unattended. Your customer (the Site Owner) will also be informed of the handling result on Hik-Connect.

Follow the steps below to handle an exception.

1. Click Handle in the Operation column to show the Handle Exception pop-up window.

Figure 10-1 Handle Exception

2. Select a handling result in Result. You can select from Solved, To Be Checked, and False Alarm.

3. Click OK to save the changes.

Batch Handle Exceptions

If the handling results of several devices are the same, you can select multiple exception items and click Batch Handle to batch handle them.

Jump to Device Health Monitoring

Click _: v| in the Operation column to jump to the device’s health monitoring page to troubleshoot the exceptions.

Export Exception Records

After filtering the exceptions, click Export and select the format of the file to export these exception records to your local PC.

OS Note

Currently, the supported formats of the exported file include CSV, Excel, and PDF.

Open in New Window

Click Open in New Window in the upper-right corner to open a new window of the browser to view the Exception Center. With this function, you can view the Exception Center and other pages at the same time.

1. System Messages

The Notification Center supports displaying system messages to keep you informed of any system- related information, including the latest version of the system, newly added features, and successful company authentication. You can view basic information of the messages in the list, including the message type, title, time when it was generated, the read/unread status, and the content (in the form of texts or images).

Figure 10-2 System Messages

‘Note

Authentication status includes authentication application submitted, failed, and succeeded only for the way of manual authentication. (Displaying status is not supported for the way of using authentication code.)

Only company administrations can receive the status change notifications.

Supports receiving notifications about work order changes. The changes include when the work order is replied, when the request of closing the work order is initiated, when 7 days passed after the closing request was initiated, and when the work order is automatically closed because 14 days passed after the closing request was initiated.
1. Deals and Offers

The Notification Center supports displaying notifications of the latest deals and offers (e.g., complimentary service packages). You can view basic information of the notifications in the notification list, including the notification type, title, time when it was generated, the read/unread status, and the notification content (in the form of texts or images).

Project

After you register your projects on Hik-Partner Pro, you can not only receive special pricing on essential components, but also receive technical support for your projects.

OS Note

The function is only available in certain countries and regions. For details about whether your country or region supports the function, refer to the after-sales or local distributor.

1. Create a Project

Projects can be created by distributors or system integrators/installers. A project contains project information, information about who creates the project, end user information, support information, product information, and project document.

Steps

OS Note

The function is only available in certain countries and regions. For details about whether your country or region supports the function, refer to the after-sales or local distributor.

Click Project on the top of the page after login.
Click New Project.
Fill in the blanks.

If you are a distributor, enter project information, system integrator / installer information, end user information, support information, and product selection. Then upload the project document if there is any.
If you are a system integrator / installer, enter project information, distributor information, end user information, support type, support information, and product selection. Then upload the project document if there is any.

Figure 11-1 Add Project

Note

For product selection, click Add ^ , select products and click Confirm.
When you select products, you can click y<: to compare products. For details about comparing products, refer to Compare Products .

Click Save & Submit.

The project will be displayed on the Project History page, and the Status will be Waiting for supporter.

What to do next

For further operations, refer to View Project History .

1. Compare Products

When you select products, you can add multiple products and compare them with their same specifications hidden. In this way, different specifications will be directly displayed and you can choose products as needed.

Note

Only products of the same category and subcategory can be compared.

Click Project ^ New Project , and in the Product Selection part, click to start compare products. You can also click at the right bottom, and add products to compare them.

To start to compare products, select at least two but no more than four products from the comparison list. On the comparison result page, fields that are different are highlighted with a background color. You can switch on Hide the Same on the top left to hide parts that are the same and focus only on the differences.

Product Comparison

Hide the same

External interface

USB	4	4
VGA	1	1
Data	4, 1000M Ethernet interface, exten…	—
Management	1,100M Ethernet interface	—
COM	1	1, for HyperTerminal or UPS
Data network interface	—	4, 1000M Ethernet interface
MiniSAS interface	—	Supported
Controller Parameters	—	SAS Interface (Upper-level)
HDMI	—	1
Management network interface	—	1, 100M Ethernet interface

Figure 11-2 Compare Products

1. View Project History

You can view all projects on the Project History page. You can check the information and perform further operations.

‘Note

The function is only available in certain countries and regions. For details about whether your country or region supports the function, refer to the after-sales or local distributor.

Click Project on the top of the page after login.

For Distributors

There are three tabs All, Project Supported by Hikvision, and Project Supported by Me.

All

All projects will be displayed under this tab. FW means the project is forwarded to you. S means the project is shared to you. For shared projects, you can only check the information but not quote.

Project Supported by Hikvision

It includes projects submitted by you and projects shared to you.

Project Supported by Me

It includes projects forwarded to you. You can click Go to Quote, enter distributor prices, and click Save&Send Quote to Customer to generate a quote and send it to the customer.

Project History

All Project Supported by Hikvision Project Supported by Me

Project Name Status y Registration Number H1K Project Number SI End User Project Suppo… 0 Hikvision Sales Operation

12 Draft EP-PRJ-ASIA-10012… Clone Details Edit

Figure 11-3 Project History for Distributors

For System Integrators / Installers

You can view all projects that you created. In the Operation column, you can click Quote and click the document in the Download column of the pop-up window to check the quote list.

Further Operations

Operations

Description

Filter Projects by Status

Click Y in the Status column to filter projects by their status.

Here are some project status types.

Operations	Description
	Draft: The project is only saved but not submitted. Waiting for supporter: The project is submitted but not yet processed. Processing: The project is currently being processed by Hikvision. Approved: It is only available in some countries and regions. It suggests that the project be approved. More Info Required: Hikvision needs more information to decide whether to approve the project. Ineligible: The project is rejected by Hikvision. You can check the comments for why the project is rejected.
Close Project	Click Close Project and select among Close Won, Close Lost, and Closed Canceled. Closed Won: It means the project is closed won, and you can enter Closed Won Amount and upload Purchase Order Document to accept the quote and close the project. Closed Lost: It means the quote of the project is rejected, and you can select reasons, enter comments and close the project. Closed Canceled: It means the project is canceled and closed, and you can select reasons, enter comments and close the project.
Copy Project	Click Copy to copy the project.
Edit Project	If the status turns to More Info Required or the project is only saved but not submitted, you can click Edit to edit the project.
View Details	Click Details to view the project details.

Case

If you have any issues related to hardware, software, device password reset, etc., you can get professional help from our technical support via Case. On the Case page, you can submit cases to report your issues to us and follow up on the cases you submitted.

‘Note

This feature is only available for some countries and regions.
This feature is available only if your company is authenticated.
All employee accounts of an authenticated company have the permission to use this feature.

The methods to access Case are as follows:

Click Support ^ Case .
Click Case on the right side of the dashboard.

The Case page will be opened in a new tab page.

1. Submit Case

Enter different information for submitting Hardware Product Case, Software Product Case, Hik- Partner Pro Case, and Dedicated Customer Service Case.

Submit different types of cases as needed.

[2® Note

Hardware Product Case, Software Product Case, and Hik-Partner Pro Case are only available to some countries and regions.
For device password reset, please submit cases on the Hik-Partner Pro Mobile Client.
Some installers can submit Dedicated Customer Service Case for focused troubleshooting from technical support.
- 1. Submit Hardware Product Case

You can submit hardware product cases for issues related to operations, configurations, or faults.

Steps

Go to the Case page.

CSNote

For how to enter the Case page, refer to Case .

Select Submit Case ^ Hardware Products .
Fill in the fields as required.

Figure 12-1 Submit Hardware Product Case

Title

Enter the title of your case.

‘Note

The maximum length of the title is 100 characters.

Device Serial No.

Enter the device serial No. You can click to see where to find the serial No.

Firmware Version

Enter the version number and build number. You can click to see where to find the firmware version.

Issue Description

Describe your issue according to the suggestions in the blank.

E2@Note

The length of issue description should vary from 20 to 2000 characters.

You can also click Add Details to add issue details (software name, software version, network type, etc.) to your description as needed.

Screenshot / Error Information

Click + to upload screenshots or error information.

Note

You can upload attachments in PNG, JPG, BMP, JPEG, PDF, DOC, XLSX, and TXT format.
No more than 5 PNG/JPG/BMP/JPEG files and 3 PDF/DOC/XLSX/TXT files are allowed.
The maximum size of each attachment is 5 MB.

Link for Accessing Files on Network Disk

For files larger than 5 MB, please upload them to a network disk.

Contact Information

This field is filled with your account information by default. You can edit it as needed.

Check the statement in the end.
Click Submit to submit the case.

C0 Note

The case you submitted will be displayed on the Case Records page. For more operations such as relying to the case and closing the case, refer to View and Handle Case Records .

- 1. Submit Software Product Case

You can submit software product cases for issues related to Hik-Connect and iVMS-4200.

Steps

Go to the Case page.

C® Note

For how to enter the Case page, refer to Case .

Select Submit Case ^ Software Products , and select Hik-Connect/iVMS-4200 as the software name.
Fill in the fields as required.

Figure 12-2 Submit Software Product Case

Title

Enter the title of your case.

The maximum length of the title is 100 characters.

Software Name

The software name is predefined and cannot be edited.

Software Version

Enter the software version. You can click to see where to find the software version.

Issue Description

Describe your issue according to the suggestions in the blank.

The length of issue description should vary from 20 to 2000 characters.

You can also click Add Details to add issue details to your description as needed.

How did it occur?

The maximum length is 500 characters.

Phone/PC Operating System and Version

The maximum length is 72 characters.

Information About the Related Hikvision Devices

The maximum length is 500 characters.

Screenshot / Error Information

Click + to upload screenshots or error information.

You can upload attachments in PNG, JPG, BMP, JPEG, PDF, DOC, XLSX, and TXT format. No more than 5 PNG/JPG/BMP/JPEG files and 3 PDF/DOC/XLSX/TXT files are allowed. The maximum size of each attachment is 5 MB.

Link for Accessing Files on Network Disk

For files larger than 5 MB, please upload them to a network disk.

Contact Information

This field is filled with your account information by default. You can edit it as needed.

Check the statement in the end.
Click Submit to submit the case.

The case you submitted will be displayed on the Case Records page. For more operations such as relying to the case and closing the case, refer to View and Handle Case Records .

- 1. Submit Hik-Partner Pro Case

You can submit Hik-Partner Pro cases for issues related to Hik-Partner Pro.

Steps

Go to the Case page.

dJNote

For how to enter the Case page, refer to Case .

Select Submit Case ^ Hik-Partner Pro , and select an issue type from the supported ones.
Fill in the fields as required.

Figure 12-3 Submit Hik-Partner Pro Case

Title

Enter the title of your case.

C® Note

The maximum length of the title is 100 characters.

Issue Description

Describe your issue according to the suggestions in the blank.

OS Note

The length of issue description should vary from 20 to 2000 characters.

Authorization Code

The after-sales authorization code is exclusive to Hikvision’s technicians for troubleshooting only. You can give your authorization code to the technicians when it is necessary for them to log in to your account for troubleshooting.

US Note

This field is not available for the following issue types: Code Scanning and Reward Point Market, Solution and Project, and Others.

Screenshot / Error Information

Click + to upload screenshots or error information.

OS Note

You can upload attachments in PNG, JPG, BMP, JPEG, PDF, DOC, XLSX, and TXT format.

No more than 5 PNG/JPG/BMP/JPEG files and 3 PDF/DOC/XLSX/TXT files are allowed.

The maximum size of each attachment is 5 MB.

Link for Accessing Files on Network Disk

For files larger than 5 MB, please upload them to a network disk.

Other Contacts

Enter the email address of other contacts.

C® Note

No more than 5 contacts can be added.

Click Submit to submit the case.

nS Note

The case you submitted will be displayed on the Case Records page. For more operations such as relying to the case and closing the case, refer to View and Handle Case Records .

- 1. Submit Dedicated Customer Service Case

You can report the issues found when using Hik-Partner Pro to us by submitting dedicated customer service cases. We will respond to your case and provide support according to your case severity and language. Submitting dedicated customer service cases is only available for some installers, for focused troubleshooting from technical support.

Steps

HE Note

If you have more function-related requirements or improvement suggestions, you can give your feedback. For details, refer to Hik-Partner Pro Portal Overview .

Go to the Case page.

HE Note

For how to enter the Case page, refer to Case .

Click Submit Case on the left.

Figure 12-4 Submit Dedicated Customer Service Case

Enter a title for your case.
Select the language.

The language options vary according to the country/region of your account.

Select the case severity.

Critical Business Down

Main functions which are critical to your business, such as logging in to the platform, creating sites, adding devices, receiving alarms, and handing over sites, are unavailable.

Business Impaired

Main functions work properly, but there are other function-related issues such as batch LAN configuration not working, probabilistic failure of remote configuration, and connection failure of some devices.

Functional Defects

There are some functional defects which do not affect your business or only affect your business slightly, such as wrong words on the page and high response latency.

To get our rapid response when you have an urgent issue, select the case severity objectively.

Enter the issue description.

Note

You’re recommended to refer to the items listed on the page to describe the issue in detail. If the issue is difficult to describe with words, you can put links to related videos in the issue description and attach pictures below.

Set whether to provide the authorization code for the technical support staff for troubleshooting.

C® Note

For details about the authorization code, refer to Hik-Partner Pro Portal Overview .

Optional: Click to upload screenshots or error information.

OS Note

You can upload attachments in PNG, JPG, BMP, JPEG, PDF, DOC, DOCX, XLS, XLSX, and TXT format.

No more than 5 PNG/JPG/BMP/JPEG files and 3 PDF/DOC/XLSX/TXT files are allowed.

The maximum size of each attachment is 5 MB.

Optional: Enter the link for accessing files on network disk.

OS Note

For files larger than 5 MB, please upload them to a network disk.

Select Case or Phone Number as Contact Information.

OS Note

If you select the latter, select the country/region code and enter the contact number.

Optional: Enter the email addresses of other contacts.

nS Note

No more than 5 contacts can be added.

Click Submit.

nS Note

The case you submitted will be displayed on the Case Records page. For more operations such as relying to the case and closing the case, refer to View and Handle Case Records .

12.2 View and Handle Case Records

You can view cases you submitted on the Case Records page, view replies to a case, reply to a case, and close a case.

Go to the Case page and click Case Records on the left.

Note

For how to enter the Case page, refer to Case .

Table 12-1 Available Operations on Case Records Page

Operation	Description
View All Submitted Cases	You can view cases you submitted on the Case Records page, including the case ID, created time, case title, case type, and case status.
View Case Details	Click a case to enter the Case Details page to view the case creator, issue description, replies from technical support, request from the technical support for closing the case, case status updates, and so on. CSNote You will be notified via emails and push notifications on the Mobile Client if there are new replies or updates of case status.
Reply to Case	Click a case to enter the Case Details page. Click Reply on the bottom right corner, enter the reply content, and add attachments in the Reply section. Click Confirm to submit your reply to the current case.
Close Case	Click a case to enter the Case Details page, and click Close Case on the bottom right corner to close the case after your issue is solved. You can rate our services and give your comment when closing the case. □S Note The case will be closed automatically if you do not reply within 14 days.

Return Materials Authorization

Return material authorization (RMA) is an arrangement in which you can ship an item back for an exchange or repair due to a product defect or malfunction. The process is firstly Installers can initiate RMA applications, and distributors can repair the defected products after receiving applications. Finally the products will be returned after they are repaired and debugged.

OS Note

The function is only available in certain countries and regions. For details about whether your country or region supports the function, refer to the after-sales or local distributor.

1. Submit RMA Request

You can register an RMA request for exchanging or repairing goods. After registration, you can check real-time status of the requests.

The function is only available in certain countries and regions. For details about whether your country or region supports the function, refer to the after-sales or local distributor.

Steps

Go to Support ^ RMA .
Click Add to add products.

You can input the serial number of the products of interest, click Add, and enter fault description and reference. Click Add Attachment to add attachments if there are any.
You can click Download Template, enter information of multiple products, and click Upload Serial List to batch upload products.

OS Note

It should be a Hikvision product sold in the current country or region.

After all products are added, click Next to select shipping information.
Select shipping information.

For countries and regions that support cross-distributor repair, if the distributor is identified according to the serial number, the distributor will be automatically selected. If not identified, you need to click Change Shipping Address to choose a distributor by yourself. After choosing a distributor, the distributor and product information will show up in the list.

By default, the selected repair station is the nearest one. You can also select among all stations of all distributors in the country.

For countries and regions that do not support cross-distributor repair, the system will identify the distributor according to the serial number. The default choice is the nearest location of the distributor. If the distributor can not be identified according to the serial number, then the product can not be added.

Check the information in the list, and click Submit.

Whether your application is submitted successfully or not is displayed.

You can perform the following operations.

Operation Description

Download Document Click RMA number to download document.

Back to Menu Click Back to Menu to check details and track status.

Create More Click Create More to add more applications.

1. View RMA Request

After an RMA application is submitted, you can view its status and perform further operations.

Go to Support ^ RMA , and the successfully submitted applications are displayed in the list.

You can perform the operations as needed.

Operation	Description
Search for RMA Applications	You can search for an application by its Reference Number, RMA Number, Date, Application Number, and Serial Number.
Filter by Status	Click v , and select among Saved, Unreceived, In Repair, Waiting For Customer Response, Ready for Shipment, and Completed.
View Details	Click Detail to view application details.
Download Document	Click Download Document to download the application file.

Order & Promotion

The Order & Promotion module supports viewing information of regular products, hot products, and promotional products that are discounted or are put on clearance. You can search for and select products to place an order or submit your product order by uploading a predefined template.

OS Note

The module is only available to authenticated channel partners.

1. View and Search for Products

You can search for products and view detailed product information, including the product picture, description, stock availability, and other related parameters.

Under the B2B tab of the Order & Promotion module, you can view information of hot products and the products you have recently viewed. You can also view information of the regular products or promotional products (e.g., discount products, clearance products, etc.) by selecting the corresponding tabs under the navigation bar. You can filter the products by product category and search for specific products by product name or model.

Click a product to view its detailed information, including the product picture, description, stock availability, and other related parameters. If needed, you can add a product to Favorites by hovering over it and clicking .

Figure 14-1 Product Information Details

Note

You can find the products you have added to Favorites later in My Hik-Partner ^ Account Information ^ My Favorite ^ B2B Product .

1. Create an Order

You can place an order by adding products to the shopping cart, selecting the products you need for checkout, and entering the required shipping information.

Steps

OU Note

Besides adding products to the shopping cart, you can also submit an order by uploading information (material code, quantity, etc.) of products with a predefined template via Order Upload.

Figure 14-2 Ways for Accessing Order Upload

View or search for the products to be ordered.

C® Note

For details, refer to View and Search for Products .

Hover over a product of interest, set the quantity to be ordered, and click Add to Cart. Repeat this step to add multiple products to your shopping cart as needed.
Click J¹ on the right to go to your shopping cart.
Select the products to be ordered, adjust the quantity for each product if needed, and click Next.
On the Check Order Information page, enter your shipping/billing address, select a preferred shipping method, and confirm the order details (quantity to be ordered, total cost, etc.).

OS Note

You can also set a preferred future date of delivery and upload a project register form if needed.
If you have entered a shipping/billing address before, check whether the address information displayed on the page is correct.

Click Submit.

You can track the status of the submitted order via My Hik-Partner ^ Order ^ My Order . For details, refer to View My Orders .

1. View My Orders

After submitting an order, you can track the status of your order, perform operations such as canceling or reordering as needed, and view related information such as invoices and transaction records.

The following order related information can be accessed via My Hik-Partner ^ Order .

Figure 14-3 Order Related Information of Your Company

My Order Page

On the My Order page, you can view your orders by different status (e.g., In Review, Confirmed, Fully Delivered, Completed, etc.) and click an order to view the order details, including the products selected, total cost, and shipping related information.

Note

The My Order page can also be accessed via the In Review and Undelivered Order tabs displayed on the B2B page of the Order & Promotion module.

Figure 14-4 Another Way for Accessing the My Order Page

If needed, you can click Export to export the list of orders to your local PC, click Order Upload to submit an order using a predefined template, click — next to an order No. to copy the order No., or click to reorder the same products of an order. To cancel ordering a product, click an order to enter the order details page, and click Cancel next to the product.

OS Note

The ordering of products that are fully delivered or the stock clearance / combo discount products are not allowed to be canceled.

My Invoice Page

On the My Invoice page, you can search for and view invoices of your past orders and export the list of invoices if needed.

My E-Wallet Page

On the My E-Wallet page, you can view your E-Wallet balance and transaction records, and search for specific records as needed.

OS Note

You can also click the E-Wallet balance displayed on the B2B page of the Order & Promotion module to access your E-Wallet.

Figure 14-5 Another Way for Accessing the My E-Wallet Page

Financial Report Page

On the Financial Report page, you can view details of your credit status, account payable balance, and basic information of the invoices.

Stock List Page

On the Stock List page, you can view and search for stock related information of your products and export the full stock list or specific search results to the local PC as needed.

Price List Page

On the Price List page, you can view and search for price related information of all products and export the full price list or specific search results to the local PC as needed.

Value-Added Services

Hik-Partner Pro provides multiple value-added services for you to better serve your customers, including the health monitoring service, cloud attendance service, cloud storage service, people counting service, temperature screening service, alarm receiving center service, HikCentral Connect service, co-branding service, and employee account add-on.

OS Note

Most of value-added services are only available in certain countries and regions. For more information, refer to the after sales or local distributor.
Only the cloud storage service is supported by the solar camera.
1. Health Monitoring Service

Hik-Partner Pro offers a free package containing a series of basic features such as viewing device online status once you complete account registration. In some cases, for the capacity and functionality limitation of the free package, these basic features are insufficient for you to satisfy higher level needs of your customers (i.e., end users), such as their need for the maintenance of a large number of devices.

Compared with the free package, the health monitoring package not only allows you to add more devices to Hik-Partner Pro, but also monitor the health status of your customers’ devices and configure other value-added features. You can access the health monitoring service by purchasing health monitoring packages in the Service Market.

The following table shows the differences between the free package and the health monitoring package.

OS Note

For the countries and regions where the health monitoring service is currently free, the details of the health monitoring package might be different from the information displayed in the table below. Refer to the distributors or after-sales in these countries and regions for details.

Table 15-1 Differences Between Free Package and Health Monitoring Package

Functionality	Free Package	Health Monitoring Package
Adding Devices	• Supported • Manageable Devices: 1024	Supported Manageable Devices: More than 1024 based on the package you purchase.
Site & Device
Applying for Authorization
Viewing Device Online Status
Remote Configuration

Functionality	Free Package	Health Monitoring Package
Live View/Playback/ Downloading Video
Device Firmware Remote Upgrade
Health Monitoring	Not Supported	Supported
Exception Rule	Not Supported	Supported
Linkage Rule	Not Supported	Supported
Employee Management	Not Supported	Employees Accounts: 4 ‘iNote You can get 4 employee accounts for free only when purchasing the health monitoring service for the first time.
Role/Permission Management	Not Supported	Supported
Searching Operation Logs of Employees	Not Supported	Supported

- 1. Purchase Health Monitoring Service

You can purchase the health monitoring service packages online in the Service Market in Hik- Partner Pro or purchase a service key from the local distributor offline first, and then activate the health monitoring service packages by the service key in the Service Market.

Steps

OXlNote

Purchasing the service by service key is only supported in some countries and regions. Contact the local distributor for details.

Go to the Service Market page.
In the Health Monitoring Package area, click Online Purchase to enter the Purchase Health Monitoring Package page.

‘Note

If your country or region supports service key and you have purchased a service key from the distributor, you can also click Activate by Service Key to purchase the service.

Select service packages and set the number of service packages that you want to purchase.

All-Type Device Monthly Package

An All-Type Device Monthly Package can be used to activate the service for a device of nearly any type. And the activated service lasts one month.

“All-Type Device” here means that the service package is applicable to nearly all device types, including DVR, NVR, network cameras, PTZ cameras, access control devices, alarm devices, video intercom devices, doorbells, Hik-Partner Pro Boxes, thermal devices, and network switches.

“Monthly” here means that the service term is one month. The service term starts when you activate the service.

All-Type Device Monthly Package * 20

20 All-Type Device Monthly Packages sold as a batch. Set the number of batches to purchase.

All-Type Device Monthly Package * 100

100 All-Type Device Monthly Packages sold as a batch. Set the number of batches to purchase.

All-Type Device Annual Package

An All-Type Device Annual Package can be used to activate the service for a device of nearly any type. And the activated service lasts one year.

“Annual” here means that the service term is one year. The service term starts when you activate the service.

All-Type Device Annual Package * 20

20 All-Type Device Annual Packages sold as a batch. Set the number of batches to purchase.

All-Type Device Annual Package * 100

100 All-Type Device Annual Package sold as a batch. Set the number of batches to purchase.

Network Camera Monthly Package

A Network Camera Monthly Package can be used to activate the service for a network camera. And the activated service lasts one month.

“Network Camera” here means that the service package is only applicable to network cameras.

“Monthly” here means that the service term is one month. The service term starts when you activate the service.

Network Camera Monthly Package * 20

20 Network Camera Monthly Packages sold as a batch. Set the number of batches to purchase.

Network Camera Monthly Package * 100

100 Network Camera Monthly Packages sold as a batch. Set the number of batches to purchase.

Network Camera Annual Package

A Network Camera Annual Package can be used to activate the service for a network camera. And the activated service lasts one year.

“Network Camera” here means that the service package is only applicable to network cameras.

“Annual” here means that the service term is one year. The service term starts when you activate the service.

Network Camera Annal Package * 20

20 Network Camera Annual Packages sold as a batch. Set the number of batches to purchase.

Network Camera Annual Package * 100

100 Network Camera Annual Packages sold as a batch. Set the number of batches to purchase.

Enter your VAT number.

OS Note

The VAT number entered here will be displayed in the payment receipt.

Select Credit/Debit Cards as the payment method.
Click Checkout to enter the payment page and finish the payment.
Optional: Go to Service ^ Service Market ^ My Service ^ Health Monitoring Service to view your health monitoring packages and manage them.

CS Note

For details, see Manage Your Health Monitoring Service .

- 1. Activate the Health Monitoring Service for Devices

After purchasing health monitoring packages, you can use them to activate the health monitoring service for specific devices. Once the service is activated, features such as device health monitoring and device exception notifications will be available for these devices.

Before You Start

Make sure you have purchased health monitoring packages. For details, see Purchase Health

Monitoring Service .

Steps

OS Note

If the firmware version of a device is obsolete, or its device type cannot be recognized by Hik- Partner Pro, activating health monitoring service for the device is not supported

Enter the Activate Health Monitoring Service page in one of the following ways.

Choice 1: Go to Service ^ My Service ^ All Services , and then click Activate Health Monitoring Service.
Choice 2: Go to Service ^ My Service ^ Health Monitoring Service , and then click Activate Health Monitoring Service.
Choice 3: Go to the site details page, and then hover the cursor onto n on the device card, and then click Activate Service on the pop-up dialog.
Choice 4: Go to the site details page, and then click a device to show the device details panel, and then hover the cursor onto Fl on the panel and click Activate Service
Choice 5: Click Activate Service on the adding result page after adding detected online devices or adding a device by Hik-Connect (P2P). See Add Detected Online Device or Add Device by Entering Serial No. for details.

The Activate Health Monitoring Service page will be displayed as one of the following two figures show.

Figure 15-1 Select Devices to Activate Health Monitoring Service

Figure 15-2 Activate Health Monitoring Service for One Selected Device

Select devices.

C® Note

Skip this step if you enter the Activate Health Monitoring Service page as Figure 15-2 shows.

Select the activation type.

CS Note

The number you set represents the number of months/years that the service lasts for each selected device.
If service packages are insufficient, you can click Online Purchase or Activate by Service Key to purchase more. For details, see Purchase Health Monitoring Service .

Use All Device Package Only

When enabled, you can only select All Device Packages (All Device Monthly Package and All Device Annual Package) for network cameras to activate the service for them.

Auto Renewal

When enabled, if the service for a device expires, the service will be automatically renewed using the same service package in previous activation. For example, assume that you activated a 1-month health monitoring service for a NVR using an All Device Monthly Package on 5/14/2021, the 1-month service will be automatically renewed using another All Device Monthly Package on 6/14/2021.

Click OK.

After the health monitoring service is activated for devices, the notifications of all exceptions will be enabled by default.

Optional: Go to the site details page, and then click a device with the service activated to show the device details panel, and then perform the following operations if needed.

Renew the Service	Click Renew to renew the service for the device.
Transfer the Service	Click Transfer to open the Transfer Health Monitoring Service window, and then select a device to transfer the remaining service time from the current device to the selected device.
Enable Auto Renewing the Service	Click Auto Renewal to Open the Auto Renew window, switch on Auto Renewal, and then select a type of service packages for auto renewal.

- 1. Manage Your Health Monitoring Service

In My Service, you can manage your health monitoring service. The available features for the management include viewing remaining service packages, service activation, service renewal, service transfer, service auto renewal, and so on.

Go to Service ^ My Service ^ Health Monitoring Service to enter the health monitoring service page (as the figure below shows).

Figure 15-3 Manage Your Health Monitoring Service

On the page, the following features are available.

Table 15-2 Available Features

Area No.	Feature	Description
1	View Remaining Packages & Purchase More	View used number and remaining number of each type of heath monitoring packages. Click Activate by Service Key or Online Purchase to purchase more packages. For details, see *Purchase* *Health Monitoring Service* .
2	View Expiration and Auto Renewal Information	Expires in 30 Days: The number of devices whose health monitoring services expire in 30 days. You can click Expires in 30 Days to view these devices in the device list below. Expired: The number the devices whose health monitoring services have expired. You can click Expired to view these devices in the device list below. Devices with Auto Renewal: The number of devices for which you have enabled service auto-renewal. You can click Devices with Auto Renewal to view these devices.
3	Filter Devices or Search by Keywords	Select a Site from the site list on the left, and then select a filter type (All, Expire in 30 Days, or Expired) from the drop-down list to filter devices. Or enter key words to search for matched devices.
3	Activate Service	Click Activate Health Monitoring Service to activate the heath monitoring service for specific devices. For details, see *Activate the Health Monitoring Service for* *Devices* .
3	Batch Renew Service for Devices	Select devices and then click Batch Renew to renew the service for the selected devices. The process of renewing the service is similar to that of activating the service. See *Activate the Health* *Monitoring Service for Devices* for details.
3	Renew Service for a Device	Click O in the Operation column to renew service for a device. The process of renewing the service is similar to that of activating the service. See *Activate the Health* *Monitoring Service for Devices* for details.

Area No.	Feature	Description
3	Transfer Service	Click £ in the Operation column to transfer the remaining service time from the current device to another.
3	Enable Service Auto Renewal	Click (si in the Operation column to open the Auto Renew window, switch on Auto Renewal, and then select a type of service packages for auto renewing the health monitoring service.

15.2 Purchase Employee Account Add-On

Hik-Partner Pro offers only one Installer Admin account for your company to manage resources in the system. Although sometimes, several employee accounts will be given as gifts to you in some activities, it may still not meet your requirements. So if you want to invite more employees to join Hik-Partner Pro to work collaboratively for providing better service for your customers, you can purchase the employee account add-on online in the Service Market in Hik-Partner Pro or purchase a service key from the local distributor offline first, and then activate the employee account add-on by the service key in the Service Market.

Steps

OU Note

Activating the service by service key is only supported in some countries and regions. Contact the local distributor for details.

Go to the Service Market page.
In the Employee Account Add-On area, click Online Purchase to enter the Purchase Employee Account Add-On page.

d@Note

If your country or region supports service key and you have purchased a service key from the distributor, you can also click Activate by Service Key to purchase the service.

Figure 15-4 Purchase Employee Account Add-On

3. Select type(s) of add-on and set the number of employee accounts that you want to purchase.

C® Note

An 1/Year, 5/Year, or 25/Year add-on can be used to invite 1, 5, or 25 employee accounts which will expire after one year.

Enter your VAT number.

CS Note

The VAT number entered here will be displayed in the payment receipt.

Select Credit/Debit Cards as the payment method.
Check your purchasing information and click Checkout to enter the payment page and finish the purchase.

15.3 Cloud Attendance Service

The cloud attendance service provides a cloud-based and all-in-one solution for access control and attendance management in various businesses. You can create cloud attendance systems for your customers, so that your customers, such as managers of small organizations or human resource director, can configure the system on the Hik-Connect portal ( http://www.hik-connect.com ) and use it to manage the attendance of the employees.

Employees of your customers can check in or check out via the devices configured in the cloud attendance system. With the Hik-Connect Mobile Client V4.13.0 or later, the employees can control doors and check attendance records on their mobile phones.

‘Note

The cloud attendance service is only supported in some countries and regions currently. You might fail to find related functionality due to its unavailability in your country or region. If you need related functionality, please feel free to contact the local distributor or our branch office.

- 1. Flow Chart for Setting the Cloud Attendance Service

The flow chart below shows the recommended process for setting cloud attendance service.

Figure 15-5 Flow Chart

The table below shows the description of each step and the link to corresponding section.

Table 15-3 Flow Chart Description

Step	Description
Add MinMoe Access Control Devices to Hik-Partner Pro	Add MinMoe access control devices to site(s) which are owned by the same customer. For details about adding devices to Hik- Partner Pro, see *Add Device* and its sections.
Add a Cloud Attendance System to a Site	Add a cloud attendance system to a specific site. The cloud attendance system is used for grouping and managing MinMoe

Step	Description
	access control devices. For details about adding the system, see *Add Cloud Attendance System* .
Purchase Cloud Attendance Service	See *Purchase Cloud Attendance Service* for details.
Activate Cloud Attendance Service	Activate the cloud attendance service for the system. For details, see *Add Cloud Attendance System*
Add Cloud Attendance Devices to the System	Add MinMoe access control devices to the system. For details, see *Add Cloud Attendance System* .
Hand Over Site to Your Customer	After completing the required configurations, hand over the site to your customer and so they will be the site owner. For details, see *Hand Over Site* . DjNote When your customer accept the site handover and approving activating the cloud attendance service on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client (V 4.15.0 or later), they will be able to set access levels and attendance rules for their employees via the Hik- Connect Portal ( *http://www.hik-connect.com* ), and their employees will be able to use the Hik-Connect Mobile Client to check their attendance records.

- 1. Purchase Cloud Attendance Service

You can purchase the cloud attendance service packages online in the Service Market in Hik- Partner Pro or purchase a service key from the local distributor offline first, and then activate the cloud attendance service packages by the service key in the Service Market.

Steps

[2® Note

Activating the service by service key is only supported in some countries and regions. Contact the local distributor for details.

In the left navigation, click Service ^ Service Market to enter the Service Market page.
In the Cloud Attendance area, click Online Purchase to enter the Purchase Cloud Attendance Package page.

Note

If your country or region supports service key and you have purchased a service key from the distributor, you can also click Activate by Service Key to purchase the service.

Select the service packages (purchase by month or by year), and set the number of service packages that you want to purchase.

Cloud Attendance Package (Monthly)

The service term is one month. The service term starts when you activate the service.

12 * Cloud Attendance Package (Monthly)

12 Cloud Attendance Packages sold as a batch.

C0 Note

The price of the package changes when you purchase different numbers of packages.

Click to enter the VAT number, and click to confirm.

C® Note

The VAT number will be displayed in the payment receipt.

Select Credit/Debit Cards as the payment method.
Click Checkout to enter the payment page and finish the payment.
Optional: Go to Service ^ Service Market ^ My Service ^ Cloud Attendance Service to view your cloud attendance packages and manage them.

US Note

For details, see Manage Your Cloud Attendance Service .

15.3.3 Add Cloud Attendance System

You can add a cloud attendance system for a site to set up the basic attendance management environment for the Site Owner.

Steps

Go to the Customer Site page.
Select the site where you want to add the cloud attendance system.
Select the Cloud Attendance tab.
Click Add Cloud Attendance System.
Create a name for the system.
Click OK.

US Note

The service is inactivated.

Activate the cloud attendance service for the site.
Click Free Trial.
Click Confirm in the pop-up window.

Note

You can view the trial capacity of the service (25 persons) and the expiry date.

Optional: If you need to expand and renew the service, click Expand & Renew.

Figure 15-6 Cloud Attendance Service Expansion & Renewal

1) Set the number of person(s) to be added.

2) Set the month(s) to be renewed.

CE Note

You can view the number of cloud attendance service packages needed after the service is expanded and renewed.

Optional: If service packages are insufficient, you can click Online Purchase or Activate by Service Key in the upper-right corner to purchase more.

C® Note

For details, refer to Purchase Cloud Attendance Service .

Click OK.
Click Add Device or Edit to add access control devices to the cloud attendance system or edit the devices.

To add the devices in the current site to the system, click Add, select the devices, and click OK.
To add the devices in the other sites that belong to the same Site Owner, click Add Other Sites’ Devices, select the devices, and click OK.

il Note

Make sure to switch on Cloud Attendance for the devices.

What to do next

Hand over the site to the Site Owner and inform the Site Owner to accept the cloud attendance service permission application. See details in Hand Over Site .

15.3.4 Manage Your Cloud Attendance Service

In My Service, you can manage your cloud attendance service. The available features for the management include viewing remaining service packages, service activation, service renewal, and so on.

Go to Service ^ My Service ^ Cloud Attendance Service to enter the cloud attendance service page (as the figure below shows).

Figure 15-7 Manage Your Cloud Attendance Service

On the page, the following features are available.

Table 15-4 Available Features

Area No.	Feature	Description
1	View Remaining Packages & Purchase More	View used number and remaining number of each type of cloud attendance packages. Click Activate by Service Key or Online Purchase to purchase more packages. For details, see *Purchase* *Cloud Attendance Service*.
2	View Expiration Information	• Cloud Attendance System Expires in 30 Days: The number of cloud attendance systems that expire in 30 days.

Area No.	Feature	Description
		You can click Cloud Attendance System Expires in 30 Days to view these cloud attendance systems in the list below. • Cloud Attendance System Expired: The number of cloud attendance systems that expired. You can click Cloud Attendance System Expired to view these cloud attendance systems in the list below.
3	Filter Cloud Attendance Systems or Search by Keywords	Select a Site from the site list on the left, and then select a filter type (All, Expire in 30 Days, Expired, or Trial) from the drop-down list to filter cloud attendance systems. Enter keywords (of cloud attendance system name, site name, or site owner name) to search for the matched cloud attendance systems.
4	Renew Service	Click O in the Operation column to renew the service. See *Add Cloud Attendance System* for details.

15.4 Cloud Storage Service

Hik-Partner Pro offers cloud storage solution for the event-related video footage, which refers to the video footage recorded when a pre-defined event is detected by the channel of an encoding device.

After you add a cloud storage device to the platform and complete cloud storage settings, the device will function as the transmission medium by uploading the event-related video footage from its linked channels to the cloud. The uploaded video footage will be retained for 7 days, 30 days, 90 days, 180 days, or 365 days on the cloud, basing on the types of the cloud storage service packages purchased from the service market.

- 1. Flow Chart for Setting Cloud Storage Service

The flow charts below shows the recommended procedures for using cloud storage service by Hik- Partner Pro box, DVR that supports cloud storage, NVR that supports cloud storage, and solar camera.

Note

If your DVR/NVR does not support cloud storage, you should use a Hik-Partner Pro box to help the DVR/NVR upload footage to the cloud, and the flow chart is the same as that for the Hik-Partner Pro box.

Flow Chart for Hik-Partner Pro Box

The following table shows the description for each procedure of the flow chart.

Table 15-5 Flow Chart Description

Procedure	Description
Add Cameras/NVRs/DVRs to a Site	Add cameras, NVRs, or DVRs to a site. For details, see *Add* *Device* .
Add a Hik-Partner Pro Box to the Same Site	Add a Hik-Partner Pro box to the same site by Hik-Connect (P2P). For details, see *Add Device by Entering Serial No.* , *Batch Add* *Devices* , and *Add Detected Online Device* . QU Note For the Hik-Partner Pro box added by IP/Domain name, cloud storage service is not supported.
Set Cloud Storage	Set cloud storage for the Hik-Partner Pro. See *Set Cloud Storage* *for Hik-Partner Pro Box* for details. The following list shows the descriptions of the sub-procedures. Network Test: Test your network condition to get the recommended settings for cloud storage. See *Network Test* for details. Add Channel(s) to the Hik-Partner Pro Box: Add channel(s) to the Hik-Partner Pro box to allow the latter to get video footage data from the channel(s). Set Resolution and Event: Set resolution for the channels, and set the event(s) that will trigger the channel to record related video footage. Purchase Cloud Storage Service Package(s): Purchase cloud storage service packages from the service market. See *Purchase Cloud Storage Service* for details. Œ Note You can also activate service packages by service key. Consult the distributor to get the service key. Activate Cloud Storage Service for Channel(s): Activate cloud storage service for specific channel(s) using the purchased cloud storage service package(s) or service key. See *Activate* *or Renew Service for a Channel* for details.

Figure 15-8 Flow Chart for DVR That Supports Cloud Storage

The following table shows the description for each procedure of the flow chart.

Table 15-6 Flow Chart Description

Procedure	Description
Add a DVR That Supports Cloud Storage to a Site	Add a DVR that supports cloud storage to a site by Hik-Connect (P2P). For details, see *Add Device by Entering Serial No.* , *Batch* *Add Devices* , and *Add Detected Online Device* .

Procedure

Description

OS Note

If the DVR that supports cloud storage is added by IP/Domain Name, cloud storage service is not supported.

Set Cloud Storage

Set cloud storage for the DVR that supports cloud storage. For details, see Set Cloud Storage for DVR .

The following list shows the descriptions of the sub-procedures.

Network Test: Test your network condition to get the recommended settings for cloud storage. See Network Test for details.
Enable Cloud Storage for Channel(s): Enable cloud storage for the channel(s) of the DVR that supports cloud storage.
Set Stream Type and Event: Set stream type (main-stream or sub-stream) for the channel(s). And set event(s) that will trigger the channel to record related video footage.
Purchase Cloud Storage Service Package(s): Purchase cloud storage service packages from the service market. See Purchase Cloud Storage Service for details.

CS Note

You can also activate service packages by service key. Consult the distributor to get the service key.

Activate Cloud Storage Service for Channel(s): Activate cloud storage service for specific channel(s) using the purchased cloud storage service package(s) or service key. See Activate or Renew Service for a Channel for details.

Figure 15-9 Flow Chart for NVR That Supports Cloud Storage

The following table shows the description for each procedure of the flow chart.

Table 15-7 Flow Chart Description

Procedure

Description

Add an NVR That Supports Cloud Storage to a Site

Add an NVR that supports cloud storage to a site by Hik-Connect (P2P). For details, see Add

Device by Entering Serial No. , Batch Add Devices , and Add Detected Online Device .

Procedure

Description

OS Note

If the NVR that supports cloud storage is added by IP/Domain Name, cloud storage service is not supported.

Set Cloud Storage

Set cloud storage for the NVR that supports cloud storage. For details, see How to enable cloud storage for an NVR that supports cloud storage? .

The following list shows the descriptions of the sub-procedures.

Network Test: Test your network condition to get the recommended settings for cloud storage. See Network Test for details.
Enable Cloud Storage for Channel(s): Enable cloud storage for the channel(s) of the NVR that supports cloud storage.

CS Note

° If Smart H.264+ / H.265+ encoding is enabled for the channel with cloud storage enabled, the quality of the footage on cloud will be affected. The platform will notify you to disable Smart H.264+ / H. 265+ encoding.

° If stream encryption is not enabled for an encoding device linked to an NVR that supports cloud storage, you cannot enable cloud storage for the channels of the encoding device.

Set Resolution and Event: Set resolution for the channels, and set the event(s) that will trigger the channel to record related video footage.
Purchase Cloud Storage Service Package(s): Purchase cloud storage service packages from the service market. See Purchase Cloud Storage Service for details.

Procedure

Description

OS Note

You can also activate service packages by service key. Consult the distributor to get the service key.

• Activate Cloud Storage Service for Channel(s): Activate cloud storage service for specific channel(s) using the purchased cloud storage service package(s) or service key. See Activate or Renew Service for a Channel for details.

Figure 15-10 Flow Chart for Solar Camera

The following table shows the description for each procedure of the flow chart.

Table 15-8 Flow Chart Description

Procedure	Description
Add a Solar Camera to a Site	Add a solar camera to a site by Hik-Connect (P2P). For details, see *Add Device by Entering Serial No.* , *Batch Add Devices* , and *Add Detected Online Device* .

Procedure

Description

OS Note

If the solar camera is added by IP address / domain name, cloud storage service is not supported.

Set Cloud Storage

Set cloud storage for the solar camera. For details, see Set Cloud Storage for Solar Camera .

The following list shows the descriptions of the sub-procedures.

Network Test: Test your network condition to get the recommended settings for cloud storage. See Network Test for details.
Set Stream Type and Event: Set stream type (main stream or sub-stream) for the channel. And set the event that will trigger the channel to record related video footage.

CS Note

Currently only motion detection is supported.

Enable Cloud Storage for Channel: Enable cloud storage for the channel of the solar camera.
Purchase Cloud Storage Service Package(s): Purchase cloud storage service packages from the service market. See Purchase Cloud Storage Service for details.

HS Note

You can also activate service packages by service key. Consult the distributor to get the service key.

Activate Cloud Storage Service for Channel: Activate cloud storage service for the channel using the purchased cloud storage service package(s). See Activate or Renew Service for a Channel for details.

- 1. Purchase Cloud Storage Service

There are seven types of cloud storage service packages, namely, 7-Day Monthly Package, 7-Day Annual Package, 30-Day Monthly Package, 30-Day Annual Package, 90-Day Annual Package, 180- Day Annual Package, and 365-Day Annual Package. You should purchase the cloud storage service from the service market before using it.

Before You Start

The cloud storage service is available for purchase only if your company is authenticated.

Steps

Go to the Service Market page.
Click Cloud Storage under Value-Added Services.
In the Cloud Storage area, click Online Purchase to enter the purchasing page.

You can view the seven types of cloud storage service packages and their corresponding prices.

Click /x or manually enter a number to define the number of the packages to be purchased.

CHjNote

You can purchase one or more packages at a time. The validity period of the service is one year after purchase, and thus you should activate the service within the validity period.
The number before “Day” (e.g. 7-Day, 30-Day, 90-Day, etc.) refers to the retention period of the event-related video footage on the cloud. Monthly and Annual refer to how long the service will last after activation.

Example

For example, if you select 7-Day Monthly Package, the video footage can be saved on the cloud storage for 7 days, and it will be covered by new video footage from the 8th day. After activation, the service will last for a month.

The selected service package(s) will be displayed on the right side of the page.

Click to enter the VAT number, and click to confirm.

OU Note

The VAT number entered here will be displayed in the payment receipt.

Select Credit/Debit Cards as the payment method.
Click Checkout to enter the payment page and finish the payment.
Optional: Click Service ^ My Service ^ Cloud Storage Service to view the service package(s) you have purchased.
- 1. Set Cloud Storage for Hik-Partner Pro Box

When you complete adding a Hik-Partner Pro box to a site, the result page will show the entry for setting cloud storage. You can skip the settings, but it is recommended that you click the entry to start the settings, including network test (optional), adding channels, channel resolution settings, event settings, and activating cloud storage service. When you complete all these settings, the Hik- Partner Pro box will be able to upload event-related video footage from its linked channels to the cloud.

Steps

d@Note

If you skip the cloud storage settings when completing adding the Hik-Partner Pro box, you can click the device in the device list to open its settings panel to set cloud storage for it later.

Add a Hik-Partner Pro box to a site by Hik-Connect (P2P).

OS Note

For details about adding the Hik-Partner Pro box, see Add Device by Entering Serial No. , Batch Add Devices , or Add Detected Online Device .
If you add the Hik-Partner Pro box by IP/Domain name, its cloud storage functionality will be unavailable.

When you complete adding the device, the entry for setting cloud storage will be displayed on the adding result page.

Click Cloud Storage Settings to start setting cloud storage parameters.

You will enter the Network Test page.

Optional: Click Start to test the network performance if the network bandwidth is limited, and then click Add Channel when test completes.

CIS Note

For details about network test, see Network Test .
You can click Skip to skip the step.

The Add Channel window will pop up.

Figure 15-11 Add Channel Window

4. Add channel(s) to Hik-Partner Pro box to enable cloud storage functionality for them.

1) Select a device (e.g., NVR and network camera) from the drop-down list on the Add Channel window.

The channels of the device will be displayed. And you can click Device Information to view or edit the device information, including device IP address, port No., device user name, and password.

Mil Note

The IP addresses of the devices and the Hik-Partner Pro box should be on the same LAN.

Turn on the switch(es) to add specific channel(s) to the Hik-Partner Pro box so as to enable their cloud storage functionality.
Enter the information of the device to which the channel belongs, including IP address, port No., user name, and password.
Click OK.

You will enter the Cloud Storage Settings page, which displays the channel(s) already added to the Hik-Partner Pro box.

Figure 15-12 Cloud Storage Settings Page

5. Set resolution of the footage to be uploaded to the cloud.

– Select Standard Definition or High Definition from the drop-down list according to the recommended resolution displayed on the Cloud Storage Settings page (if you have done network test).

CilNote

Make sure the number of standard definition channel(s) or high definition channel(s) is no more than the recommended upper-limit displayed on the Add Channel window (if you have tested your network).

– Click Z , and then select a resolution (1080P, 720P, 4CIF, or CIF) from the drop-down list in the pop-up window, and then set the bit rate according to the recommendation shown on the pop-up window.

Click Event Settings to set the event(s) that will trigger video recording action of the channel.

‘Note

The events that support such a trigger include motion detection, intrusion, and line crossing. For the settings of different events are similar, here we only briefly introduce how to set motion detection. For details about settings of other events, see the user manual of the channel (camera).

Enable Motion Detection

Turn on the switch to enable motion detection.

Area Settings

Tap Draw Area to draw an area on the image, and then drag the slider to set the sensitivity of motion detection.

Objects in motion will be detected within the drawn area.

Arming Schedule

Define the time period during which motion detection is activated.

Linkage Method

Make sure Notify Surveillance Center is checked, otherwise the channel will not record event-related video footage even if the event is detected.

Optional: Edit or delete a specific channel.

Edit a Channel Click • * • ^ to edit the settings of the channel.

Delete a Channel Click « * * ^ ® to delete the channel.

Click Activate to activate cloud storage service for the channel.

C® Note

For details about how to activate the service, see Activate or Renew Service for a Channel .

The event related video footage of the channel will be uploaded to the cloud.

Optional: Click * * * ^ to switch channel to use the activated service.
Click Finish.

15.4.4 Set Cloud Storage for NVR

You can enable and set up cloud storage for an NVR and its linked channels. When you complete the settings, the NVR will be able to upload event-related footage of its linked channels to the cloud.

Do I need a Hik-Partner Pro Box to enable cloud storage function for an NVR?

If your NVR supports cloud storage, there is no need for a Hik-Partner Pro Box.

This feature requires device capability. Refer to the Hik-Partner Pro Compatibility List for a complete list of supported models.

See the next section for instructions.

If your NVR does not support cloud storage, you can use a Hik-Partner Pro Box to help the NVR upload footage to the cloud.

See details in Set Cloud Storage for Hik-Partner Pro Box .

How to enable cloud storage for an NVR that supports cloud storage?

Select the NVR’s site, and then select the Cloud Storage tab. Click Enable Cloud Storage Service to

set up cloud storage for the NVR and its channels.

Figure 15-13 Cloud Storage

When setting up the cloud storage, you need to read and follow the recommendations for the resolution, bit rate, and number of the channels at the top of the page.

(T) 1, Based on the cunent network condition, it is recommended that you set no more than 7 cloud storage channel(s) with the resolution of 1920’1080, or set no more than 9 cloud storage channel(s) with the resolution of 1280’720, or set no more than 15 cloud storage channels) with the resolution of 704’576

To use the cloud storage service, set the events for the channel according to your needs, including motion detection, intrusion detection, and line crossing detection, and then enable Notify Surveillance Center.
After enabling uploading video to cloud storage, the device will not support H.264+, H.265+, or network camera connection (except those accessed by disabling analog channels). The resolution cannot be 8 MP,

Max. Channels: 2 Cloud Storage Enabled: 1

Available Bandwidth (Latest Tested) 7888 kbps Bandwidth Required (Estimated)256 kbps

Cloud Storage Service: Not Enabled

Figure 15-14 Cloud Storage Settings

The steps are similar to those of setting up cloud storage for a Hik-Partner Pro Box. You can refer to Set Cloud Storage for Hik-Partner Pro Box for information on the video resolution, event settings, and service activation.

Note

If Smart H.264+ / H.265+ encoding is enabled for the channel with cloud storage enabled, the quality of the footage on cloud will be affected. The platform will notify you to disable Smart H. 264+ / H.265+ encoding.
If stream encryption is not enabled for an encoding device linked to an NVR that supports cloud storage, you cannot enable cloud storage for the channels of the encoding device.

15.4.5 Set Cloud Storage for DVR

When you complete adding a DVR that supports cloud storage to a site, the result page will show the entry for setting cloud storage. You can skip the settings, but it is recommended that you click the entry to start the settings, including network test (optional), event settings, stream type settings, enabling cloud storage for the channels of the DVR that supports cloud storage, and activating cloud storage service for the channels. When you complete all these settings, the DVR that supports cloud storage will be able to upload event-related video footage from its linked channels to the cloud.

Steps

dlNote

If your DVR does not support cloud storage, you can use a Hik-Partner Pro box to help the DVR upload footage to the cloud. See details in Set Cloud Storage for Hik-Partner Pro Box .
If you skip the cloud storage settings when completing adding the DVR that supports cloud storage, you can click the device in the device list to open its settings panel to set cloud storage for it later.

Add a DVR that supports cloud storage to a site by Hik-Connect (P2P).

CHjNote

For details about adding a DVR that supports cloud storage, see Add Device by Entering Serial No. , Batch Add Devices , or Add Detected Online Device .
If you add the DVR that supports cloud storage by IP/Domain name, its cloud storage functionality will be unavailable.

When you completes adding the device, the entry for setting cloud storage will be displayed on the adding result page.

Click Cloud Storage Settings to start setting cloud storage parameters.

You enter the Network Test page.

Optional: Click Start to test the network performance if the network bandwidth is limited, and then click Next when the test completes.

‘Note

For details about network test, see Network Test .
You can click Skip to skip the step.

You enter the Cloud Storage Settings page, on which all the channels of the DVR that supports cloud storage are displayed.

Select Main Stream or Sub Stream from the drop-down list as the stream type for the channel. dlNote

The video definition of main stream and sub stream are displayed below the drop-down list. Make sure the number of standard definition channel(s) or high definition channel(s) is no more than the recommended upper-limit displayed on the Add Channel window (if you have tested your network).

Click Event Settings to set the events that will trigger video recording action of the channel.

US Note

Enable Motion Detection

Turn on the switch to enable motion detection.

Area Settings

Tap Draw Area to draw an area on the image, and then drag the slider to set the sensitivity of motion detection.

Objects in motion will be detected within the drawn area.

Arming Schedule

Define the time period during which motion detection is activated.

Linkage Method

Make sure Notify Surveillance Center is checked, otherwise the channel will not record video footage even if the event is detected.

Turn on Cloud Storage to enable cloud storage functionality for the channel.

C® Note

If it is the first time you enable cloud storage for a channel of the DVR that supports cloud storage, the DVR will be automatically rebooted. Please wait patiently until it completes rebooting and then open its settings panel to complete the steps below.

Click Activate to activate cloud storage service for the channel.

‘Note

For details about how to activate the service, see Activate or Renew Service for a Channel .

The DVR that supports cloud storage will automatically reboot. After that, the event related video footage of the channel will be uploaded to the cloud.

C® Note

When cloud storage service is activated for the channel, you cannot turn off Cloud Storage for the channel by default.

Click Finish.
Optional: Click the DVR that supports cloud storage in the device list to open its settings panel, and then click Edit to edit the settings of its channels.

CS Note

If you turn off Cloud Storage for all of its channels, the DVR that supports cloud storage will automatically reboot itself.

15.4.6 Set Cloud Storage for Solar Camera

You can enable and set up cloud storage for a solar camera when adding the solar camera to a site. When you complete the settings, the solar camera will be able to upload event-related footage of its channel to the cloud.

Steps

CS Note

If you skip the cloud storage settings when adding a solar camera, you can go to the site to which the solar camera is added to set cloud storage for it later.
For a complete list of supported solar camera models, refer to the Hik-Partner Pro Compatibility List.

Add a solar camera to a site by Hik-Connect (P2P).

C® Note

For details about adding solar cameras, see Add Device by Entering Serial No. , Batch Add Devices , or Add Detected Online Device .
If the solar camera is added by IP address / domain name, its cloud storage functionality will be unavailable.

When you complete adding the solar camera, the entry for setting cloud storage will be displayed on the adding result page.

Click Cloud Storage Settings to start setting the cloud storage parameters.

A pop-up window indicating the time remaining for waking up the solar camera will appear before entering the Cloud Storage Settings page, on which the channel of the solar camera is displayed.

Optional: On the Network Test page, click Start to test the network performance if the network bandwidth is limited, and then click Next when the test completes.

OS Note

For details about network test, see Network Test .
You can click Skip to skip the step.

Select Main Stream or Sub-Stream from the drop-down list as the stream type for the channel.

CS Note

The video definition of main stream and sub-stream are displayed next to the drop-down list.

Click Event Settings to set the event that will trigger the video recording action of the channel.

US Note

Currently only motion detection is supported by solar cameras.

Enable Motion Detection

Turn on the switch to enable motion detection.

Area Settings

Tap Draw Area to draw an area on the image, and then drag the slider to set the sensitivity of motion detection.

Objects in motion will be detected within the drawn area.

Arming Schedule

Define the time period during which motion detection is activated.

Linkage Method

Make sure Notify Surveillance Center is checked, otherwise the channel will not record video footage even if the event is detected.

Switch on Cloud Storage to enable cloud storage for the channel.
Click Activate Service to activate cloud storage service for the channel.

CS Note

For details about how to activate the service, see Activate or Renew Service for a Channel .
After the cloud storage service is activated for the channel, you will not be able to disable cloud storage for the channel.

Click Finish.

The event-related video footage of the channel will be uploaded to the cloud.

- 1. Network Test

When your network bandwidth is limited, you can only enable cloud storage for a limited number of channels, otherwise video loss may occur. To avoid such a risk, you can perform network test. Based on your network conditions, the result of network test shows the maximum number of channel(s) with cloud storage enabled and the recommended resolution setting for each channel, helping you to set cloud storage in the way that utilize the limited network bandwidth to the largest extent.

OS Note

It takes about one minute to test the network.

You can click the cloud storage device in the device list to open the device settings panel, and then click ^ Start to start network test.

- 1. Activate or Renew Service for a Channel

On the cloud storage service page for a site, you can view the service status of channels of the cloud storage device(s) added to the site. If cloud storage service is not activated for a certain channel, you need to activate the service before using the feature. If the service activated for a channel is about to expire or has already expired, you can renew the service for the channel.

Before You Start

Make sure you have added cloud storage device(s) to the site. For details, refer to Add Device .

Steps

US Note

For a device which doesn’t support the Hik-Connect service, you need to add it to Hik-Partner Pro via the proxy of a Hik-Partner Pro Box first, and then activate the cloud storage service for channels of the device. See Add Devices Without Support for the Hik-Connect Service for details about how to add this type of devices.

Go to the Customer Site page.
Click a site to enter the site details page.
Select the Cloud Storage tab.
Open the Activate / Renew Cloud Storage Service window.

If cloud storage service is not enabled for any of the channels of the cloud storage device, click Enable Cloud Storage Service first, select an online device from the list, enable Cloud Storage for a device channel, and click Activate Service.
If a cloud storage device has at least one channel with cloud storage service enabled, its linked channels and their service status will be displayed on the page. In the Operation column of a channel, click Activate Service to activate the service for the channel, or click Renew Service to renew the service for the channel.

Figure 15-15 Activate Cloud Storage Service Window

‘Note

You can view the available packages which you have purchased. You can also click Online Purchase to purchase more packages if needed. For details, refer to Purchase Cloud Storage Service .

Activate or renew the cloud storage service for the channel.

Click Service Package, select a package type, and click /x (or manually enter a number) to set the number of package(s) to be used.
Click Activate by Service Key, and enter the 16-character service key.

C® Note

You can consult the distributor to get the service key.

Finish activating or renewing the cloud storage service.

For activating cloud storage service, click Activate Service.
For renewing cloud storage service, click Renew.

After activating or renewing the service, you can view the package type and expiry date of the service activated for each channel.

15.4.9 View Cloud Storage Details

You can view details of the cloud storage service, including the number of used and remaining service packages and the details (such as the expiry date and status) of service activated for channels of the cloud storage devices. You can also perform operations such as renewing the service for further use.

You can enter the cloud storage details page via the following two methods:

Click the Hik-ProConnect tab. On the navigation pane, select Service ^ My Service ^ Cloud Storage Service .
Click the Hik-ProConnect tab. On the navigation pane, select Service ^ My Service ^ All Services , find the cloud storage service block, and click Details.

Figure 15-16 Cloud Storage Service Details Page

On the cloud storage details page, you can have an overall view of the cloud storage service packages that you have purchased and used, view the status of the service activated for different channels, and perform the following operations if needed.

Filter: Click to filter the channels of cloud storage devices according to the service status (expire soon or expired).
Search: Enter a keyword (name of device, site, or site owner) in the search box to search for and view the service status of specific channels.
Purchase Cloud Storage Service Package: Click Online Purchase on the upper right corner of the page to purchase more cloud storage service packages as needed. For details, refer to Purchase Cloud Storage Service .
Renew Cloud Storage Service: For the service that will expire soon, click Renew to renew the cloud storage service. For details, refer to Activate or Renew Service for a Channel .

15.5 HCC Services

HCC services refer to the enterprise-user services offered by the HikCentral Connect (HCC) system, which provides a Video Security as a Service (VSaaS) solution for enterprise users. An HCC system includes three subsystems, namely the Video Management System (VMS), on-board monitoring system, and alarm detection system, offering video management service, on-board monitoring service, and alarm detection service respectively.

See the following sections for more information about HCC services.

Relationship Between Hik-Partner Pro and HCC
Introduction to the Services of HCC
HCC System User Types
Clients for Accessing HCC

Relationship Between Hik-Partner Pro and HCC

HCC systems can be created on Hik-Partner Pro by installers like you and handed over to an enterprise user of HCC. To hand over a system, an email containing a super user account and an initial password will be sent to your customer for logging in to the HCC system. If there are devices added to the HCC system, the devices will be handed over together with the system. Refer to Create HCC Systems and Hand Over an HCC System and Devices for details.

Figure 15-17 How an HCC System Is Created on Hik-Partner Pro and Handed Over

HCC systems can also be created by the self-registered HCC users themselves and added to Hik- Partner Pro for installers like you to purchase/activate value-added services for them. To complete the account linking process, HCC super users will need to give their account information (i.e., email address of the system owner) to you, who can then send an account linking request to them using the information. Refer to Link with HCC Account for details.

Figure 15-18 How an HCC System Is Created and Added to Hik-Partner Pro

Introduction to the Services of HCC

Table 15-9 Services of HCC

Service

Description

Video Management Service

The video management service provides video monitoring features such as live view, playback, and cloud storage. Your customers can enjoy the following perks:

Easy-to-use Portal and Mobile Client for centralized management of video resources.
Centralized monitoring anywhere anytime via the live view in 64- window division mode.
Convenient evidence search via simultaneous playback of up to 16 channels.
Receiving multiple types of alarm notifications and handling/marking important ones.
Flexible creation of sub accounts for different persons such as operators and IT managers.
Convenient event backtrack via detailed logs.

On-Board Monitoring Service

The on-board monitoring service provides features such as vehicle management, real-time vehicle locating, and driving monitoring. Your customers can enjoy the following perks:

Service

Description

Easy-to-use Portal and Mobile Client for centralized management of vehicles after connecting them to the cloud.
Viewing real-time locations of vehicles via GPS positioning.
Live view and playback via cameras mounted in/on vehicles.
Playing back vehicle tracks and viewing related footage.
Flexible creation of sub accounts for different persons such as operators and IT managers.

Alarm Detection Service

The alarm detection service provides features such as real-time monitoring of partition (area) status and resource arming controls. Your customers can enjoy the following perks:

Professional security services with the use of security control devices.
Multiple ways of arming/disarming partitions (areas).
Assigning different operation permissions for better teamwork.
Handling alarms from partitions (areas) and zones directly on the map.
Linkage between alarms and videos for you to check the situation in time.
Features for maintenance which help you to manage alarm detection systems easily.

HCC System User Types

Table 15-10 User Types

User Type	Description
Super User	The enterprise user who accepts a ready-to-use HCC system handed over from installers like you or self-registers an HCC account and plays the role of the initial administrator of HCC. The super user has full access to the resources and features of HCC.
Normal User	All other users of HCC except the super user.

Clients for Accessing HCC

Table 15-11 Portal and Mobile Client

Client	Description
Portal	Portal for the super user and normal users to log in to HCC to manage resources and perform related configurations and operations. All the video management features, on-board

Client	Description
	monitoring features, and alarm detection features are available on the Portal.
Mobile Client	Mobile Client for the super user and normal users to log in to HCC to use the video management features, on-board monitoring features, and alarm detection features such as live view, playback, driving monitoring, track playback, and arming control of security control partitions (areas) or zones.

- 1. Purchase HCC Services

In the service market, you can either purchase HCC service packages online or activate the services by entering service keys purchased from local distributors offline.

Before You Start

Make sure that the HCC service is available in your country/region.

Steps

Note

Activating the service by service key is only supported in some countries and regions. Contact a local distributor for details.

Go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Service ^ Service Market .
In the Value-Added Services area, click HikCentral Connect Service.
Click Online Purchase.

C® Note

If your country/region supports activating by service key and you have purchased a service key from a distributor, you can also click Activate by Service Key to activate the service.

Set the number of the service packages to be purchased.

C® Note

Each type of services (video management, on-board monitoring, and alarm detection) is offered in both monthly and annual packages.
You can also purchase cloud storage service packages along with the video management service packages for enabling cloud storage service for your video management channels. To do so, check the checkbox displayed under each type of video management service packages and set the number of each type of packages according to your needs.
The number set for each type of service packages and the total price (tax included) will be displayed on the right under Currently Selected for you to confirm before checkout.

Enter your VAT number.

il Note

The VAT number entered here will be displayed on the payment receipt.

Select Credit/Debit Cards as the payment method.
Click Checkout to enter the payment page and complete your payment.
Optional: Go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Service ^ Service Market ^ My Service ^ HikCentral Connect Service to view your HCC service packages and manage them.

CH] Note

For more details, refer to Manage Your HCCServices .

- 1. Manage Your HCC Services

In My Service, you can manage your HCC services including the video management service, onboard monitoring service, and alarm detection service.

diNote

Make sure that the HCC service is available in your country/region.

You can go to the HikCentral Connect service details page by clicking Hik-ProConnect ^ Service ^ My Service ^ HikCentral Connect Service .

On the HikCentral Connect service details page, you can view the number of services that have expired and are about to expire within 30 days. You can also click All Systems or a specific system to view the following information: the number of resources (e.g., channels, vehicles, zones) added for each service, the service expiry time, and the service status (normal, expire soon, expired, trial, free, inactivated).

Figure 15-19 HikCentral Connect Services

- 1. Create HCC Systems

On the Hik-Partner Pro Portal, you can create HCC systems which contain the video management service, on-board monitoring service, and alarm detection service. After you hand an HCC system over to a customer, the customer becomes the system owner and can log in to HCC with the given account and use the above-mentioned services to manage devices and perform monitoring tasks. You can still monitor the HCC system on the Hik-Partner Pro Portal, including the capacity and the status of the services activated for the system.

Before You Start

Make sure that the HCC service is available in your country/region.

Steps

C0Note

HCC systems can also be created by the self-registered HCC users themselves. To add their selfcreated HCC systems to Hik-Partner Pro and offer them value-added services, you need to link with their self-registered accounts. Refer to Link with HCCAccount for more details.

Go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Site & HCC ^ HikCentral Connect .
Click Create HikCentral Connect System to open the Create HikCentral Connect System pane.

Figure 15-20 Create HikCentral Connect System

Create a name for the HCC system.
Select a time zone for the HCC system.
Optional: Enter the address of your customer.
Optional: Enter the remarks.
Click OK.
Optional: Perform the following operations as needed.

View System Details

Click the name of an HCC system to view its details, including the validity period of the video management service, on-board monitoring service, and alarm detection service, whether the system has been handed over, etc.

Hand Over

System

Click in the Operation column to hand over a system, or click the name of an HCC system to enter its details page and click Hand Over on the right. Refer to Hand Over an HCC System and Devices for details.

Delete

System(s)

Select system(s), and click Delete to delete the selected system(s).

- 1. Add Devices to an HCC System

You can add devices to an HCC system before handing it over to a customer.

□S Note

Make sure that the HCC service is available in your country/region.
The systems created by HCC users themselves and added to Hik-Partner Pro via account linking do not support the device adding.

You can add devices to an HCC system via one of the three following ways:

Add Devices on HCC System List Page
Add Devices on HCC System Details Page
Add Devices After You Finish On-Site Config

After entering the Add Device page, refer to the hints displayed on the right of the page or the step descriptions in Add Detected Online Device and Add Device by Entering Serial No. respectively for details about adding devices. You can create a new HCC system or select an existing HCC system (not handed over) for adding devices to.

Refer to Device Status and Further Operations for more details about the status of added devices and what operations you can further perform.

Add Devices on HCC System List Page

Go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Site & HCC ^ HikCentral Connect and click Add Device at the top.

Figure 15-21 Add Devices on HCC System List Page

Add Devices on HCC System Details Page

Go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Site & HCC ^ HikCentral Connect and click the name of an HCC system to enter its details page. If there are no devices added to the system, you can click Add Device below the descriptions of each service.

Figure 15-22 Add Devices on HCC System Details Page (First Time Adding)

If you have added devices to the system before and want to add more, click Add Device next to Hand Over Now to add more devices before handing these over.

Devices to Be Handed Over (4)

DS-‘

Device Serial No, •

Device Type: DVR/NVR

DS-

Device Serial No,

Device Type: DVR/NVR

îgî Remote Configuration EM Live View *►} Playback

îgî Remote Configuration EM Live View Playback

Device Serial No,

Device Type: Network Camera

DS-

Remote Configuration El Live View Playback

Device Serial No,

Device Type: DVR/NVR

£gî Remote Configuration EM Live View **)• Playback

Figure 15-23 Add Devices on HCC System Details Page (Add More)

Add Devices After You Finish On-Site Config

After batch configuring devices via On-Site Config (refer to Batch Configure Devices on LAN for details), click Add Device on the prompt window to enter the Add Device page.

Figure 15-24 Prompt Window After Finishing On-Site Config

Device Status and Further Operations

After the devices are added via one of the above ways, you can click Hand Over Now to hand over the devices right away to a customer along with the HCC system, or click Continue Adding Devices to add more. The added devices will be displayed on the details page of the HCC system below the service plan details.

Devices to Be Handed Over (4)

Hand Over Now

+ Add Device

DS-

DS-•

Device Serial No,

Device Type: DVR/NVR

Sgî Remote Configuration El Live View Playback

Device Serial No, •

Device Type: DVR/NVR

Remote Configuration E Live View Playback

DS-

Device Serial No,

Device Type: Network Camera

Remote Configuration El Live View Playback

DS-

Device Serial No,

Device Type: DVR/NVR

Remote Configuration E Live View Playback

Figure 15-25 Device List of an HCC System

If the system is not handed over to a customer, the devices will be in the “to be handed over” status, and you can perform operations such as remote device configuration, deleting devices, and editing the device names.

Once you have initiated a handover attempt, the status of the devices will be changed to “to be accepted”. For devices to be accepted, you can only view the device list and cannot perform any other operations.

The devices handed over successfully (i.e., accepted by your customer on HCC) will not be displayed on Hik-Partner Pro anymore. Those failed to be handed over will be shown on the page for you to check and notify your customer of the (partial) handover failure.

Figure 15-26 Device(s) Failed to Be Handed Over

- 1. Link with HCC Account

You can link with the self-registered users of HCC, or HCC users whose systems are created by other Hik-Partner Pro users, to add their HCC systems to your Hik-Partner Pro and offer value-added services for them.

Note

Make sure that the HCC service is available in your country/region.

The self-registered HCC users can create an HCC system on their own and start using the video management service and/or on-boarding monitoring service of HCC on free service plans. However, if they want to use the alarm detection service, upgrade the free service plans to trial plans, or enjoy the service features without limitations, they need to link with installers like you to purchase/activate the services for them.

To complete the linking process, you can go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Site & HCC ^ HikCentral Connect , click Link with HikCentral Connect Account at the top, and enter the account information (i.e., email address) given by the self-registered users for you to send them the account linking request.

Figure 15-27 Link with HikCentral Connect Account

After a linking request is approved, the HCC system whose system owner is this HCC account will be added to your HikCentral Connect system management page for you to manage, such as performing service plan upgrades and service activations.

CH] Note

An HCC account can only be linked with one installer at a time. If your customer has already linked with another installer, you can still send a linking request. After the request is approved, you can start managing your customer’s HCC system and the services already activated by the previous installer will not take up your service package inventory.
For linking with an HCC account (system) created by another installer, once your customer approves your linking request, the HCC system is deleted from the other installer’s Hik-Partner Pro account and added to yours.
- 1. Hand Over an HCC System and Devices

After you create an HCC system, you can hand it over to a customer together with the devices added to it. As a result, the customer becomes the system owner and is able to use the services of HCC (i.e., video management, on-board monitoring, and alarm detection service) to manage the corresponding devices and perform monitoring tasks. You can still monitor the HCC system on Hik- Partner Pro after the system handover.

Before You Start

Make sure that the HCC service is available in your country/region.

Steps

The systems added to Hik-Partner Pro via account linking do not support device adding and handover.

Go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Site & HCC ^ HikCentral Connect .
Choose from the followings to start the handover process.

Click _i in the Operation column of a system to be handed over.
Click the name of an HCC system to enter its details page. On the page, click Hand Over on the system details pane, or click Hand Over Now next to Devices to Be Handed Over (if there are devices added to the system).
Click Hand Over Now on the success page after you add devices to an HCC system. For details about adding devices to an HCC system, refer to Add Devices to an HCCSystem .

A window may pop up to remind you that you will not be able to add devices to the system after handing it over to your customer.

Figure 15-28 Device Adding Reminder for System Handover

3. Optional: On the pop-up window, click OK to go to the device adding page to add devices, or click Cancel to proceed with the handover process.

4. On the Hand Over System pane, enter the email address, first name, and last name of your customer.

Figure 15-29 Hand Over System

Click Confirm.

The status of the system and the devices added to it (if any) will be changed to “to be accepted”. An email will be sent to your customer to provide them the account information. After successfully logging in to their system, your customer will receive another email notifying them of the device handover attempt.

Optional: Contact the customer to log in to the HCC system and accept the devices.

15.5.7 HCC Authorization Code

You can access your customers’ HCC systems using the authorization code created by them on HCC to provide them maintenance services within a set period of time.

03 Note

Make sure that the HCC service is available in your country/region.

If your customer needs maintenance services from you, they can create an authorization code on HCC for you to access their HCC system directly without the need to log in using their account name and password.

To do so, you can go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Site & HCC ^ HikCentral Connect , click HikCentral Connect Authorization Code at the top, and enter the authorization code given to you by your customer. To access their HCC system, confirm that the system information (system name and account information) displayed after you enter the code is correct and click Access HikCentral Connect.

Figure 15-30 Enter HikCentral Connect Authorization Code

15.6 People Counting Service

Hik-Partner Pro offers people counting service to help your customers to resolve issues related to people flow control. After adding people counting cameras to specific Sites managed via this platform and activating this service for your customers, you can integrate people counting capabilities to of these cameras with the platform so as to monitor in real time the people densities of specific areas in these Sites. These cameras will count people entering, exiting, or passing by the areas, and analyze whether people densities of these areas reach the upper-limits.

This is useful for certain commercial and health protection scenarios, such as limiting the customer traffic of a shopping mall during the promotion period.

C® Note

People density here refers to the amount of people staying within a limited area at the same time.

- 1. Flow Chart for Setting People Counting Service

The flow chart below shows the recommended process for setting people counting service.

Figure 15-31 Flow Chart

The table below shows the description of each step and the link to corresponding section.

Table 15-12 Flow Chart Description

Step

Description

Add People Counting Cameras to a Site

Add people counting cameras (i.e., the cameras with people counting capability) to a specific Site. For details about adding devices, see Add Device and its sections.

Activate People Counting

Service for Channels

Activate people counting service for specific channels of the added people counting cameras. For details, see Activate People

Counting Service for Channels .

Step

Description

Add a Group for People Counting

Add a group to define people counting rules, such as calculation mode and maximum allowed people in the area. For details, see Add a Group for People Counting .

Hand Over Site to Your Customer

After complete the required configurations, hand over the site to your customer, so they will be the site owner. For details, see Hand Over Site .

Œ] Note

When your customer accept the site handover on the Hik- Connect Mobile Client, he/she will be able to access the people counting functionality of the people counting cameras via the Mobile Client.

- 1. Activate People Counting Service for Channels

If the end user needs to use people counting related functionality on Hik-Connect, you should activate people counting service for channels of the people counting cameras first.

Before You Start

Make sure you have added people counting cameras to the target site. For details, see Add

Device

Make sure you have the permission for device configuration. Or you should apply for the permissions first. For details, see Apply for Device Permission .

Steps

Go to the Customer Site page.
Click a site to enter its site details page, and the select People Counting tab.

The people counting cameras will be displayed in the Device area.

Click > to open the device panel.

The channel(s) of the device will be displayed on the panel.

Click Activate to open the Activate People Counting Service window.
Enter the user name and password of the admin account of the device.
Click OK to activate people counting service for the channel.

15.6.3 Add a Group for People Counting

A people counting group refers to a group of people counting cameras mounted in a certain region.

A people counting group defines two elements, namely, the boarder of the region (i.e., the cameras added to the group) and the maximum amount of people allowed to stay in the region.

The cameras added to the group will detect the entering and exiting persons and at the same time calculate related data. In this way, the platform will be able to determine if the amount of persons staying in the region has reached the maximum allowed value, and meanwhile send related data to the Hik-Connect Mobile Client, which will display in real time the number of persons staying in the region and the remaining quota for entering the region.

This allows the end users to use Hik- Connect to remotely monitor the people density of the region and take corresponding measures in time. The function is useful in various scenarios in which people flow of a certain region requires to be limited. For example, assume that your customer is the manager of a supermarket, when a contact-transmission disease outbreaks, you can set the people counting cameras at the entrance and exit of the supermarket as a people counting group and enable it, thus allowing your customer to respond timely based on the data on Hik-Connect so as to lower the risk of infection for the customers in the supermarket.

Before You Start

Make sure you have configuration permission for the people counting cameras. Or you should apply for the permissions first. For details about applying for permission, see Apply for Device Permission
Make sure you have enabled people counting service for channels. For details, see Activate People Counting Service for Channels .
Make sure people counting settings (e.g., entering direction) has been configured on the camera. For details, see the user manual of the camera.

Steps

CXlNote

See Hik-Connect Mobile Client User Manual for details about how to view related people counting data on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

Go to the Customer Site page.
Click a site to enter its site details page, and the select People Counting tab.
Click Add Group to open the Add Group panel.
Set the required information.

Group Name

Create a name for the people counting group.

For example, if you need to count the customer flow in the first floor of a shopping mall, you can name the group as “1st Floor”.

Select Channel

Click Add and then select channel(s) to add the selected one(s) to the group.

Note

Only the channel(s) that have been enabled the people counting service can be selected.
Up to 16 channels can be added to one people counting group.
You can add a channel to up to 16 people counting groups.

Calculation Mode

Set the calculation mode for each selected channel.

Standard

Count the amount of the people entered detected by the camera as the amount of people entering the region and count exited as exiting the region. Select this mode when the direction of entering configured on the camera is the same with the actual entering direction.

□S Note

See the picture below for reference, in which the blue arrows represent the actual entering and exiting direction of the people, while the red arrows represent the entering direction configured on the camera.

Reverse

Count the amount of people entered detected by the camera as the amount of people exiting the region and count exited as entering the region. Select this mode when the direction of entering configured on the camera is opposite to the actual calculation direction.

‘Note

Figure 15-32 Calculation Mode

Max. People Allowed

Define the maximum amount of people (range: 1 to 100,000) allowed to stay in a specific region at the same time.

Push Alarm to Hik-Connect If Max. People Reached

After enabled, an alarm notification will be pushed to the Hik-Connect Mobile Client if Max. People Allowed is reached.

C® Note

Please notify the end user that he/she should keep the Notification functionality of the Hik- Connect Mobile Client enabled, or he/she will not receive this alarm notification on the Mobile Client. For details about enabling the Notification functionality on Hik-Connect, see Hik-Connect Mobile Client User Manual.

Click OK.

The people counting group will be displayed on the People Counting tab and it is enabled by default. And the end user will be able to view corresponding people counting data on Hik- Connect Mobile Client.

0® Note

You can add up to 16 people counting groups to a site.

Optional: Perform the following operations if required.

Edit Group Hover the cursor onto • • • and then click to edit the group.

‘Note

If you delete a people counting group, the corresponding people counting functionality will also be deleted.

Disable a

Specific Group

Set ^2) to CW to disable the group.

‘•Note

If you disable the group, the people counting related functionality on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client will be unavailable.

Batch Enable/

Disable

Groups

Click Enable All or Disable All to enable or disable all groups respectively.

CSjNote

If you disable the group, the people counting related functionality on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client will be unavailable.

15.7 Temperature Screening Service

Temperature Screening service provides contact-less skin-surface temperature measurement and facial mask detection in real time. You can activate this service for your customers, such as the manager of a retail store or the administrator of a school campus, so that they can view the screening results on their mobile phone via Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

‘Note

The service is only available in some countries and regions.

- 1. Flow Chart for Setting Temperature Screening Service

The flow chart below shows the recommended process for setting temperature screening service.

Figure 15-33 Flow Chart

The table below shows the description of each step and the link to corresponding section.

Table 15-13 Flow Chart Description

Step	Description
Add Temperature Screening Devices to a Site	Add temperature screening devices (i.e., the devices with temperature screening capability) to a specific Site. For details about adding devices, see *Add Device* and its sections.
Activate Temperature Screening Service to Channels	Activate temperature screening service to specific channels of the added temperature screening devices. For details, see *Activate Temperature Screening Service for Channels* .
Hand Over Site to Your Customer	After complete the required configurations, hand over the site to your customer, so they will be the site owner. For details, see *Hand Over Site* . C@Note When your customer accept the site handover on the Hik- Connect Mobile Client, he/she will be able to access the temperature screening functionality of the temperature screening devices via the Mobile Client.

- 1. Activate Temperature Screening Service for Channels

If you have added devices that support temperature screening to the platform, you need to activate temperature screening service for the channels of these devices and then set temperature screening parameters for each channel. After that, the temperature screening functionality of these devices will be available and the Site Owner will be able to view the skin-surface temperature of the persons appeared in the live view of the channels on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

Optimally, you can also enable the channels to push abnormal temperature alarm to Hik- Connect, upload captured pictures of the person whose temperature is abnormal to Hik-Connect, detect if the persons wear masks, and upload the no-mask alarm to Hik-Connect.

Before You Start

Make sure you have added devices that support temperature screening to the target Site.

Steps

OS Note

Temperature screening related functionality are not available in some countries and regions.

Go to the Customer Site page.
Click a Site to enter its site details page, and then select Temperature Screening tab.

Only the devices that support temperature screening will be displayed.

Click > to open the channel panel.

The channel(s) of the device will be displayed.

Click Activate to open the Activate Temperature Screening Service window.
Enter the user name and password of the admin account of the device.
Click OK to activate temperature screening service for the channel.
Set temperature screening parameters.
Click Settings to set the temperature screening parameters.

Temperature Threshold

For the channel of a temperature screening camera, set a temperature as the threshold for triggering abnormal temperature alarm if the detected skin-surface temperature is higher than the threshold.

For the channel of a face recognition terminal, define a temperature range as the range of normal skin-surface temperatures. An abnormal temperature alarm will be triggered if the detected skin-surface temperature is NOT within the range.

Mask Detection

After enabled, the temperature screening device will detect if the persons wear masks.

Store Temperature Screening Information

After enabled, the temperature screening information will be uploaded to the Hik-Partner Pro platform.

If disabled, the platform and the Hik-Connect Mobile Client will be unable to receive temperature screening information from temperature screening devices, including abnormal temperature alarm, normal temperature records, no-mask alarm, as well as the captured face pictures of the persons with abnormal skin-surface temperature.

Push Alarm to Hik-Connect If Abnormal Temp. Detected

After enabled, abnormal temperature alarms will be pushed to the Hik-Connect Mobile Client if abnormal skin-surface temperatures are detected.

OS Note

Please notify the end user that he/she should keep the Notification functionality of the Hik-Connect Mobile Client enabled, or he/she will not receive this alarm notification on the Mobile Client. For details about enabling the Notification functionality on Hik- Connect, see Hik-Connect Mobile Client User Manual.

Save Normal Temperature Records

Save normal temperature records on the Hik-Partner Pro platform.

Upload Captured Pictures

After enabled, the temperature screening device will capture the face picture of the person whose skin-surface temperature is abnormal and upload the captured picture to the platform.

C® Note

If disabled, the end user will be unable to view the captured picture on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

Push Alarm to Hik-Connect If Wearing No Mask Detected

After enabled, if a person who wears no mask is detected, an alarm about it will be pushed to the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

nS Note

Please notify the end user that he/she should keep the Notification functionality of the Hik-Connect Mobile Client enabled, or he/she will not receive this alarm notification on the Mobile Client. For details about enabling the Notification functionality on Hik- Connect, see Hik-Connect Mobile Client User Manual.

Click OK
Optional: Perform the following operations if required.

Disable Temperature Screening Functionality of a Specific Device

Disable Temperature Screening

Set ^3 to CW to disable the temperature screening functionality of the device.

US Note

If disabled, the end user will NOT be able to use the temperature screening functionality of the device on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

Click Disable All to disable all temperature screening functionality of all devices.

Functionality of All

Devices

Note

If disabled, the end user will NOT be able to use the temperature screening functionality of these devices on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

.8 Alarm Receiving Center (ARC) Service

Alarm Receiving Centers (ARC) is a facility that receives and responds to alarms from systems of companies, schools, factories, etc., for the security purpose. It is made up of a specially trained team who can react quickly when an alarm occurs. Hik-Partner Pro offers multiple ARCs, which can provide 24/7 remote alarm receiving service for customers.

If your company is a professional ARC, you can add your company to the Alarm Receiving Center (ARC) list. After that, all the other Hik-Partner Pro users can be your potential customers. They can select your company as the ARC for their customers. This can promote the brand awareness of your company and provide great possibility for your company to expand business.

The diagram below shows the overall process of how an installer can enable the ARC service for the installer’s customer.

Figure 15-34 Overall Process of Enabling ARC Service

In the diagram:

HPC represents Hik-Partner Pro and HC represents Hik-Connect.
“Joined as” indicates that a Hik-Partner Pro user has been authenticated as a user who runs/ manages a professional ARC. Once authenticated, this ARC will be listed in the ARC list of Hik- Partner Pro. For details about how to apply for “joining as ARC”, see Add Your Company to the ARC List .
For more information about the five procedures (marked with red digits in the diagram), see Enable ARC Service for Devices .
AX PRO represents the AX PRO security control panel. Here we take this device as a example.

OS Note

ARC service is only supported by the devices added by Hik-Connect (P2P). The supported device types include the camera and NVR manufactured by Hikvision, and AX PRO/Hub/Hybrid security control panel.

- 1. Add Your Company to the ARC List

You can add your company to the Alarm Receiving Center (ARC) list to enable your company to provide alarm receiving services to other Hik-Partner Pro users. After adding your company to the ARC list, all the Hik-Partner Pro users can view the company information and determine whether to connect the encoding devices and/or alarm devices managed by them to the ARC of your company. This can greatly increase brand awareness of your company and bring more customers to you.

Before You Start

Make sure the type of your company is ARC. For details, refer to Manage Company

Information . If the type of your company is not ARC, you will be reminded of changing the type to ARC first on the page of joining as ARC.

Make sure you have the permission for managing company information. If you do not have the permission, contact the Installer Admin.

Steps

Find the entry ofjoining as ARC.

CS Note

There are three entries.

Go to the Customer Site page, select a site from the list, select the ARC Service tab, and then click Join as ARC in the upper-right corner.

Figure 15-35 The First Entry

– Go to the Customer Site page, select a site from the list, select the ARC Service tab, click Select ARC to open the Select ARC for Authorization panel, and then click Join as ARC.

Select ARC for Authorization

^J your company is an Alarm Receiving Center (ARC}, you can apply for providing alarm monitoring services for other users. After the application is approved, your company information will be displayed on the ARC list in the ARC Service module of Hik-Partner Pro. All Hik-Partner Pro users can view the information and determine whether to connect the encoding devices and/or alarm devices managed by them to the ARC of your company Join as ARC

Figure 15-36 The Second Entry

Click Company ^ Company Information to enter the company information page, click Apply Now in the Add Your Company to ARC List area.

Figure 15-37 The Third Entry

You will enter the introduction page of applying for ARC and can read the detailed steps about how to apply for ARC.

Figure 15-38 The Introduction Page of Applying for ARC

If your company has not been authenticated, click Company Authentication ^ Authenticate Now to authenticate your company.

Note

For details, refer to Authenticate Account.

If your company has been authenticated, click Apply Now to enter the following page.

Apply for Adding Your Company to ARC List

Complete Required Information ô

• Company Name

Receive the ARC ID (API Key) and ARC Key (API Secret) and

I Email

‘ Country/Region

configurations.

located.

3 Connect a device to

‘ Service Available For

upload the evidence that your ARC

applying results, to the email aadress.

alarms from the

application quickly, if incorrect information is entered, your application

the application.

‘ State/Province/Region

Phone Number

Figure 15-39 Fill In Information

Enter or edit the required company information such as the email address.
Read Agreement on Joining as ARC carefully and check Agree to Agreement on Joining as ARC in the down-right corner.
Click Submit Application.

Figure 15-40 ARC ID & Key Sent

‘Note

You will receive an email containing the ARC ID (API Key) and ARC Key (API Secret). If receiving failed, you can click Resend to resend the ARC ID and ARC Key to your email address. Then, you can complete the ARC ID and ARC Key configuration on your ARC software (software used by your company for receiving alarms) or Hik IP Receiver Pro. If you have any questions about the ARC ID and ARC Key configuration, refer to Agreement on Joining as ARC and find the email for getting help.

Click ARC ID & Key Config Completed to enter the next page.
Authorize a device, and then upload the evidence (up to 2 pictures) that your ARC software can receive alarms from the device.

Figure 15-41 Authorize Device & Upload Evidence

C® Note

You can click the pictures on the right side to view the examples. Also, you can refer to Enable ARC Service for Devices for details about authorizing devices.

Click Confirm to enter the application approval page.

□S Note

Wait for the approval of your application. If the application is approved, your company information (e.g., brand logo) will be displayed on the ARC list. If the approval failed (e.g., you have entered the wrong company information), you should click Edit ARC Info to edit your ARC information.

15.8.2 Enable ARC Service for Devices

You can authorize a site to an ARC, and then enable the ARC service for devices on the site to allow the staff of the ARC to receive events from the devices, respond to the events, and send out emergency dispatches (if needed) around the clock.

Steps

CU Note

ARC service is only supported by the devices added by Hik-Connect (P2P). The supported device types include camera (except solar camera) and NVR manufactured by Hikvision, and AX PRO/Hub/Hybrid security control panel.
The ARC service is not available in all countries or regions.

Enter the Site list page.

Go to Site & HCC ^ Customer Site .
Go to Customer Site (if HikCentral Connect is not available in your country or region).

Select a Site to enter the site details page, and then select ARC Service.
Click Select ARC to display the Select ARC for Authorization pane.

OS Note

On the pane, you can view the details of each ARC, including the company name, logo, country/ region, location, contacts, and official website.

Optional: Click the official website of the ARC to view more information about it.
Select an ARC, and click Authorize.

The device(s) available for enabling the ARC service will be displayed, and an email will be sent to the ARC’s Email Address for Receiving Notification to notify them, with the user account, device serial No., device model, and your company information.

HE Note

The ARC service is only supported by Hikvision encoding devices and AX security control panel (including AX PRO, AX Hub, and AX Hybrid) added by Hik-Connect (P2P).

Switch on to enable the ARC service for a specific device.

The events detected by the device and the device exceptions will be sent to the ARC.

Optional: If you have enabled the ARC service for an AX device in the previous step and the device is accessed to the ARC via Hik IP Receiver Pro, click the device in the device list to open the configuration pane, and then set the way to connect the device to Hik IP Receiver Pro.

HO Note

Hik IP Receiver Pro functions as the medium for transmitting alarms and alarm-related videos from the device to the ARC.
You need to acquire Configuration permission before you can configure the device.
You might need to verify the Installer account of the device to modify this parameter.
If the device is armed, disarm it first.

Ways to Connect to Hik IP Receiver Pro

Connect Directly or by Hik-Partner Pro Server

When the two types of connection are both available, direct connection will be used in priority, i.e., the device will be connected to Hik IP Receiver Pro directly. When direct connection is abnormal, the device will be connected to Hik IP Receiver Pro by Hik-Partner Pro server. If direct connection is restored, the way will automatically switch back to direct connection.

Such a mechanism ensures the stability of data transmission from the device to the ARC.

Connect by Hik-Partner Pro Server

The device will be connected to Hik IP Receiver Pro byHik-Partner Pro server constantly.

OS Note

The stability of data transmission is lower if compared with Connect Directly or by Hik- ProConnect Server.

Optional: Click Deauthorize to deauthorize the ARC.

OS Note

After you deauthorize the ARC, the ARC service for all devices on the Site will be automatically disabled.
Once you deauthorize the ARC, an email will be sent to the ARC’s Email Address for Receiving Notification to notify them, with the user account, device serial No., device model, and your company information.

15.9 HikCentral ReGuard Service

HikCentral ReGuard (hereinafter referred to as HCRG) services are the value-added services offered by the HCRG. HCRG provides a security management solution that helps its users (i.e., service providers) with alarm receiving and handling.

CS Note

The HCRG services are not supported in some countries/regions. For details about the supported countries/regions, contact the local distributors or after-sales.
HCRG-related features are only supported on the Hik-Partner Pro Portal.

The HCRG user (usually the Remote Monitoring Center, or RMC, who provides the alarm receiving and handling services) registers and becomes a Hik-Partner Pro user to purchase HCRG services and generate an HCRG key on Hik-Partner Pro.
The HCRG user logs in to HCRG to activate the HCRG services by using the key.
After activation, the HCRG user can create work orders on HCRG, and assign the work orders to an installation company on Hik-Partner Pro by entering the Installer Admin account of the company.

EH] Note

All installers with the Manage Assigned Site permission in the company will receive the work order notifications, and those who are to handle the work orders will go to the sites to install the devices according to the address and customer information on the work orders.

Figure 15-42 How HCRG Services Are Used

- 1. Purchase HikCentral ReGuard Service

In the service market, you can purchase HCRG services by entering service keys purchased from local distributors offline.

Before You Start

Make sure you have completed account authentication before you can purchase HCRG services.

For details, see Authenticate Account.

Steps

■Note

Online purchase is currently not supported.

Go to the service purchase page.

– Go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Service ^ Service Market ^ HikCentral ReGuard Service .

Figure 15-43 HCRG Services in Service Market

– Go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Service ^ My Service ^ HikCentral ReGuard Service .

Figure 15-44 The Second Entry

Click Purchase by Service Key.
Enter the service key purchased from local distributors offline.
Click OK.

What to do next

Generate an HCRG key for activating the HCRG system. See details in Generate HikCentral ReGuard Key .

15.9.2 Generate HikCentral ReGuard Key

After HCRG services are purchased by service key, you can generate an HCRG key for activating the HCRG system. The generated key will be sent to the email address of the Installer Admin and is also displayed in My Service. HCRG users can log in to HCRG with the key to activate the HCRG system.

Before You Start

Make sure you have purchased HCRG services by service key. See details in Purchase HikCentral

ReGuard Service .

Steps

Go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Service ^ My Service ^ HikCentral ReGuard Service .

Figure 15-45 HikCentral ReGuard Service

Click Generate HCRG Key.

The generated HCRG key is displayed and automatically sent to the email address of the Installer Admin. You can click © / to hide/display the generated HCRG key.

What to do next

Log in to HCRG with the key to activate the HCRG system. See details in HikCentral ReGuard Web Client User Manual.
Manage HikCentral ReGuard services. See details in Manage HikCentral ReGuard Services .

15.9.3 Manage HikCentral ReGuard Services

After purchasing and activating HCRG services, you can monitor the real-time status of HCRG services on Hik-Partner Pro, including the total number of valid workstations, the number of valid additional services, the number of services expiring within 30 days, and the number of expired services.

Go to Hik-ProConnect ^ Service ^ My Service ^ HikCentral ReGuard Service .

Basic Services (1 Workstation/

Year)

You can view the total number of valid workstations and their detailed information, including the person who obtains the workstations, the number of workstations obtained by the person, and the validity period.

Additional Services

You can view the total number of valid additional services and for each service, you can view the validity period.

Service Filtering

You can view the total number of services expiring within 30 days and total number of expired services.

By selecting the service type (All Services, Workstation, Visualized Alarm, Virtual Guard, Work Order, or Operational Enhancement) and service status (All Statuses, Expires in 30

Days, Expired, or Not Expired), you can filter the service information.

15.10 Co-Branding

This feature helps improve the visibility of your brand, products, and services. It allows your customers to view some basic information of your company via Hik-Connect Mobile Client. You can purchase and enable this service as needed.

C® Note

You can get the co-branding service for free after purchasing the annual type of health monitoring packages (including All Device Annual Package and Network Camera Annual Package) for the first time. For details about how to purchase health monitoring packages, see Purchase Health Monitoring Service .

15.10.1 Purchase Co-Branding

In the service market, you can either purchase co-branding service packages online or activate them by entering service keys purchased from local distributors offline.

C® Note

Make sure you get your company authenticated. For details, see Authenticate Account.
Purchasing co-branding services online is supported only in some countries/areas. Contact a local distributor for details.

Go to Service ^ Service Market ^ Company Management . In the Co-Branding area, purchase the service packages online or activate the services by service keys.

Figure 15-46 Company Management

Online Purchase	Click Online Purchase. Specify the amount which determines the validity period, enter your VAT number, and select the payment method. Click Checkout to enter the payment page and complete your payment.
Activate by Service Key	Click Activate by Service Key if your country/region supports activating services by service keys and you have purchased a service key from a distributor. Enter the service key. Click OK.

15.10.2 Enable Co-Branding

If you enable the co-branding service, your customers (i.e., the end user) will be able to view your company information, such as company logo, address, and phone number, on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

LT Note

You can get the co-branding service for free after authenticating your account and adding 3

devices via P2P. See details in Authenticate Account and Add Device by Entering Serial No. .

Figure 15-47 Entrance for Getting Free Co-Branding

A window with notification about getting the co-branding service for free will pop up when your co-branding service expires in 2 months.
You can choose to or not to upload your company logo. If no company logo is uploaded, your company name, instead of your company logo, will be displayed on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client.

Go to Company Management ^ Co-Branding . Switch on Service Status, and then hover the cursor onto the Logo area to show the Edit button. And finally click Edit to upload your company logo. After you edit the logo, the latest logo will be updated to the Company Information page.

Figure 15-48 How Your Company Logo Will Be Shown to Your Customers

C®Note

To ensure the co-branding service works on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client, please ask your customers to update the Mobile Client to the required version (V 4.15.0 or later if the company logo is uploaded and V 4.26.0 or later if the company logo is not uploaded). You can send the QR code or download link shown in the banner on the Home page to them for downloading the Mobile Client.
If all the devices of your customer are managed by the same installation company, the installation company’s logo will be displayed on the login page and About page of your customer’s Hik-Connect Mobile Client.
If your customer’s devices are managed by different installation companies, your customer can go to the device details page on the Hik-Connect Mobile Client to view the companies’ logo and details.

Tools

Hik-Partner Pro provides tools, such as disk calculator and NVR channel calculator, to help you improve your work efficiency.

On the Hik-Partner Pro page, click Tools on the left pane to enter your tools page.

Batch Configuration

The tool is used to batch configure devices on LAN.

See Batch Configure Devices on LAN for details.

Batch Upgrade

The tool is used to detect whether the firmware of devices on LAN need to be upgraded and batch upgrade the firmware of the devices.

See Batch Upgrade Devices on LAN for details.

Search for Important Firmware Update

The tool is used to check whether the firmware of your device needs to be updated and download the relevant firmware package for the update.

Disk Calculator

The tool is used to calculate the recording time and recording space by setting related parameters.

NVR Channel Calculator

The tool is used to calculate the number of network cameras that can be connected to the NVR by setting the related parameters.

Focal Length Calculator

The tool is used to calculate focal length and object distance by setting related parameters such as sensor size. You can view the recommended data by the tool.

Bandwidth Calculator

The tool is used to calculate the required bandwidth of a network camera or NVR by setting parameters such as channel number and resolution.

Maintenance Quotation

The tool is used to create quotations for after-sales maintenance, which can help installers standardize the service process, improve customer satisfaction, and expand business.

See Create a Maintenance Quotation for details.

Rewards Store

Hik-Partner Pro provides a reward point system to reward your trust and support. By completing specific tasks (e.g., check-in), you can get the reward points redeemable for lots of gifts (e.g., certain value-added services) in the Rewards Store.

CH] Note

The reward point system is only supported in some countries/regions.
For some countries/regions, the reward points are available only when you have your company authenticated. For details about company authentication, see Authenticate Account.

Enter the Rewards Store page.

Click Check In to Earn Points/My Points in the upper-right corner to enter the Rewards Store.
Click Incentive ^ Rewards Store to enter the Rewards Store.

Figure 17-1 How to Enter the Rewards Store Page

For the Installer Admin and Installers, the information displayed on the Rewards Store page varies. The Installer Admin can view more information and perform more operations. See the table below for details.

Table 17-1 Available Information/Operations for the Installer Admin / Installers

Information/Operation	Installer Admin	Installer
Total Points Available	V View company total points.	V View personal total points.
Points History	V View and filter points earned by each staff member.	V View and filter points earned by the Installer.
Point Rules	V	V
Check-In Records	V Records of all staff member are available.	V Only the Installer’s own records are available.

Information/Operation	Installer Admin	Installer
Tier Information	V	V
Add Device to Earn More Points	V	V
View the Task List and Do Tasks □3 Note The task types include inviting friends (by sharing the OR code, invitation code, or invitation link), answering questions, browsing/liking news and how-to articles, inviting staff members, scanning SN codes, and adding devices.	V	V Installers can perform some of the tasks available for Installer Admin.
Redeem Points for Gifts	V	x
View My Gifts	V	x
Lucky Draw	V Only supported in some countries/regions.	x

îl Note

Distributors can go to My Hik-Partner ^ Gifts Verify to verify the gifts redeemed offline and export the records.
After user upgrading, if your original account and Hik-ePartner account are merged to one OneHikID account, the points in the two accounts will add up.

Figure 17-2 Rewards Store Page for Installer Admin

Figure 17-3 Rewards Store Page for Installers

Chapter 18 Rebate

For authenticated channel partners, they can view the rebates they earn from successfully promoting services (i.e., health monitoring service and cloud storage service) of Hik-Partner Pro to their customers, including installers and secondary distributors. Here we will introduce the process and the calculation method of earning rebates.

OS Note

This function is only available to some users in some countries/regions. For details, please contact Hikvision.

1. Generate Authentication Code

For some countries or regions, authenticated channel partners can generate authentication codes for installers and secondary distributors to complete the company authentications on Hik-Partner Pro, and then they can have chances to earn rebates.

C® Note

Contact the local Hikvision branch for details about whether the country or region supports generating authentication codes on Hik-Partner Pro.

Go to My Hik-Partner ^ Rebate ^ Authentication Code .

Figure 18-1 Generate Authentication Code

Generate an Authentication Code

Figure 18-2 Generate an Authentication Code

Click Generate to open the Generate an Authentication Code window.
Enter the information about account (email address or company ID) and select the country/ region of the installer or secondary distributor for whom you generate the authentication code.
Check You promise that you have checked the qualification of installer for generating authentication codes. and click OK.

The generated authentication code will be displayed on the Authentication Code page.

Batch Generate Authentication Codes

Figure 18-3 Batch Generate Authentication Codes

Click Batch Generate to open the Batch Generate Authentication Codes window.
Click Download to download the template and fill in the information about accounts of the installer or secondary distributor for whom you generate authentication codes.
Click Upload to upload the filled-in template file.
Select the country/region for the accounts you uploaded.

OXlNote

You can only batch generate authentication codes for accounts in the same country or region each time.

Check You promise that you have checked the qualification of installer for generating authentication codes. and click OK.

The generated authentication codes will be listed on the Authentication Code page.

Export Authentication Codes

Click Export Authentication Codes to export the generated authentication codes and send to the installer or secondary distributor.

You can also check Show Unused Authentication Codes Only to export the authentication codes that are not used.

18.2 The Process of Earning Rebates

The process of earning rebates varies basing on whether the country or region supports generating the authentication codes.

Process for Countries and Regions Which Support Generating Authentication Codes

dlNote

Contact the local Hikvision branch for details about whether the country or region supports generating authentication codes on Hik-Partner Pro.

The authenticated channel partner introduces and promotes services to an installer or secondary distributor when selling Hikvision devices.
The authenticated channel partner goes to My Hik-Partner ^ Rebate ^ Authentication Code on the Hik-Partner Pro Portal and generates an authentication code for the installer or secondary distributor.

CWNote

For details about generating authentication codes, refer to Generate Authentication Code .

The installer or secondary distributor authenticates their company by entering authentication codes.

CH] Note

For details about how to authenticate the company, refer to Authenticate Account.

The installer or secondary distributor activates services for devices via Hik-Partner Pro after their company authentication is completed.

HS Note

For details about how to activate services for devices, refer to Activate the Health Monitoring Service for Devices and Activate or Renew Service for a Channel .

Hik-Partner Pro calculates monthly rebate amount based on resources with service(s) activated in the last month for the authenticated channel partner.

LU Note

If a service has been activated for a resource before, the resource will NOT be included in statistics. The authenticated channel partner can go to My Hik-Partner ^ Rebate ^ Rebate Settings to view the calculation rules. And for more details, refer to The Way to Calculate Rebate Amount .

The authenticated channel partner gets the rebate amount in the form of a credit note.

CIS Note

The authenticated channel partner can go to My Hik-Partner ^ Rebate ^ Rebate Details to view the information about the rebates they earned. See View Rebate Details for details.

Process for Other Counties and Regions

The authenticated channel partner introduces and promotes services to an installer or secondary distributor when selling Hikvision devices.
The installer or secondary distributor activates services for devices via Hik-Partner Pro.

HS Note

For details about how to activate services for devices, refer to Activate the Health Monitoring Service for Devices and Activate or Renew Service for a Channel .

Hik-Partner Pro calculates monthly rebate amount based on resources with service(s) activated in the last month for the authenticated channel partner.

US Note

If a service has been activated for a resource before, the resource will NOT be included in statistics. The authenticated channel partner can go to My Hik-Partner ^ Rebate ^ Rebate Settings to view the calculation rules. Refer to The Way to Calculate Rebate Amount for details.

The authenticated channel partner gets the rebate amount in the form of a credit note.

US Note

The authenticated channel partner can go to My Hik-Partner ^ Rebate ^ Rebate Details to view the information about the rebates they earned. See View Rebate Details for details.

18.3 The Way to Calculate Rebate Amount

Here we introduce the four elements that determine the rebate amount, and the formula for calculating the rebate amount.

Go to My Hik-Partner ^ Rebate ^ Rebate Settings to view the calculation rules.

Elements that Determine the Rebate Amount

Four elements determine the earned rebate amount, including:

Number of Resources Contributed to Rebates
Unit Price
Rebate Rate
Calculation Type

Table 18-1 Element Description

Element

Description

Number of Resources

Contributed to Rebates

The number of resources which have contributed to rebates.

To be a resource contributed to rebates, 1) it should belong to an authenticated channel partner; 2) it should have been added to Hik-Partner Pro and the health monitoring service or cloud storage service should have been activated for it.

OXlNote

For the health monitoring service, “resource” refers to devices.
For the cloud storage service, “resource” refers to the channels linked to Hik-ProConnect box.

Unit Price

For the health monitoring service, the unit price refers to the monthly service fee per device.
For the cloud storage service, the unit price refers to the monthly service fee per channel.

CH] Note

For example, assume that a customer spent 288 US dollars to purchase a 7-Day Annual Package (a type of cloud storage service package; the “7-Day” means the videos uploaded to the cloud will be retained for 7 days; the “Annual” means the service lasts for 12 months) and activated it for two channels, the unit price in this case would be the result of 288/2/12, that is, 12 dollars.

Element

Description

Rebate Rate

Fixed rebate rate or tiered rebate rate, depending on the marketing strategy for the country or region.

For the tiered rebate rate, the authenticated channel partner can get a higher rebate rate when the number of resources with service activated reaches a certain threshold.

Calculation Type

One of two calculation types is used for calculating the rebate amount, that is, Combined or Separated, depending on the marketing strategy for the country or region.

Combined:

° For calculating the rebate amount related to the health monitoring service, the rebate rate(s) for different device types are the same, be it fixed or tiered rebate rate.

° For calculating the rebate amount related to the cloud storage service, the rebate rate for different types of service packages are the same, be it fixed or tiered rebate rate.

Separated:

° For calculating rebate amount related to the health monitoring service, the rebate rate for network cameras and other device types can be different. Other device types include the NVR/DVR, security control device, access control device, video intercom device, etc.

° For calculating rebates related to the cloud storage service, the rebate rate for different types of service packages can be different.

Formula for Calculating the Rebate Amount

The formula for calculating rebate amount is shown below:

Number of New Resources Contributed to Rebates in Current Month x Unit Price x Rebate Rate = Rebate Amount for Current Month

LUilNote

The platform will calculate the rebate amount of the previous month on the 1st day (fixed) of each month.

Example

Calculate the Rebate Amount of the Current Month

Assume that in the current month:

Customer A purchased a 7-day annual package (price: 288 US dollars) and activated it for 8 channels linked to a Hik-ProConnect box; Customer B purchased a 30-day annual package (price: 600 US dollars) and activated it for 4 channels linked to a Hik-ProConnect box.
The Calculation Type used in the country or region is Separated.
Tiered rebate rate is used for calculation in the country or region:
First Tier: a rebate rate of 10% for the first 4 channels activated with the 7-day annual package; a rebate rate of 20% for the first 2 channels activated with the 30-day annual package.
Second Tier: a rebate rate of 30% for all other channels activated with the 7-day annual package; a rebate rate of 40% for all other channels activated with 30-day annual package. In this case, for the 7-day annual package, the unit price would be: (288/12)/8 = 3 US dollars; For 30-day annual package, (600/12)/4 = 12.5 US dollars, so we can calculate the rebate amount as: 4 x 3 x 10% +4 x 3 x 30% + 2 x 12.5 x 20% + 2 x 12.5 x 40% = 19.8 US dollars.
1. View Rebate Details

After authenticated channel partners promote the health monitoring service or cloud storage service to their customers (i.e., installers and secondary distributors), if customers activate two services for devices added to Hik-Partner Pro or channels linked to a Hik-ProConnect box, authenticated channel partners will earn a certain rebate amount and they can view the details of their rebates.

‘Note

You can view the rebates of the current month after the calculation day of the next month. For example, if the calculation day of the month is set to 15th, you can view the rebates of July on 16th, August.

Go to My Hik-Partner ^ Rebate ^ Rebate Details ^ Health Monitoring Related/Cloud Storage Related .

Figure 18-4 Rebate Details

Select By Month or By Quarter from the drop-down list on the top left, select a corresponding period, and click Search to search for rebate related data.

1. View Bill of Sale

Authenticated channel partners can filter their bills of sale to check the information related to the devices sold to customers (i.e., installers or secondary distributors). The information includes the device serial No., device model, purchaser name, and purchaser type. By setting the purchaser type to Secondary Distributor, authenticated channel partners can transfer rebates related to specific devices to the secondary distributors.

Go to My Hik-Partner ^ Rebate ^ Bill of Sale .

Figure 18-5 Bill of Sale Page

LUJNote

If the bill of sale is uploaded before the calculation day, the related rebates will be credited to the amount of the previous month. If the bill of sale is uploaded on or after the calculation day, the related rebates will be credited to the current month.

Filter Bills of Sale

Enter a device serial No. or purchaser name to filter.
Set one of the following conditions to filter.

Display All

All bills of sale will be displayed.

Display Secondary Distributor Only

Only the devices purchased by secondary distributors will be displayed.

Display Installer Only

Only the devices purchased by installers will be displayed.

Export Bills of Sale

Click Export Bill of Sale and select Export All Bills of Sale or Export Filtered Bills of Sale to export the data as needed.

Transfer Ownership of Future Rebates

If the purchaser of specific devices is a secondary distributor, the authenticated channel partner can transfer the ownership of future rebates related to these devices to the secondary distributor. Once the ownership is transferred, the previously calculated rebates are still owned by the Authenticated channel partner, the secondary distributor starts owning rebates related to these devices from the next month.

The authenticated channel partner can transfer the ownership in the following three methods.

Transfer Ownership of Future Rebates Related to a Device to a Secondary Distributor

On the Bill of Sale page, select a device and click £_ in the Operation column.

Figure 18-6 Transfer Rebates

Enter the purchaser name.
Select Secondary Distributor as the purchaser type.
Click OK.

Batch Transfer Ownership of Future Rebates Related to Multiple Devices to a Secondary Distributor

On the Bill of Sale page, select all devices and click Edit.
Enter the purchaser name.
Select Secondary Distributor as the purchaser type.
Click OK.

Transfer Ownership of Future Rebates Related to Multiple Devices to Multiple Secondary Distributors

On the Bill of Sale page, click Upload Bill of Sale.

Figure 18-7 Upload Bill of Sale

Click Download Template and fill the required information (e.g., fill Secondary Distributor in the Purchaser Type column) in the template.
Click on the Upload Bill of Sale window to upload the filled-in template file.
Click OK.

LUJNote• It is highly recommended to encrypt the device QR code for security reasons.
• Please inform your end users to download or update the Hik-Connect Mobile Client (V 4.15.0 or later). You can send the QR code or download link shown in the banner on the Home page to them.

• For AX Pro, after adding an AX Pro to Hik-Partner Pro, the Installer and Installer Admin’s accounts will become the accounts of the AX Pro; these accounts will be deleted after the Installer deletes the AX Pro from Hik-Partner Pro. If you edit an Installer’s login password, the password for logging in to the AX Pro by this account will also change. ↑
After authorizing a site with AX Pro to an Installer, the Installer and Installer Admin’s accounts will become the accounts of the AX Pro; besides, the account with the permission of managing all sites will also become the account of the AX Pro. ↑
□S Note• Up to 16 live view windows are supported. ↑
If Image and Video Encryption has been enabled for the device on the Hik-Connect mobile client, you are required to enter the device verification code before starting live view. If you don’t know ↑

EZTools instruction manual

admin — Wed, 07 Jun 2023 10:10:41 +0000

EZTools instruction manual, EZTools 2.0 is a tool kit for device management, channel management, device upgrade and maintenance, recording time and capacity calculation.
● Device Management: Search device; Change device password and IP; Configure device remotely including device name, time and network.
● Channel Management: Configure the image, encoding, OSD, and audio (for IPC only) settings.
● Batch upgrade: Upgrade devices using an upgrade file on the PC; Upgrade devices with Internet connection.
● Device Maintenance:Restore device to default settings; Import and export device configuration; export diagnosis info; Restart device.
● NVR Channel Management: Add or delete NVR channels.
● Capacity calculation: Calculate the allowed recording time based on the given disk space; Calculate the required disk space based on the given recording time.

System Requirements:

Item	Requirements
Operating System	Microsoft Windows 7/ Windows 8/ Windows 10/ Windows 11 (32-bit or 64-bit).
CPU	Intel Pentium IV 3.0 GHz or higher.
Memory	1 GB or higher.
Display Definition	1280*720 or higher.

Introduction

This software is a tool used to manage and configure devices on a local area network (LAN) including IPC and NVR. Major functions include:

	Function
Device Configuration	Configure the device name, system time, DST, network, DNS, port and UNP of an IPC or NVR. Besides, Change Device Password and Change Device IP Address are also included.
Channel Configuration	Configure channel settings including image, encoding, OSD, audio and motion detection.
Upgrade Device	Local Upgrade: Upgrade device(s) using an upgrade file on your computer. Online Upgrade: Check the device firmware version, download upgrade files and upgrade the device with Internet connection.
Maintenance	Includes Configuration Import/Export, Export Diagnosis Info, Restart Device, and Restore Default Settings.
NVR Channel Management	Includes adding NVR channel and deleting NVR channel.
Calculation	Calculate recording time allowed or disks needed.
APP Center	Provides a portal through which users can download, install and upgrade other software.

Before you start, make sure the computer on which this software runs and the devices to manage are connected by network.

Read Next :

Uniview Guide EZStation

UNV NVR Troubleshooting

UNV Viewing Playback and Clipping

Upgrade

Check for updates, download and install the latest version.

A “New Version” prompt appears in the upper right corner if a new version is detected.

English

New Version

Click New Version to view details and download the new version.

About

Name: EZTools 2.0

You can choose to install immediately or later when the new version is downloaded. Clicking in the upper right corner will cancel the installation.

Install Now: Close the software and start installation immediately.
Install Later: The installation will start after the user closes the software.

Install

Download completed. Choosing Install Now will close the software automatically.

Install Now H Install Later

Functions

Preparation

Search Devices

The software automatically searches for devices on the LAN where the PC resides and lists the discovered. To search a specified network, follow the steps as shown below:

You need to log in to a device before you can manage, configure, upgrade, maintain or restart a device. Choose the following methods to log in to your device:

• Log in to device in the list: Select the device(s) in the list and then click the Login button on the top.

X Login^^ ft Manage Device Password IP Modify IP | | O Device Config | p Export

V	Device Name	IP	Model	Version	Device Status	Operation				Operation Status
	IPC-E616-IR@DU-X…	192.168.4.123	IPC-E616-IR	QIPC-B1203.13.2.201010	Not logged in		IP	0	e	A ..
	IPC-B301-IR1@P-F36	192.168.4.178	IPC-B301-IR1	IPC_D1201-B5022P12D1702	Not logged in		IP	o	e	A ..
	TIC6831-IR@F50-4…	192.168.4.164	TIC6831-IR	QIPC- B2201.9.3.210426H01	Not logged in	e	IP	o	e	A ..

• Log in to device not in the list: Click Login, and then enter the IP, port, username and password

of the device you want to log in to.

Management and Configuration

Manage Device Password

Complete verification info

The email address will be used to retrieve the password in case you forget it.

Click Device Cfg. on the main menu.
Select device(s), then click Manage Device Password > Verification Info on the top toolbar.
Enter an email address, then click OK.

Change device password

The default password is only intended for the first login. For security, please change the password when logged in. You can only change the admin’s password.

Click Device Cfg. on the main menu.
Choose the following methods to change device password:

For a single device: Click in the Operation column.
For multiple devices: Select devices, then click Manage Device Password > Change Password on the top toolbar.

V	Device Name	IP	Model	Version	Device Status	Operation	Operation Status
o	IPC3634ER3-DPZ28	192.168.4.102	IPC3634ER3-DPZ28	GIPC-B6102.26.36.200909	Logged in	e ip /> o e a	Login succeeded
	HIC6881-IR@X38-L.	192.168,4.98	HIC6881-IR	QIPC-B2201.8.0.201013	Logged in	b ip > o e a	Login succeeded

X Login S Manage Device Password IP Modify IP 0 Device Config

|~^ Export

Change Device IP Address

Click Device Cfg. on the main menu.
Choose the following methods to change device IP:

For a single device: Click IP in the Operation column.
For multiple devices: Select the devices, and then click Modify IP on the top toolbar. Set the start IP in the IP Range box, and the software will automatically fill in other parameters according to the number of devices. Please make sure the username and password are correct.

Gateway

IPC-B3O1-IR1@P-F36 192.168,!
	TIC6831 -IR@F50-4…	192.168>
□	TIC-S262-IR@PA-IR…	192.168,;
□	IPC-B3O1-IR1@P-F36	192.168,;
□	HIC2821-H@A-WS-…	192.168.;
□	IPC-B312-IR@DP-I…	192.168,;
□	IPC2322EBR5-HDUPZ	192.168J

Device Name

ip Range

iDraucp.nwcDciA

I fiO

0 IPC-E616-IR@DU-X… 192.168,

255	. 255	. 255 .	⁰

192	. 168	. 4 .

IP(old)	IP(new)	Subnet Mask	Gateway	Username	Password	Operation Status
192.168.4.123	192.168.4.123	255.255.255.8	192.1684.1	admin		Not logged in
192.1684.178	192.168.4.124	255.255.255.0	192.1684.1	admin	••• ««	Not logged in
192.1684.164	192.1684.125	255.255.255.0	192.1684.1	admin	«•**««	Not logged in

Subnet Mask

Configure Device

Configure the device name, system time, DST, network, DNS, port and UNP of an IPC or NVR.

Click Device Cfg. on the main menu.
Click in the Operation column.

NOTE!

You may select multiple devices to batch configure device system time, DST, DNS, port and UNP.

Device name and network settings cannot be configured in batches.

• Configure the time.

Synchronize the time of the computer or NTP server to the device.

Turn off Auto Update: Click Sync with Computer Time to synchronize the computer’s time to the device.
Turn on Auto Update: Set the NTP server address, NTP port and update interval, then the

device will synchronize time with the NTP server at set intervals.

• Configure Daylight Saving Time (DST).

DST On »Off

Start Time Feb ▼ First ▼ Mon 00 o’clock

End Time Mar Second Mon ▼ I 00 I o’clock

Bias 90 min

• Configure network settings.

Gateway

IP Obtain Mode

Subnet Mask

IP Address

Copper Port

Auto-Negotiation

• Configure the DNS.

Preferred DNS Server 8.8.8. 8

Alternate DNS Server 0.8.4. 4

• Configure ports.

HTTPS Port 443

HTTP Port 80

• Configure UNP. For a network with firewalls or NAT devices, you may use Universal Network Passport (UNP) to interconnect the network. To use this service, you need to configure on a UNP server first.

UNP Service

Off

0 . 0 . 0 . 0

(•Yes C No

Server Address

Authenticate

Username

Password

Configure Channel

Configure channel settings including image, encoding, OSD, audio and motion detection. The parameters displayed may vary with device model.

Click Channel Cfg. on the main menu.
Click in the Operation column.

NOTE!

You may select multiple IPCs of the same model and then click Channel Config on the top toolbar. NVR cannot be configured in batches.

3. Configure image, encoding, OSD, audio and motion detection as needed.

• Configure image settings, including image enhancement, scenes, exposure, smart illumination, and white balance.

NOTE!

A double-click on the image will display it in full screen; another double-click will restore the image.
Clicking Restore Default will restore all the default image settings. After restoration, click Get Parameters to obtain the default settings.
To enable multiple scene schedules, select Multiple Scenes from the Mode drop-down list, select scenes and set the corresponding schedules, illumination ranges, and elevation ranges. Select the check box for the scenes that you have set, and then select the Enable Scene Schedule check box at the bottom to make the schedules effective. When conditions are met for a scene, the camera will switch to this scene; otherwise, the camera uses the default scene (shows ® in the Operation

column). You can click ™ to specify the default scene.

You may copy image, encoding, OSD and motion detection configurations of an NVR channel and apply them to other channel(s) of the same NVR. See Copy NVR Channel Configurations for details.

Image Enhancement

• Configure encoding parameters.

Copy To

• Configure OSD.

1^[1]1 Export L*J Import

NOTE!

You can export and import OSD configurations of IPC channel(s). See Export and Import OSD Configurations of an IPC for details.

• Configure motion detection.

Motion detection detects object motion in the detection area during the set period. The motion detection settings may vary with device. The following takes NVR channel as an example:

Item	Description
Detection Area	Click Draw Area to draw detection area in the left live view window.
Sensitivity	The higher the value, the easier a moving object will be detected.
Trigger Actions	Set the actions to trigger after a motion detection alarm occurs.
Arming Schedule	Set the start and end time during which motion detection takes effect. 0 Edit j O Reset 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Mon Tu. Wed Thu Fri Sst Sur Holiday Click or drag on the green area to set arming periods. Click Edit to enter time periods manually. After you complete the settings for a day, you may copy the settings to other days.

View Device Info

View device information, including device name, model, IP, port, serial number, version info, etc.

Click Device Cfg. or Channel Cfg. or Maintenance on the main menu.
Click “inthe Operation column.

g* NOTE!

Device info is also displayed for devices not logged in, but subnet mask and gateway will not be displayed.

Export Device Info

Export information including name, IP, model, version, MAC address and serial number of device(s) to a CSV file.

Click Device Cfg. or Channel Cfg. on the main menu.
Select the device(s) in the list, and then click the Export button in the upper right corner.

Export Diagnosis Info

Diagnosis information includes logs and system configurations. You can export diagnosis info of device(s) to PC.

Click Maintenance on the main menu.
Click in the Operation column.
Select the destination folder, and then click Export.

Configuration Import/Export

Configuration import allows you to import a configuration file from your computer to a device and change the current settings of the device.

Configuration export allows you to export current configurations of the device and save them as a file for backup.

Click Maintenance on the main menu.
Choose the following methods as needed:

For a single device: Click ^in the Operation column.
For multiple devices: Select the devices, and then click Maintenance on the top toolbar.

Restore Default Settings

Restoring default settings includes restore defaults and restore factory defaults.

Restore defaults: Restore factory default settings except network, user and time settings.

Restore factory defaults: Restore all factory default settings.

Click Maintenance on the main menu.
Select the device(s).
Click Restore on the top toolbar and then choose Restore Defaults or Restore Factory Defaults.

Restart Device

Click Maintenance on the main menu.
Choose the following methods as needed:

For a single device: Click in the Operation column.
For multiple devices: Select the devices, and then click Restart on the top toolbar.

X	Login – Restart Restore		A Maintenan
V	Device Name	IP Model	Version	Device Status	Operation					Operation Status
	206.10.252,134	205.10.252.134 IPC2	IPC_D	Logged in		IP	0	e	&	Login succeeded
o	205.10.252,150	205.10.252.150 IPC2	IPC_2	Logged in		IP	o	e	&	Login succeeded
–	205.10.252,151	205.10.252.151 IPC2	IPC_2	Logged in		IP	o	e	A	Login succeeded
	205.10.252,154	205.10.252.154 IPC2	IPC_2	Logged in	5	IP	0	e	A	Login succeeded

Click Device Cfg. or Channel Cfg. on the main menu.

Click in the Operation column.

Upgrade Device

Device upgrade includes local upgrade and online upgrade. Upgrade progress is displayed in real time during the upgrade.

Local upgrade: Upgrade device(s) using an upgrade file on your computer.

Online upgrade: With Internet connection, online upgrade will check the device firmware version, download upgrade files and upgrade the device. You need to log in first.

Local Upgrade Online Upgrade

All	IP	Model	Version	Device Status	Upgrade Progress	Operation Status
	206.10.252.150	IPC22	1PC.22O	Online		Logged in
0	206.10.252.155	IPC22	IPC.220	Online		Logged in
0	206.10.252.159	IPC22	IPC_22O	Online		Logged in
	206,10.252.162	IPC22	IPC_220	Online		Logged in
	206.10.252.166	IPC32	IPC.220	Online		Logged in
0	206.10.252.167	IPC22	IPC.220	Online		Logged in

Upgrade

NOTE!

The upgrade version must be correct for the device. Otherwise, exceptions may occur.
For an IPC, the upgrade package (ZIP file) must contain the complete upgrade files.
For an NVR, the upgrade file is in .BIN format.
You can upgrade NVR channels in batches.
Please maintain a proper power supply during upgrade. The device will restart after the upgrade is completed.

Upgrade a device using a local upgrade version file

Click Upgrade on the main menu.
Under Local Upgrade, select the device(s) and then click Upgrade. A dialog box is displayed (take NVR as an example).

3. Select the upgrade version file. Click OK.

Online Upgrade

Click Upgrade on the main menu.
Under Online Upgrade, select the device(s) and then click Upgrade.

Click Refresh to check for available upgrades.
Click OK.

NVR Channel Management

NVR channel management includes adding NVR channel and deleting NVR channel.

Click NVR on the main menu.
On the Online tab, select the IPC(s) to import, select the target NVR, and then click Import.

IPC: 7 online, 42 offline

~~j (41

Please enter keywords Q

S S ® IPC

p V^IPC 206.10.252.222

O EWIPC 206.10.3.55

H Sr IPC 206.10.3.77

T&r I PC 206.10.9.157

Sr ’C 206.10.9.158

13 Sr IPC 206.10.9.164

0 Sr^IPC 206.10.9.171

0 Refresh

Please enter keywords Q

Q 1 S NVR.206.10.9.216

Sr 206.10.9.157.80

D Sr2O6.1O.9.121_8O

D Sr 206.10.9.199.80

Sr 206,10.9,172.80

Sr206.10.9.156_80

□ □ ff&NVR 206.10.9.80

Sr 206.10.9.155 80

D Sr206.10.9.199_80

Sr 206.10.9.172.80

Sr206.10.9.157.80

Sr²⁰⁶‘¹⁰¹⁹‘¹²¹–⁵⁰

Sr206.10.9.156.80

D Sr 206.10.9.158 80

NOTE!

In the IPC list, orange means the IPC has been added to an NVR.
In the NVR list, blue means the newly added channel.
To add an offline IPC, click the Offline tab (4 in the figure). The IPC’s username and password are required.

g NOTE!

Use the Add button on the top if the IPC you want to add is not in the IPC list.
To delete an IPC from the NVR list, place the mouse cursor on the IPC and click IUI

. To delete multiple

IPCs in batches, select the IPCs and then click Delete on the top.

Cloud Service

Enable or disable the cloud service and the Add Without Signup feature on the device; delete a cloud device from the current cloud account.

Log in to the device.
Click Device Cfg. or Maintenance on the main menu.
Click in the Operation column. A dialog box is displayed.

Enable or disable the cloud service (EZCloud) as needed. When the cloud service is enabled, you can use the APP to scan the QR code below to add the device.

Note: Please click Refresh to update device status after you enable or disable the cloud service.

Enable or disable the Add Without Signup feature, which, when enabled, allows you to add the device by scanning the QR code using the APP without signing up for a cloud account.

Note: The Add Without Signup feature requires the cloud service be enabled on the device and a strong password be set on the device.

For a cloud device, you can remove it from the current cloud account by clicking Delete.

Calculation

Calculate recording time allowed or disks needed.

Click Calculation on the main menu.
Click Add on the top toolbar.

Note: You may also click Search to Add and select discovered devices for space calculation based on their actual video settings.

Complete the settings. Click OK.
Repeat the above steps as needed.

T	3tal 51	device(s)		0 Refresh W				■ Search Setup

	+ Add		0 Edit	Ü Delete + S	earch to Adc

V	Compression		Channels	Resolution	Frame Rate(fps)	Bit Rate(Kbps)	Total Bandwidth (Kbps)
*	H.264		10	1920xl080(1080P)	25	4096	40960
	H.264		6	1280×720(720P)	25	2048	12288

5. Select devices in the device list.

Calculate days in disk mode

Calculate how many days recordings can be saved based on the daily recording time (hours) and disk capacity available.

Calculate Days

Calculate Disks

Calculate days in RAID mode

Calculate how many days recordings can be saved based on the daily recording time (hours), configured RAID type (0/1/5/6), RAID disk capacity, and the number of disks available.

Calculate Days Calculate Disks

Daily Recordir 24 O |: Hou*)

Space Needed:548.4 GB

Disk Mode (S) RAID Mode

Disk Capacity: 10 C TB

RAID Type: RAID 5

RAID Disks: 5

Usable Space: 36379.7 GB

Recording Time:

Calculate disks in disk mode

Calculate how many disks are needed based on the daily recording time (hours), recording retention period (days), and disk capacity available.

Calculate Days Calculate Disks

~~—O =^-~~

Retention Tim 30 pl] Day(s)

Daily Recordir 24 pl] Hour(s)

Space Needed:16453.1 GB

• -J

(•) Disk Mode Q RAID Mode

Disk Capacity: 10 C TB ▼ I

Disks Needed

Usable Space: 18189.9 GB

Calculate disks in RAID mode

Calculate how many RAID disks are needed based on the daily recording period (hours), recording retention period (days), RAID disk capacity available, and configured RAID type.

Tips for Usage

Select Devices

Select a device by selecting the check box in the first column of the list.

To select multiple devices:

Select devices one by one.
Click All to select all.
Click to select devices while holding down <Ctrl>.
Click to select devices while holding down <Shift>.
Drag the mouse while holding down the left button.

Filter Device List

Filter the list by entering a keyword contained in the IP, model, version, and name of the desired devices.

Click * to clear entered keywords.

Sort Device List

In the device list, click a column title, for example, device name, IP, or status, to sort the listed devices in ascending or descending order.

Customize Device List

Click Search Setup on the top, then select titles to display on the device list.

Copy NVR Channel Configurations

You can copy image, encoding, OSD and motion detection configurations of an NVR channel to other channels of the NVR.

NOTE!

This feature only supports NVR channels that are connected via Uniview private protocol.

Image parameters: Include settings of image enhancement, exposure, smart illumination and white balance.
Encoding parameters: Depending on the stream type that the device supports, you can choose to copy encoding parameters of the main and/or sub streams.
OSD parameters: OSD style.
Motion detection parameters: Detection area, arming schedule.

The following describes how to copy encoding configurations. Copying image, OSD and motion detection configurations are similar.

First, complete the configuration of the channel to copy from (e.g., Channel 001) and save the settings. And then follow the steps as illustrated:

Export and Import OSD Configurations of an IPC

You can export OSD configurations of an IPC to a CSV file for backup, and apply the same configurations to other IPCs by importing the CSV file. The OSD configurations include effect, font size, font color, minimum margin, date & time format, OSD area settings, types and OSD contents.

NOTE!

When importing a CSV file, make sure the IP addresses and serial numbers in the file match that of the target IPCs; otherwise, import will fail.

Configure audio.
Currently this function is not available for NVR channels. ↑

Dahua Configtool Installation Instructions

admin — Thu, 01 Jun 2023 12:11:20 +0000

Dahua Configtool Installation Instructions,ConfigTool is a system tool with the following functions: Real time monitoring preview of IPC and other devices, and support setting of video effects. Set network, encoding parameter of IPC and other devices. View device SN, version and model. Upgrade device program. View device log info. Batch config device parameters.

Dahua Config Tool

Model
Windows Download	MacOS Download	FAQ	Manual
Version: V5.001.0000002.0.R.20230223

Reset Dahua Device Password Using ConfigTool

Description

These instructions will show how to reset the password of a Dahua device using ConfigTool on a local computer

PLEASE NOTE: These instructions can not be completed without assistance from Dahua Technical Support. Please contact Dahua Technical Support via one of the methods HERE

Prerequisites

Dahua IP camera, connected to network
Local computer , with ConfigTool installed

Step by Step Instructions

1. Open ConfigTool

Select “Password Reset” on the left.

Find the device in the list, and verify it has the XML reset option under “Support”.

Click the Reset button on the right

You can select Multiple cameras per export file. Please select all the IP Cameras then click on “Batch Reset” to make a single XML file.

2. Click Agree

3. Select the Reset Mode drop-down and then select XML File

4. Click OK to confirm XML password reset method

5. The default location the XML file will be saved to is displayed. Click Browse Path to select a new location. Click Next

6. The ExportFile XML file will be created. Click OK to continue

7. This file will be used in the password reset process. Contact Dahua technical support via one of the methods HERE for the result file. Once you recieve the Result file, select Open and choose the file on your file system. Click Next

8. If the Result file is accepted, it will allow you to set the new password. Input a new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields. Click Finish

9. If the password is successfully reset, you will see a Green Check Mark next to the camera in the list

Dahua Toolbox ConfigTool Locate Dahua Device

Description

How to locate and identify Dahua devices on LAN
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

Dahua Toolbox installed
Windows PC.
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool.

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

1. With the Dahua Tool box being already installed onto your PC, from the Toolbox home menu select install/open “ConfigTool”.

2. Upon opening the ConfigTool application, here you can see Dahua Devices on the same LAN are located. Refresh if Dahua devices are not located. You can also manually locate the device by typing in the IP address of the device in the search.

3. To view the device live click on the IE (Internet Explorer) icon.

This will open an IE web browser to access the web service of the device.

From this step, by logging in you can select live view.

Update firmware using the ConfigTool via Dahua ToolBox

Description

Update firmware of Dahua Device using the ConfiTool via Dahua Toolbox.
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

Dahua Toolbox installed
Windows PC.
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool.

Step by Step Instructions

1. From the Dahua ToolBox, open the ConfigTool.

3. Click on the upgrade icon. Here you will see a list of located Dahua devices.

With the appropriate firmware for the device model already downloaded, click on browse and locate the upgrade BIN file.

Once BIN file is located click on Open.

Click on upgrade. Once firmware is upgraded, the device should reboot and be ready to go.

Modify IP address of Dahua Device through ConfigTool via Dahua ToolBox

Description

Modify IP address of Dahua Device if user name and password are factory default.
Modify IP address of Dahua Device if user name and password are modified.
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

Dahua Toolbox installed
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool
Windows PC

Step by Step Instructions

1. Launch the Dahua ToolBox and open the ConfigTool.

Upon opening the ConfigTool application, here you can see Dahua Devices on the same LAN are located. Refresh if Dahua devices are not located. You can also manually locate the device by typing in the IP address of the device in the search.

2. To modify IP address of selected device, select the edit button.

Note: this step pertains if Dahua Devices are using factory default user names and passwords.

600px

Select DHCP or for static change the IP address according to the LAN configuration -> Select “OK” to save changes.

600px

Refresh to verify modified IP address.

3. To modify IP of device with modified user names and passwords, click on the IE (Internet Explorer) icon of the selected device. This will open the web service of the device through IE.

Select the setup tab -> Select TCP/IP

Select DHCP or Static to modify IP along with associated LAN configuration -> Select Save.

Dahua ConfigTool Version 4.05 Locate Dahua Device

Description

How to locate and identify Dahua devices on LAN
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

ConfigTool Version 4.05
ConfigTool Downloads
Windows PC.
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool.

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

1. Install ConfigTool, Run and Open.

ConfigTool Downloads

3. To view the device live click on the IE (Internet Explorer) icon.

This will open an IE web browser to access the web service of the device.

From this step, by logging in you can select live view.

How to locate device on LAN via ConfigTool 3.20

Description

How to locate and identify Dahua devices on LAN
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

ConfigTool 3.20
ConfigTool download
Windows PC.
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool.

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR”

1. Download and install ConfigTool.

ConfigTool Download

2. Run the ConfigTool.

3. The ConfigTool should display your IP Camera’s IP address. Click the, “” icon to open Internet Explorer and access your IP Camera. Alternatively, you can input that IP address into your browser manually.

4. Login with the default credentials: User Name: admin Passsword: admin

Modify IP address of Dahua Device via ConfigTool 4.05

Description

Modify IP address of Dahua Device if user name and password are factory default.
Modify IP address of Dahua Device if user name and password are modified.
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

ConfigTool Version 4.05
ConfigTool Downloads
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool.
Windows PC.

Step by Step Instructions

1. Upon opening the ConfigTool application, here you can see Dahua Devices on the same LAN are located. Refresh if Dahua devices are not located. You can also manually locate the device by typing in the IP address of the device in the search.

2. To modify IP address of selected device, select the edit button

Note: this step pertains if Dahua Devices are using factory default user names and passwords.

600px

Select DHCP or for static change the IP address according to the LAN configuration -> Select “OK” to save changes.

600px

Refresh to verify modified IP address.

3. To modify IP of device with modified user names and passwords, click on the IE (Internet Explorer) icon of the selected device. This will open the web service of the device through IE.

Select the setup tab -> Select TCP/IP

Select DHCP or Static to modify IP along with associated LAN configuration -> Select Save.

Firmware Upgrade via ConfigTool

Description

This page will show you how to upgrade the firmware of your Dahua device via ConfigTool

Note: All devices should be “Factory Reset” once the firmware update is complete.

Prerequisites

Dahua device(s) with network connection(s)
ConfigTool installed on a local computer
Firmware file for device(s) downloaded to computer – Firmware by Device

Step by Step Instructions

Single Device Upgrade

1. Open ConfigTool and click on Search Setting at the top

3. Click on Device Upgrade on the left.
Find the device you want to upgrade in the list and click on the Folder icon next to it under the Upgrade File Path column

4. Use the file explorer to find the firmware file on your computer and select it.
Then click on Open

5. Verify the file path is listed next to the device in the list.
Then click on the Upgrade icon to the right of the device in the Operate column

6. Click on OK

7. The progress bar will fill up as the device is upgraded

8. Once the device has been successfully upgraded you will see a Green Check Mark next to it in the list

Batch Device Upgrade

1. Open ConfigTool and click on Search Setting at the top

4. Click on OK

5. Click on Browse

6. Use the file explorer to find the firmware file on your computer and select it.
Then click on Open

7. Click OK at the bottom

8. The progress bars will fill up as the devices are upgraded

9. Once the devices have been successfully upgraded you will see Green Check Marks next to them in the list

ConfigTool Template Setup

Description

You can create and apply the templates.

Creating the template: Back up or save the video and encoding parameters for the device.
Applying the template: Restore or batch configuring the video and encoding parameters for the device.

Please Note:

These instructions do not copy the network settings or email notifications.

Template Import/Export will work only between identical model devices

Prerequisites

For this example we will be using the following:

2x N41BK22s on DH_IPC-HX2X3X-Rhea_MultiLang_NP_Stream2_V2.800.0000008.0.R.190619
ConfigTool Version V4.011.00GP001.0 from the Dahua ToolBox

Notes:

N41BK22s on Firmware Version: 2.622.0000000.31.R Build Date: 2018-08-13 -DID NOT WORK, UPDATING BOTH IPCs to latest current fw and trying again

Template Examples

IPC Template
PTZ Template
DVR Template
NVR Template

Video Instructions

Export Device Config

Import Device Config

Step by Step Instructions

Export Device Config

1. Launch Toolbox, and login.

2. Download and install ConfigTool.

3. Launch ConfigTool.

4. Click Search Setting at the top of the window

5. Enter the credentials (username and password) for the device, then click OK

6. Click on the icon at the bottom of the bar on the left hand side of ConfigTool.

7. Click on the Folder icon with the two green arrows.

8. A prompt will pop up asking, “Export template from device?” click, “OK”

9. Locate the device you want to export the configuration of in the device list, and left click on it.

10. Click, “Export”

11. A prompt will pop up asking, “Export template from (IP Address of Device Selected), continue? Click, “OK”

12. Input a name into “Template Name”

13. Click, “Save as”

At this point ConfigTool crashed. I relaunched ConfigTool, and get, “Export Template Failed”

14. A prompt will pop up asking where you would like to save the file. Select where you would like to save the file, and click, “OK”

Import Device Config

1. Launch Toolbox, and login.

2. Download and install ConfigTool.

3. Launch ConfigTool.

4. Click Search Setting at the top of the window

5. Enter the credentials (username and password) for the device, then click OK

6. Click on the icon at the bottom of the bar on the left hand side of ConfigTool.

7. Click on the Folder icon without the two green arrows.

8. A window will pop up, click, “Browse” and locate the Device Template file you backed up in the previous instructions.

9. Click on the Device Template file, then click, “Open”

10. Click, “OK”

11. The template settings should load and display in ConfigTool. Verify that all the settings are correct.

12. Click, “Template Application”

13. A window will pop up stating, “The file exists, do you want to overwrite it?” select, “OK”

14. Expand the dropdown box on the right hand side to list all the devices.

15. Check the box next to the device you wish to apply the template.

16. Click, “OK”

17. A window will pop up stating, “Configure 1 device(s) using template “C:/ProgramFiles/Toolsbox/Template_Name.xml” click, “OK”

A green check mark will confirm a successful import

NOTE: A yellow exclamation icon will display next to a device when there is an issue with the import.

Click the icon to obtain more details about which setting(s) were not successfully imported

ConfigTool/How to configure Device DST settings

Dahua Config Tool Operating Instructions

admin — Mon, 08 May 2023 15:12:31 +0000

Dahua Config Tool Operating Instructions

Reset Dahua Device Password Using ConfigTool

Description

These instructions will show how to reset the password of a Dahua device using ConfigTool on a local computer

PLEASE NOTE: These instructions can not be completed without assistance from Dahua Technical Support. Please contact Dahua Technical Support via one of the methods HERE

Prerequisites

Dahua IP camera, connected to network
Local computer , with ConfigTool installed

Step by Step Instructions

1. Open ConfigTool

Select “Password Reset” on the left.

Find the device in the list, and verify it has the XML reset option under “Support”.

Click the Reset button on the right

You can select Multiple cameras per export file. Please select all the IP Cameras then click on “Batch Reset” to make a single XML file.

2. Click Agree

3. Select the Reset Mode drop-down and then select XML File

4. Click OK to confirm XML password reset method

5. The default location the XML file will be saved to is displayed. Click Browse Path to select a new location. Click Next

6. The ExportFile XML file will be created. Click OK to continue

8. If the Result file is accepted, it will allow you to set the new password. Input a new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields. Click Finish

9. If the password is successfully reset, you will see a Green Check Mark next to the camera in the list

Read More :

Using the Meraki Vision Portal

Tuya Camera User Guide

Dahua Toolbox Dahua Config Tool Locate Dahua Device

Description

How to locate and identify Dahua devices on LAN
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

Dahua Toolbox installed
Windows PC.
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool.

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

1. With the Dahua Tool box being already installed onto your PC, from the Toolbox home menu select install/open “ConfigTool”.

3. To view the device live click on the IE (Internet Explorer) icon.

This will open an IE web browser to access the web service of the device.

From this step, by logging in you can select live view.

Update firmware using the ConfigTool via Dahua ToolBox

Description

Update firmware of Dahua Device using the ConfiTool via Dahua Toolbox.
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

Dahua Toolbox installed
Windows PC.
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool.

Step by Step Instructions

1. From the Dahua ToolBox, open the ConfigTool.

3. Click on the upgrade icon. Here you will see a list of located Dahua devices.

With the appropriate firmware for the device model already downloaded, click on browse and locate the upgrade BIN file.

Once BIN file is located click on Open.

Click on upgrade. Once firmware is upgraded, the device should reboot and be ready to go.

Modify IP address of Dahua Device through ConfigTool via Dahua ToolBox

Description

Modify IP address of Dahua Device if user name and password are factory default.
Modify IP address of Dahua Device if user name and password are modified.
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

Dahua Toolbox installed
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool
Windows PC

Step by Step Instructions

1. Launch the Dahua ToolBox and open the ConfigTool.

Upon opening the ConfigTool application, here you can see Dahua Devices on the same LAN are located. Refresh if Dahua devices are not located. You can also manually locate the device by typing in the IP address of the device in the search.

2. To modify IP address of selected device, select the edit button.

Note: this step pertains if Dahua Devices are using factory default user names and passwords.

600px

Select DHCP or for static change the IP address according to the LAN configuration -> Select “OK” to save changes.

600px

Refresh to verify modified IP address.

3. To modify IP of device with modified user names and passwords, click on the IE (Internet Explorer) icon of the selected device. This will open the web service of the device through IE.

Select the setup tab -> Select TCP/IP

Select DHCP or Static to modify IP along with associated LAN configuration -> Select Save.

Dahua ConfigTool Version 4.05 Locate Dahua Device

Description

How to locate and identify Dahua devices on LAN
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

ConfigTool Version 4.05
ConfigTool Downloads
Windows PC.
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool.

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

1. Install ConfigTool, Run and Open.

ConfigTool Downloads

3. To view the device live click on the IE (Internet Explorer) icon.

This will open an IE web browser to access the web service of the device.

From this step, by logging in you can select live view.

How to locate device on LAN via ConfigTool 3.20

Description

How to locate and identify Dahua devices on LAN
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

ConfigTool 3.20
ConfigTool download
Windows PC.
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool.

Video Instructions

Step by Step Instructions

Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR”

1. Download and install ConfigTool.

ConfigTool Download

2. Run the ConfigTool.

4. Login with the default credentials: User Name: admin Passsword: admin

Modify IP address of Dahua Device via ConfigTool 4.05

Description

Modify IP address of Dahua Device if user name and password are factory default.
Modify IP address of Dahua Device if user name and password are modified.
Note: If your IP Camera is connected to the back of an NVR, these instructions will not apply. Please see, “How to Connect IP Camera to NVR“

Prerequisites

ConfigTool Version 4.05
ConfigTool Downloads
Dahua Devices on the same LAN as the PC for using the ConfigTool.
Windows PC.

Step by Step Instructions

2. To modify IP address of selected device, select the edit button

Note: this step pertains if Dahua Devices are using factory default user names and passwords.

600px

Select DHCP or for static change the IP address according to the LAN configuration -> Select “OK” to save changes.

600px

Refresh to verify modified IP address.

3. To modify IP of device with modified user names and passwords, click on the IE (Internet Explorer) icon of the selected device. This will open the web service of the device through IE.

Select the setup tab -> Select TCP/IP

Select DHCP or Static to modify IP along with associated LAN configuration -> Select Save.

Firmware Upgrade via ConfigTool

Description

This page will show you how to upgrade the firmware of your Dahua device via ConfigTool

Note: All devices should be “Factory Reset” once the firmware update is complete.

Prerequisites

Dahua device(s) with network connection(s)
ConfigTool installed on a local computer
Firmware file for device(s) downloaded to computer – Firmware by Device

Step by Step Instructions

Single Device Upgrade

1. Open ConfigTool and click on Search Setting at the top

3. Click on Device Upgrade on the left.
Find the device you want to upgrade in the list and click on the Folder icon next to it under the Upgrade File Path column

4. Use the file explorer to find the firmware file on your computer and select it.
Then click on Open

5. Verify the file path is listed next to the device in the list.
Then click on the Upgrade icon to the right of the device in the Operate column

6. Click on OK

7. The progress bar will fill up as the device is upgraded

8. Once the device has been successfully upgraded you will see a Green Check Mark next to it in the list

Batch Device Upgrade

1. Open ConfigTool and click on Search Setting at the top

4. Click on OK

5. Click on Browse

6. Use the file explorer to find the firmware file on your computer and select it.
Then click on Open

7. Click OK at the bottom

8. The progress bars will fill up as the devices are upgraded

9. Once the devices have been successfully upgraded you will see Green Check Marks next to them in the list

ConfigTool Template Setup

Description

You can create and apply the templates.

Creating the template: Back up or save the video and encoding parameters for the device.
Applying the template: Restore or batch configuring the video and encoding parameters for the device.

Please Note:

These instructions do not copy the network settings or email notifications.

Template Import/Export will work only between identical model devices

Prerequisites

For this example we will be using the following:

2x N41BK22s on DH_IPC-HX2X3X-Rhea_MultiLang_NP_Stream2_V2.800.0000008.0.R.190619
ConfigTool Version V4.011.00GP001.0 from the Dahua ToolBox

Notes:

N41BK22s on Firmware Version: 2.622.0000000.31.R Build Date: 2018-08-13 -DID NOT WORK, UPDATING BOTH IPCs to latest current fw and trying again

Template Examples

IPC Template
PTZ Template
DVR Template
NVR Template

Video Instructions

Export Device Config

Import Device Config

Step by Step Instructions

Export Device Config

1. Launch Toolbox, and login.

2. Download and install ConfigTool.

3. Launch ConfigTool.

4. Click Search Setting at the top of the window

5. Enter the credentials (username and password) for the device, then click OK

6. Click on the icon at the bottom of the bar on the left hand side of ConfigTool.

7. Click on the Folder icon with the two green arrows.

8. A prompt will pop up asking, “Export template from device?” click, “OK”

9. Locate the device you want to export the configuration of in the device list, and left click on it.

10. Click, “Export”

11. A prompt will pop up asking, “Export template from (IP Address of Device Selected), continue? Click, “OK”

12. Input a name into “Template Name”

13. Click, “Save as”

At this point ConfigTool crashed. I relaunched ConfigTool, and get, “Export Template Failed”

14. A prompt will pop up asking where you would like to save the file. Select where you would like to save the file, and click, “OK”

Import Device Config

1. Launch Toolbox, and login.

2. Download and install ConfigTool.

3. Launch ConfigTool.

4. Click Search Setting at the top of the window

5. Enter the credentials (username and password) for the device, then click OK

6. Click on the icon at the bottom of the bar on the left hand side of ConfigTool.

7. Click on the Folder icon without the two green arrows.

8. A window will pop up, click, “Browse” and locate the Device Template file you backed up in the previous instructions.

9. Click on the Device Template file, then click, “Open”

10. Click, “OK”

11. The template settings should load and display in ConfigTool. Verify that all the settings are correct.

12. Click, “Template Application”

13. A window will pop up stating, “The file exists, do you want to overwrite it?” select, “OK”

14. Expand the dropdown box on the right hand side to list all the devices.

15. Check the box next to the device you wish to apply the template.

16. Click, “OK”

17. A window will pop up stating, “Configure 1 device(s) using template “C:/ProgramFiles/Toolsbox/Template_Name.xml” click, “OK”

A green check mark will confirm a successful import

NOTE: A yellow exclamation icon will display next to a device when there is an issue with the import.

Click the icon to obtain more details about which setting(s) were not successfully imported

ConfigTool/How to configure Device DST settings

Description

This guide will walk you through the process to configure DST settings for Dahua Cameras and Recorders in batches.

! Note: make sure the devices that you want to configure are in the same network.

Prerequisites

ConfigTool
The devices that you want to configure are in the same network.

Step by Step Instructions

1. Launch ConfigTool

2. Click on [Search Setting]on the right-upper corner and insert the device password on [Password].

If the password is not correct, no settings can be applied on devices.

3. Go to [System Settings], and select from the device list the devices whose DST settings you want to modify.

Check [DST Enable], and insert the exact information on the picture:

DST Type: Week
Start Time: Mar 2nd Sunday 02:00
End Time: Nov 1st Sunday 02:00

If the DST settings are applied successfully on the device, you will see the green check mark next to the device IP.

Please try again, if it is a yellow warning mark.

4. After modifying DST settings, you should also re-sync the time of the devices, just to make sure that the Time is also correct.

This is because when DST is modified, cameras’ time may jump one hour forward or backward!

This is crucial, therefore it is necessary to re-sync the time.

Click on [Sync PC], and when the green mark appears, then the Time of the devices is successfully synced.

5. In the end, go to the webpage of the camera, to double check if the setting is correct on the device end.